JP6878654B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

As a gaming machine, when a gaming medium such as a gaming ball is launched into the gaming area by a launching device, the gaming medium wins a prize in a winning area such as a winning opening provided in the gaming area, and an execution condition (starting condition) is satisfied. Pachinko that enhances the interest of the game by a so-called variable display game in which a plurality of types of identification information (hereinafter referred to as display symbols) are variably displayed on a variable display device and whether or not to give a predetermined game value is determined based on the display result. There is a game machine. In such a pachinko gaming machine, when the stop symbol mode when the variable display of the display symbol in the variable display game is completely stopped becomes the specific display mode, the pachinko gaming machine becomes an advantageous state (big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player. For example, a pachinko gaming machine that is in a big hit game state opens a special electric accessory called a big winning opening or an attacker, makes it extremely easy to win a game ball, and gives a player a predetermined game value. Provide continuously for a certain period of time. In such a pachinko gaming machine, before the display result is derived and displayed on the variable display device, various types of effects that make the player expect the display result to be in a specific display mode are executed.

Some such gaming machines can display a specific display corresponding to a variable display (for example, a hold display corresponding to a variable display that has not yet been executed, an active display corresponding to a variable display that is being executed), for example. In some cases, the hold display is always displayed in a rotating manner (for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2013-212136

However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, since the specific display only operates, the effect of the effect cannot be enhanced.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the effect of production.

(A) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention is
A gaming machine capable of variable display
Supports variable display in modes that involve movement (for example, switching the display position to the advanced position or retracted position, switching from the expressionless display mode to the display mode in which the eyes are opened to sweat or the display mode is to shed tears). specific display (e.g., active display corresponding to the variation of the running, hold display corresponding to variations not yet started) to the a plurality displayable, specific display of the display mode (e.g., display color (white, blue, Red). The active display is displayed by performing steps S90663B and S90667B in the specific display means (for example, the effect control microcomputer 90100) in which the shape, pattern, position, range, etc. to be displayed can be changed. Then, the hold display is displayed by performing steps S903911 and S903929, and the display mode of the specific display is changed by performing step S904713).
A change suggestion effect execution means (for example, in the effect control microcomputer 90100) capable of executing a change suggestion effect (for example, a change effect (first change effect, second change effect)) suggesting a change in the display mode of the specific display. A part in which the change effect is set in step S904506, the process table corresponding to the change effect is selected in step S90804, and the change effect is executed by performing steps S90806 and S908105).
The specific display means is an operation mode of the specific display (for example, display position (advance position, retract position). Operation frequency (high frequency, low frequency) and display direction (for example, downward, rightward) when the change suggestion effect is executed. ) And the like, the display mode of the specific display can be changed at a different rate (for example, the effect control microcomputer 90100 executes steps S904707 to S904709). When the display position of the specific display that is the execution target of the first change effect is the advance position, the display mode of the specific display is changed at a rate of 100%, while the specific display that is the execution target of the first change effect is displayed. When the display position is the evacuation position, the display mode of the specific display is not changed (the display mode of the specific display is changed at a rate of 0%).
A change determining means for determining whether or not there is a change in the display mode of the specific display,
Further provided with an operation mode selection means for selecting an operation mode of a specific display,
The specific display means displays the specific display in the operation mode selected by the operation mode selection means, and displays the specific display.
The operation mode selection means is
As the operation mode of the specific display, either a first operation mode or a second operation mode in which the display position is changed more frequently than the first operation mode can be selected.
When selecting the operation mode of one particular display, in different specific display from the specific display of the one, it has been determined that changing the display mode by changing determining means has is changed Not mites display mode When the non-changed specific display is included , the second operation mode is selected as the operation mode of the one specific display at a higher rate than when the unchanged specific display is not included.
The change suggestion effect execution means is characterized in that the change suggestion effect can be executed at a different ratio depending on the operation mode of the specific display.
According to such a configuration, the player can pay attention to the operation mode of the specific display.

(1) Other gaming machines
A gaming machine provided with a display means capable of performing variable display (for example, an image display device 5) and capable of being controlled in an advantageous state.
It is possible to execute the suggestion effect suggesting whether or not the advantageous state is controlled by the mode of the effect executed by the predetermined effect means, and to execute the effect auxiliary display related to the suggestion effect by the display means. A certain suggestion effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the process of step S804 or step S805) is provided.
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the effect auxiliary display at different positions depending on whether or not a specific condition is satisfied (for example, when it is determined Yes in step S803, the process of step S805 is executed. Etc.),
further,
Supports variable display in modes that involve movement (for example, switching the display position to the advanced position or retracted position, switching from the expressionless display mode to the display mode in which the eyes are opened to sweat or the display mode is to shed tears). It is possible to display a specific display (for example, an active display corresponding to a fluctuation during execution, a hold display corresponding to a fluctuation that has not been started yet), and a display mode of the specific display (for example, display color (white, blue, red)). ). The active display is displayed by performing steps S90663B and S90667B in the specific display means (for example, the effect control microcomputer 90100) in which the shape, pattern, position, range, etc. to be displayed may be changed. , Step S903911, S903929 to display the hold display, and step S904713 to change the display mode of the specific display).
A change suggestion effect execution means (for example, in the effect control microcomputer 90100) capable of executing a change suggestion effect (for example, a change effect (first change effect, second change effect)) suggesting a change in the display mode of the specific display. A part in which the change effect is set in step S904506, the process table corresponding to the change effect is selected in step S90804, and the change effect is executed by performing steps S90806 and S908105).
The specific display means is an operation mode of the specific display (for example, display position (advance position, retract position). Operation frequency (high frequency, low frequency) and display direction (for example, downward, rightward) when the change suggestion effect is executed. ) And the like, the display mode of the specific display can be changed at a different rate (for example, the effect control microcomputer 90100 executes steps S904707 to S904709). When the display position of the specific display that is the execution target of the first change effect is the advance position, the display mode of the specific display is changed at a rate of 100%, while the specific display that is the execution target of the first change effect is displayed. When the display position is the evacuation position, the display mode of the specific display is not changed (the display mode of the specific display is changed at a rate of 0%).
A change determining means for determining whether or not there is a change in the display mode of the specific display,
Further provided with an operation mode selection means for selecting an operation mode of a specific display,
The specific display means displays the specific display in the operation mode selected by the operation mode selection means, and displays the specific display.
The operation mode selection means is
As the operation mode of the specific display, either a first operation mode or a second operation mode in which the display position is changed more frequently than the first operation mode can be selected.
When it is determined by the change determining means that the display mode is changed and the unchanged specific display whose display mode has not been changed is displayed, the ratio is higher than when the unchanged specific display is not displayed. 2 It is characterized in that the operation mode is selected.
According to such a configuration, the execution pattern of the production auxiliary display is diversified, and it is possible to prevent the game from being enjoyed. In addition, the player can be made to pay attention to the operation mode of the specific display.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above
When the specific condition is satisfied, the suggestion effect executing means can execute the effect auxiliary display in the specific display area in the display means (for example, the operation of the movable body in the specific display area in the image display device 5). It is possible to display an effect image and perform a movable body effect in a mode different from the normal time),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to easily recognize that a specific condition is satisfied, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above
Variable display means for variable display and
Corresponding display means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control that performs hold display or active display) that performs corresponding display corresponding to variable display, and
When the display mode of the corresponding display can be changed and the display area of the corresponding display can be expanded (for example, in the process of step S807, the enlarged mode setting for the enlarged display is performed). , CPU 120 for effect control that performs enlargement control to magnify all the hold display and active display being displayed including the hold display to be announced).
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to easily recognize that the display mode of the corresponding display changes, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

(4) In the gaming machine according to (2) or (3) above.
The predetermined effect means is a movable body (for example, a movable body 99) that can operate according to the effect executed by the display means.
When the suggestion effect executing means is capable of operating the movable body and executing an effect auxiliary display (for example, displaying an effect image) related to the operation of the movable body, and the specific condition is satisfied. Unlike the case where the specific condition is not satisfied, the effect auxiliary display is executed in the specific display area (for example, the movable body 99 is rotated as a movable body special effect and an effect is applied to a small screen which is a specific display area. Display images, etc.),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, the production auxiliary display can be appropriately performed, and the game entertainment can be improved.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (2) to (4) above.
Variable display means for variable display and
Corresponding display means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control that performs hold display or active display) that performs corresponding display corresponding to variable display, and
A display control means for controlling the display of the specific display area (for example, an effect control CPU 120 for executing the process of step S807 or step S810) is further provided.
The display control means can display a display other than the corresponding display in the specific display area (for example, a display other than the display related to the hold / active change effect such as a hold display, an active display, a character image in the action effect, etc.). ),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a sense of incongruity caused by displaying the corresponding display in a plurality of display areas.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (2) to (5) above.
Further provided with a notice effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the process of step S814) capable of executing a plurality of types of advance notice effects.
The advance notice effect executing means can execute the plurality of types of advance notice effects in the specific display area (the effect performed in step S814 is the same when a small screen as the specific display area is displayed. It is done on a small screen, etc.),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, the visibility of the advance notice effect can be improved, the effect of the effect can be improved, and the interest of the game can be improved.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (2) to (6) above.
The suggestion effect execution means can further execute a suggestion display effect different from the suggestion effect (for example, a hold / active change effect can be executed).
The specific condition is satisfied by executing the suggestion effect and the suggestion display effect within the same period (for example, by performing both the hold / active change effect for enlarging the display and the movable body effect). Conditions are met, etc.),
The suggestion effect executing means ends at least the suggestion display effect after the end of the suggestion effect, and ends the display by the specific display area based on the end of the suggestion display effect (for example, hold / active change). The effect ends after the end of the movable body effect, and the small screen as a specific display area is deleted after the end of the hold / active change effect),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, the effect of production can be enhanced. In addition, it is possible to reduce (prevent) the sense of incongruity caused by ending the suggestion effect when the effect is halfway.

(8) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (7) above.
Variable display means for variable display and
Corresponding display means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control that performs hold display or active display) that performs corresponding display corresponding to variable display, and
Corresponding display changing means (for example, notice) that changes the display mode of the corresponding display and displays the corresponding display of the change target in a special display mode that is displayed only when the display mode of the corresponding display changes. It is further provided with an effect control CPU 120 or the like that changes the display mode of the hold display to be announced so that it is possible to recognize which hold the target variable display is.
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, the changing target becomes clear, and the effect of the effect can be improved.

(9) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (8) above.
Variable display means for variable display and
Corresponding display means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control that performs hold display or active display) that performs corresponding display corresponding to variable display, and
The character 930 holds the color ball 931 as shown in the corresponding display changing means (as shown in FIGS. 26 (a), (b), and (c)) for changing the display mode of the corresponding display by acting the action display (for example, a ball). When thrown toward the display TH, the color ball 931 collides with the hold display TH and the color of the hold display TH changes, etc.).
The corresponding display changing means is
The first pattern (such as the success pattern in FIGS. 26 (a), (b), and (c)) that starts the display of the action display and changes the display mode of the corresponding display after a lapse of a predetermined period, and the display of the action display. Is possible, and a second pattern (such as the failure pattern in FIGS. 26 (a), (b), and (d)) that does not change the display mode of the corresponding display after a lapse of a predetermined period can be executed.
After starting the display of the action display, it is possible to execute deceleration control for decelerating the speed of the action display with respect to the target corresponding display at a common timing in a predetermined period between the first pattern and the second pattern. (As shown in FIG. 26B, the deceleration of the ball speed is started at the same timing at the time of success and at the time of failure).
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by changing the action display.

In addition, the embodiments for carrying out the invention described later include the following inventions (10) to (16). Conventionally, in a gaming machine, a specific display corresponding to a variable display (for example, a hold display corresponding to a variable display that has not yet been executed, a variable display during execution, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-212136). (Active display corresponding to) can be displayed, and for example, it is known that the hold display is displayed in a mode in which the hold display always rotates. However, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, since the specific display only operates, the effect of the effect cannot be enhanced. In view of this point, it is required to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the effect of production.

(10) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to another aspect is a gaming machine capable of performing variable display, and an aspect involving an operation (for example, an aspect of switching the display position to an advance position or a retract position). A specific display corresponding to a variable display (for example, an active display corresponding to a fluctuation during execution, which is still started) in a display mode in which the expressionless display mode is switched to a display mode in which the eyes are opened to sweat or a display mode in which tears are shed). It is possible to display a hold display corresponding to a fluctuation that has not occurred, and a display mode of a specific display (for example, display color (white, blue, red). The shape, pattern, position, range, etc. to be displayed may be used). (For example, in the effect control microcomputer 90100, the active display is displayed by performing steps S90663B and S90667B, the hold display is displayed by performing steps S903911 and S903929, and step S904713 is performed. A part that changes the display mode of the specific display) and a change suggestion effect that suggests a change in the display mode of the specific display (for example, a change effect (for example, a first change effect, a second change effect)) can be executed. The effect execution means (for example, in the effect control microcomputer 90100, the change effect is set in step S904506, the process table corresponding to the change effect is selected in step S90804, and the change effect is executed by performing steps S90806 and S908105. The specific display means includes a specific display operation mode (for example, display position (advance position, retract position), operation frequency (high frequency, low frequency), and display direction when the change suggestion effect is executed. The display mode of the specific display can be changed at a different rate depending on (for example, other operation modes such as downward and rightward) (for example, the effect control microcomputer 90100 has steps S904707 to S904709). By executing, when the display position of the specific display, which is the execution target of the first change effect, is the advance position, the display mode of the specific display is changed at a rate of 100%, while the execution of the first change effect is executed. When the display position of the target specific display is the retracted position, the display mode of the specific display is not changed (the display mode of the specific display is changed at a rate of 0%). According to such a configuration, the player can pay attention to the operation mode of the specific display, and the effect of the effect can be improved.

(11) In the above (10), the specific display means displays the specific display in a mode accompanied by an operation regardless of whether or not the display mode is changed (for example, the display position (advance position) for any of the specific displays. The change suggestion effect execution means can execute the change suggestion effect at a different ratio depending on the operation mode of the specific display (for example, the effect control microcomputer 90100 is shown in FIG. 72. By executing step S904508 using the operation frequency determination lottery table shown in (C), when the operation frequency is high, the change effect (first change effect, second) is compared with the case where the operation frequency is low. It may be easy to execute (change production). According to such a configuration, the player can pay attention to the operation mode of the specific display.

(12) In the above (10) or (11), the specific display means can switch between a specific operation mode (for example, an advance position) and a non-specific operation mode (for example, a retracted position) to display a specific display (for example, a retracted position). For example, the effect control microcomputer 90100 can execute steps S904704, S904709, and S904710), and the display of the specific display when the operation mode of the specific display when the change suggestion effect is executed is the specific operation mode. The mode can be changed (for example, the effect control microcomputer 90100 executes the steps S904707 to S904713 to specify the specific display when the display position of the specific display to be executed of the first change effect is the advance position. The display mode of the display can be changed). According to such a configuration, the player can pay attention to the operation mode of the specific display.

(13) In any of the above (10) to (12), the change suggestion effect executing means is the first change suggestion effect (for example, the first change effect) and the second change suggestion effect (for example, the second change effect). It is possible to execute any of a plurality of types of change suggestion effects including and (for example, the effect control microcomputer 90100 executes any of the change suggestion effects by performing steps S90804, S908006, and S908105. The specific display means can switch between a specific operation mode (for example, an advance position) and a non-specific operation mode (for example, a retracted position) to display a specific display (for example, the effect control microcomputer 90100 can display the specific display). Steps S904704, S904709, and S904710 can be executed), and when the first change suggestion effect is executed, the display mode of the specific display can be changed if the operation mode of the specific display is the specific operation mode (for example, the display mode of the specific display can be changed). By executing steps S904707 to S904713, the effect control microcomputer 90100 can change the display mode of the specific display when the display position of the specific display to be executed of the first change effect is the advance position. On the other hand, when the second change suggestion effect is executed, the display mode of the specific display can be changed regardless of the operation mode of the specific display (for example, the effect control microcomputer 90100 executes steps S90471 to S904713). As a result, the display mode of the specific display can be changed regardless of whether the display position of the specific display, which is the execution target of the second change effect, is the advance position or the retracted position). According to such a configuration, the effect of production can be improved.

(14) In any of the above (10) to (13), it can be suggested that the control is performed in an advantageous state depending on the display mode of the specific display (for example, the effect control microcomputer 90100 is in steps S903906 and S903924). By determining the display mode pattern using the display mode pattern determination lottery table shown in FIG. 65, the reliability of the jackpot (white <blue <red) is suggested by the display mode), and the specific display is specified by the operation mode of the specific display. It is possible to suggest whether or not the display mode of the above is changed (for example, the effect control microcomputer 90100 determines the operation frequency using the operation frequency determination lottery table shown in FIG. 72C in step S904508. Therefore, the reliability (indicating low frequency <high frequency) that the display mode of the specific display changes depending on the operation frequency may be set. According to such a configuration, the effect of production can be improved.

(15) In any of the above (10) to (14), the change suggestion effect executing means is one changed specific display whose display mode has already been changed (for example, one shown in FIGS. 78 (1) to (2)). The change suggestion effect (for example, the second change effect shown in FIGS. 78 (1) and (2)) suggesting a change in the display mode of the eye hold display 9052) and the changed specific display are displayed. A change suggestion effect (for example, FIG. 78 (1)) suggesting a change in the display mode of another specific display different from the completed specific display (for example, the second reserved display 9053 shown in FIGS. 78 (1) and (4)). ), (4), and (5) the second change effect) can be executed in a mode in which at least a part is common (for example, a mode in which the arrow Y flies as shown in FIG. 78 (1)). It may be. According to such a configuration, it is possible to give unexpectedness to the production content and improve the production effect.

(16) In any of the above (10) to (15), the specific display means displays a specific display (for example, hold display, active display) corresponding to the variable display in at least a normal mode (for example, "white"). A first specific mode (for example, "red") having a higher degree of expectation than the normal mode, and a second specific mode suggesting the content of the effect (for example, an effect suggestion display mode (first special suggestion mode, second special suggestion)). It can be displayed in any of the display modes including the mode, the pseudo-continuous suggestion mode, the SP suggestion mode) (for example, as shown in FIG. 79, in "white", "red", or the second special suggestion mode. (The hold display can be displayed), and the effect execution means capable of executing the effect of the content suggested by the specific display of the second specific aspect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 79 (5) and 79 (6), the second The special zone effect suggested in the special suggestion mode can be executed), and the specific display means displays the specific display in the second specific mode and then the content suggested by the specific display in the second specific mode. When the effect of is executed, the display mode of the specific display can be changed from the second specific mode to the first specific mode (for example, as shown in FIG. 79, 5 seconds after the special zone effect is started, The hold display 9053 displayed in the second special suggestion mode can be changed to "red"). According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the expectation for a specific aspect.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect control command. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the start winning prize determination processing. It is a figure for demonstrating the random number values MR1 to MR3. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the special figure hold storage part. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the start winning a prize determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol normal processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of the special figure display result determination table, and the jackpot type determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variation pattern setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of the fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the loss variation pattern determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the look-ahead processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the look-ahead effect execution setting process. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the look-ahead effect execution decision table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the final color determination table. It is a figure which shows the configuration example of the expansion mode setting presence / absence determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect processing during variable display. This is a timing chart when a hold / active change effect and a movable body effect for enlarged display are performed. It is a figure which shows the production operation example of the movable body effect. It is a figure which shows the production operation example of the hold / active change effect and the movable body effect. It is a figure which shows the production operation example of the hold change effect. It is a front view which looked at the pachinko game machine in another form example from the front. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure example of the game control board (main board). It is a block diagram which shows the circuit composition example of an effect control board, a lamp driver board, and an audio output board. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by the CPU in the main board. It is a flowchart which shows the 4ms timer interrupt processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern of the effect symbol prepared in advance. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows the big hit determination table, the small hit determination table, and the big hit type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern type determination table for big hit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern type determination table for detachment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the hit variation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the deviation variation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the symbol designation command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of a variable category command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of a variable category command. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the program of special symbol process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the program of special symbol process processing. It is a flowchart which shows the start port switch passing process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the configuration example of the hold storage buffer. It is a flowchart which shows the production process at the time of a prize. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the display result specification command transmission processing. It is a flowchart which shows the process during special symbol change. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the program of the special symbol display control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the effect control main process executed by the effect control CPU. It is explanatory drawing which shows the configuration example of the command reception buffer. It is a flowchart which shows the command analysis processing. It is a flowchart which shows the command analysis processing. It is a flowchart which shows the command analysis processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the command storage area at the time of a start winning a prize. It is a flowchart which shows the effect control process process. It is a flowchart which shows the hold display control processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display mode pattern determination lottery table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the change timing determination lottery table. It is a flowchart which shows the variation pattern command reception waiting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the effect symbol variation start processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the stop symbol of the effect symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of process data. It is a flowchart which shows operation frequency determination processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the change effect execution lottery table, execution target determination lottery table, and operation frequency determination lottery table. It is a flowchart which shows the process during the effect symbol change in the effect control process process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display position switching lottery table. It is a flowchart which shows the effect symbol fluctuation stop processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display example of the effect display device when a change effect is executed. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display example of the effect display device when a change effect is executed. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display example of the effect display device at the time of executing the 2nd change effect in the modification 1. FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display example in the case of displaying the hold display by the 2nd special suggestion mode in the modification 2. FIG.

Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly classified into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting the game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. The game board 2 is formed with a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails. In this game area, a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device and is driven into the game area.

A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area). The first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are each composed of, for example, 7 segments or dot matrix LEDs (light emitting diodes), and are identified in a special symbol game as an example of a variable display game. A special symbol (also referred to as a "special symbol"), which is a plurality of types of possible identification information (special identification information), is variably displayed (variable display). For example, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B can variably display a plurality of types of special symbols composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-", respectively. To do.

The special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are limited to those composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-". However, for example, a plurality of types of lighting patterns having different combinations of those to be turned on and those to be turned off in the 7-segment LED may be preset as a plurality of types of special symbols. Hereinafter, the special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". ..

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. On the screen of the image display device 5, it corresponds to the variable display of the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and the variable display of the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B in the special figure game. For example, in a decorative symbol display area that is a plurality of variable display units such as three, decorative symbols that are a plurality of types of identification information (decorative identification information) that can identify each are variably displayed. The variable display of this decorative pattern is also included in the variable display game.

As an example, "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas are arranged on the screen of the image display device 5. Then, in the special symbol game, one of the fluctuation of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the variation of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B is started. Fluctuation of the decorative symbol (for example, scroll display in the vertical direction) is started in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas. After that, when the confirmed special symbol is stopped and displayed as the variable display result in the special symbol game, the decorative symbol is variable in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas on the image display device 5. The final stop symbol (final stop symbol) that is the display result is stopped and displayed. The fixed decorative symbol may be different from the decorative symbol displayed during the variable display. For example, a decorative symbol other than the scroll-displayed decorative symbol may be a fixed decorative symbol.

On the screen of the image display device 5, it is synchronized with the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A or the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. Then, a plurality of types of decorative symbols that can be identified by each are variably displayed, and a definite decorative symbol that is a variable display result is derived and displayed (or simply referred to as "deriving"). In addition, to derive and display various display symbols such as special symbols and decorative symbols is to end the variable display by displaying the identification information such as the decorative symbols as a stop display (also referred to as a complete stop display or a final stop display). .. On the other hand, during the variable display from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the derivation display of the final decorative symbol that is the variable display result, the fluctuation speed of the decorative symbol becomes "0" and the decoration is displayed. The design may be stagnant and displayed, and may be in a display state that causes slight shaking or expansion / contraction, for example. Such a display state is also called a temporary stop display, and although the display result in the variable display is not definitively displayed, the player can recognize that the change of the decorative pattern due to the scroll display or the update display is not progressing. It becomes. The temporary stop display may include displaying the decorative symbol completely stopped for a time shorter than a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) without causing slight shaking or expansion / contraction.

A start winning memory display area 5H is arranged on the screen of the image display device 5. In the start winning prize storage display area 5H, a hold display is performed in which the variable display hold number (special figure hold memory number) corresponding to the special figure game is identifiablely displayed. Here, in the hold of the variable display corresponding to the special figure game, the game ball enters the first start winning opening formed by the ordinary winning ball device 6A and the second starting winning opening formed by the ordinary variable winning ball device 6B. It occurs based on the starting prize by passing (for example, passing). That is, the start condition (also referred to as "execution condition") for executing the variable display game such as the special figure game or the variable display of the decorative symbol is satisfied, but the variable display game based on the previously satisfied start condition is being executed. When the start condition that allows the start of the variable display game is not satisfied due to the fact that the pachinko game machine 1 is controlled to the jackpot game state, the variable display corresponding to the established start condition is held. Will be done. In this embodiment, the hold display is performed by displaying the same number of symbols as the held variable display (in the present embodiment, a circle or the like, hereinafter also referred to as a hold display symbol). One hold display symbol corresponds to one hold variable display. The pending variable display corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is represented by the reserved display symbol displayed in the area on the left side of the start winning prize memory display area 5H. The pending variable display corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is represented by the reserved display symbol displayed in the area on the right side of the start winning prize memory display area 5H.

For example, the start condition (first start condition) of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied by the occurrence of the first start prize in which the game ball enters the first start prize opening. If the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure based on the establishment of the first start condition is not satisfied, the number of stored first special figures is incremented by 1. ), And the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended. In addition, the start condition (second start condition) of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B is established by the occurrence of the second start prize in which the game ball enters the second start prize opening. If the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure based on the establishment of the second start condition is not satisfied, the number of the second special figure hold storage is incremented by 1. ), And the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended. On the other hand, when the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is started, the number of stored special figures of the first special figure is decremented by 1, and the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is executed. Is started, the second special figure reserved memory number is decremented by 1.

The variable display hold storage number obtained by adding the first special figure hold storage number and the second special figure hold storage number is also particularly referred to as a total hold storage number. The term "special figure reserved memory" usually refers to a concept that includes all of the first special figure reserved memory, the second special figure reserved memory, and the total reserved memory, but in particular, some of these (for example, the number of reserved memory). It may also refer to the concept of including the number of reserved memories of the first special figure and the number of reserved memories of the second special figure, but excluding the total number of reserved memories.

A display for displaying the number of reserved special figures may be provided together with the start winning prize memory display area 5H or in place of the start winning prize memory display area 5H. In the example shown in FIG. 1, along with the start winning prize storage display area 5H, the first hold for identifiable display of the number of special figure hold storages on the upper part of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. A display device 25A and a second hold display device 25B are provided. The first hold indicator 25A displays the number of hold storages of the first special figure in a identifiable manner. The second hold indicator 25B displays the number of second special figure hold storage so as to be identifiable. The number of the first hold indicator 25A and the second hold indicator 25B corresponds to, for example, the upper limit values (for example, "4") of the first special figure hold storage number and the second special figure hold storage number, respectively (for example, 4). It is configured to include (1) LEDs. Here, the number of stored first special figures and the number of stored second special figures are displayed according to the number of LEDs lit.

On the screen of the image display device 5, an active display area 5HA is arranged in the vicinity of the start winning memory display area 5H. The active display area 5HA is displayed corresponding to the variable display being executed. The display in the active display area 5HA is referred to as an active display (also referred to as a variable display compatible display, a digestion display, a current display, or the like). In the active display area 5HA, for example, in response to the start of the special figure game using the first special figure when the first start condition is satisfied, the first one erased (digested) in the start prize memory display area 5H. Active display is performed according to the hold display. Further, in the active display area 5HA, for example, in response to the start of the special figure game using the second special figure when the second start condition is satisfied, the second special figure is erased (digested) by the second reserved storage unit 5HL. Active display is performed according to the second hold display.

A movable body 99 is provided at a predetermined position (here, the lower center side) in the display area of the image display device 5. The movable body 99 rotates by the rotational drive of the movable body motor 61 shown in FIG.

A normal winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a normal variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the normal winning ball device 6A. The ordinary winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening as a starting region (first starting region) that is always kept in a constant open state by, for example, a predetermined ball receiving member. The ordinary variable winning ball device 6B is an electric tulip-type accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces that are changed to a closed state in a vertical position and an open state in a tilted position by a solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory shown in FIG. It is equipped with (ordinary electric accessory) and forms a second start winning opening.

As an example, in the ordinary variable winning ball device 6B, the movable wing piece is in the vertical position when the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory is in the off state, so that the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening. To. On the other hand, in the normal variable winning ball device 6B, when the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory is in the on state, the movable wing piece is in the tilting position, so that the game ball can enter the second starting winning opening. Put it in a state. The normally variable winning ball device 6B is normally opened when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, and the game ball can enter the second starting winning opening, while the expanded open state when the solenoid 81 is in the on state. It may be configured so that the game ball is difficult to enter. As described above, the ordinary variable winning ball device 6B has the first variable state such that the game ball can enter the second starting winning opening in the open state or the expanded open state, and the closed state in which the game ball cannot enter or is difficult to enter. It is configured so that it can be changed to a second variable state such as a normally open state. The first variable state may be a state in which the game ball is easier to enter the second starting winning opening than the second variable state.

The game ball that has entered the first starting winning opening formed in the ordinary winning ball device 6A is detected by, for example, the first starting opening switch 22A shown in FIG. The game ball that has entered the second start winning opening formed in the normally variable winning ball device 6B is detected by, for example, the second starting opening switch 22B shown in FIG. Based on the detection of the game balls by the first start port switch 22A, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls are paid out as prize balls (prize game medium), and the first special figure reserved memory number is predetermined. If it is equal to or less than the upper limit value (for example, "4"), the first starting condition is satisfied. Based on the detection of the game balls by the second start port switch 22B, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the number of the second special figure reserved memory is equal to or less than the predetermined upper limit value. For example, the second starting condition is satisfied.

The number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 22A and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 22B. May be the same number or different numbers from each other. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may directly pay out the game balls to be prize balls, or may give points corresponding to the number of game balls to be prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided below the normal winning ball device 6A. The special variable winning ball device 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door shown in FIG. 2, and a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state depending on the large winning opening door. Form a big winning door as.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is in the off state, the large winning opening door closes the large winning opening, and the game ball enters the large winning opening (for example, Can't pass). On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is on, the large winning opening door opens the large winning opening, and the game ball can easily enter the large winning opening. Become. In this way, the large winning opening as a specific area changes into an open state in which the game ball is easy to enter and is advantageous for the player, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter and is disadvantageous to the player. In addition, instead of the closed state in which the game ball cannot enter the big winning opening, or in addition to the closed state, a partially open state in which the game ball is difficult to enter the big winning opening may be provided.

The game ball that has entered the grand prize opening is detected by, for example, the count switch 23 shown in FIG. Based on the detection of the game balls by the count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In this way, when the game ball enters the large winning opening opened in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the game ball enters another winning opening such as the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening. More prize balls will be paid out. Therefore, if the large winning opening is opened in the special variable winning ball device 7, the game ball can enter the large winning opening, which is an advantageous first state for the player. On the other hand, if the large winning opening is closed in the special variable winning ball device 7, it becomes impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the large winning opening to obtain the winning ball, which is disadvantageous to the player. There are two states.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the left side of the game area). As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of 7 segments, dot matrix LEDs, and the like like the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and for example, a plurality of types different from the special symbol. The ordinary symbol (also referred to as "ordinary diagram" or "ordinary diagram"), which is the identification information, is variably displayed (variable display). Such a variable display of a normal pattern is called a normal figure game (also referred to as a "normal figure game"). Above the normal symbol display 20, a normal symbol hold display 25C is provided. The normal figure hold indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal figure hold storage number as the number of effective passing balls that have passed through the passing gate 41.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. Further, as a winning opening different from the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening and the large winning opening, for example, a single or a plurality of general winning openings that are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member are provided. May be done. In this case, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls may be paid out as prize balls based on the fact that the game balls that have entered any of the general prize openings are detected by the predetermined general prize ball switch. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and game effect lamps 9 are provided around the gaming area. Decorative LEDs may be arranged around each structure (for example, a normal winning ball device 6A, a normal variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7, etc.) in the gaming area of the pachinko gaming machine 1. At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball striking operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like to launch a gaming ball as a gaming medium toward a gaming area is provided. For example, the hitting ball operation handle adjusts the elastic force of the game ball according to the amount of operation (rotation amount) by the player or the like.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, the gaming balls paid out as prize balls and the gaming balls rented by the predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to the hitting ball launching device. ) An upper plate (ball hitting plate) is provided. At the lower part of the gaming machine frame 3, a lower plate is provided for holding (storing) surplus balls and the like overflowing from the upper plate so that they can be discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

A stick controller 31A that can be gripped and tilted by the player is attached to a member forming the lower plate, for example, at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the lower plate body (for example, the central portion of the lower plate). There is. The stick controller 31A includes an operation stick held by the player, and a trigger button is provided at a predetermined position of the operation stick (for example, a position where the index finger of the operator hangs when the player holds the operation stick). There is. The trigger button can be instructed by a player holding the operation stick of the stick controller 31A with an operating hand (for example, the left hand) and pushing / pulling the trigger button with a predetermined operating finger (for example, the index finger). It suffices if it is configured as follows. A trigger sensor that detects a predetermined instruction operation such as a push-pull operation on the trigger button may be built in the operation stick.

A controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2) including a tilting direction sensor unit for detecting a tilting operation with respect to the operating rod may be provided inside the main body of the lower plate at the lower part of the stick controller 31A. For example, the tilt direction sensor unit is two transmissive photosensors (parallel sensors) arranged parallel to the board surface of the game board 2 on the left side of the center position of the operation rod when viewed from the side of the player facing the pachinko game machine 1. Four transmissive types that combine (pair) and two transmissive photosensors (vertical sensor pair) arranged perpendicular to the board surface of the game board 2 on the right side of the center position of the operation rod when viewed from the player's side. It suffices if it is configured to include a photo sensor.

The member forming the upper plate includes a push button 31B (for example, a push button 31B (for example, above the stick controller 31A) on the upper surface of the upper plate main body, which allows a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing or the like. (See FIG. 2) is provided. The push button 31B may be configured so that a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation from the player can be detected mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically. A push sensor 35B for detecting a player's operation action performed on the push button 31B may be provided inside the main body of the upper plate at the installation position of the push button 31B.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with various control boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, and a lamp control board 14, as shown in FIG. 2, for example. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, an interface board, and a touch sensor board are arranged on the back surface of the game board of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and is equipped with various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11 is mainly addressed to a sub-side control board including a random number setting function used in a special figure game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like arranged at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 12. , It has a function to output and transmit a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, and a function to output various information to the hall management computer. Further, the main board 11 controls lighting / extinguishing of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to control the lighting / extinguishing of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Variable display of a predetermined display symbol, such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol, and controlling the variable display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 20 by controlling the lighting / extinguishing / coloring of the normal symbol display 20. It also has a control function.

For example, a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like are mounted on the main board 11. The switch circuit 110 takes in detection signals (detection signals indicating that the passage or approach of the game medium has been detected) from various switches for detecting the game ball and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The solenoid circuit 111 normally uses a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal for driving each solenoid, such as a signal for turning the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82 into an on or off state) for an electric accessory. It is transmitted to the solenoid 81 of the above and the solenoid 82 for the grand prize opening door.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, and receives an image display device 5, speakers 8L, and 8R. In addition, various circuits for controlling the production operation by the production electrical components such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED are mounted. That is, the effect control board 12 includes all or part of the display operation of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, and all or one of the lighting / extinguishing operations of the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED. It has a function of determining the control content for causing an electric component for effect such as a unit to execute a predetermined effect operation, and controlling the determined control content.

The audio control board 13 is a control board for audio output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and outputs sound from the speakers 8L and 8R based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12. It is equipped with a processing circuit that executes audio signal processing for this purpose. The lamp control board 14 is a control board for controlling lamp output provided separately from the effect control board 12, and is based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12, such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED. It is equipped with a lamp driver circuit that drives the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

As shown in FIG. 2, detection signals from various switches such as a gate switch 21, a start port switch (first start port switch 22A and a second start port switch 22B), and a count switch 23 are transmitted to the main board 11. The wiring is connected. The various switches may have an arbitrary configuration capable of detecting a game ball as a game medium, such as a switch called a sensor. Further, a wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing display control of the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the ordinary symbol display 20, and the like is connected to the main board 11.

The control signal transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control commands include, for example, a display control command used to control the image display operation in the image display device 5, a voice control command used to control the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9. Or a lamp control command used to control the lighting operation of the decorative LED or the like may be included.

FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of an effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 100. The command 80XX (H) is an effect control command (variation pattern command) that specifies a variation pattern of the effect symbol that is variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol (corresponding to each variation pattern XX). ). That is, when a unique number is assigned to each of the variable patterns that can be used, which will be described later, there is a variable command corresponding to each of the variable patterns specified by the number. In addition, "(H)" indicates that it is a hexadecimal number. The effect control command for specifying the fluctuation pattern is also a command for designating the fluctuation start. Therefore, when the command 80XX (H) is received, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to start variable display of the effect symbol.

The command 8A01 (H) is an effect control command (first start winning opening designation command) for notifying when the game ball enters the first starting winning opening. The command 8A02 (H) is an effect control command (second start winning opening designation command) for notifying when the game ball enters the second starting winning opening.

The commands 8C01 (H) to 8C03 (H) are effect control commands indicating the content of the winning determination result, and as the winning determination result, it is an effect control command indicating whether or not to make a big hit and the big hit type. .. Since the effect control CPU 120 determines the display result of the effect symbol in response to the reception of the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C03 (H), the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C03 (H) are referred to as display result designation commands. Command 8C01 (H) (display result 1 designation command) specifies a loss. Command 8C02 (H) (display result 2 designation command) specifies 15R jackpot and probability variation. Command 8C03 (H) (display result 3 designation command) specifies 15R jackpot and non-probability variation.

The command 8D01 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol variation start designation command) indicating that the variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started. The command 8D02 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol variation start designation command) indicating that the variable display (variation) of the second special symbol is started. The first symbol variation start designation command and the second symbol variation start designation command may be collectively referred to as a special symbol specification command (or a symbol variation start designation command).

The command 8F00 (H) is an effect control command (symbol confirmation designation command) indicating that the variable display (variation) of the effect symbol is terminated and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the symbol confirmation designation command, it ends the variable display (variable display) of the effect symbol and derives and displays the display result.

The command 9000 (H) is an effect control command (initialization designation command: power-on designation command) transmitted when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (at the time of initial setting). The command 9200 (H) is an effect control command (power failure recovery designation command) transmitted when the power supply to the gaming machine is restarted (at the time of initial setting at the time of restart). When the power supply to the game machine is started, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a power failure recovery designation command if the data is stored in the backup RAM, and if not, the initialization designation. Send a command. Command 9F00 (H) is an effect control command (customer waiting demo designation command) for designating a customer waiting demonstration.

The command A001 (H) is an effect control command (big hit start designation command: fanfare designation command) for designating the start of fanfare (start of the jackpot game state) in the case of a 15-round jackpot.

In the big hit game state, the fanfare is executed first, and then the main big hit game in the big hit game state in which the special variable winning ball device 7 which is the big winning opening is opened (round game, etc.) is executed, and the big hit is executed. The ending is executed after the game. The fanfare is an effect of notifying or suggesting that the jackpot game state has started, that is, the jackpot game is about to start. The ending is an effect of notifying that the jackpot game state has ended, that is, the jackpot game has ended.

The command A2XX (H) is an effect control command (command for designating the opening of the large winning opening) for designating the opening of the special variable winning ball device 7 for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. A3XX (H) is an effect control command (a command designated after opening the large winning opening) for designating the closure of the special variable winning ball device 7 for the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

The command A601 (H) is an effect control command (big hit end designation command: ending designation command) for designating the start of the ending.

The command B000 (H) is an effect control command (normal state specification command) that specifies that the game state is the normal state (normal game state). The command B001 (H) is an effect control command (time saving state designation command) that specifies that the gaming state is the time saving (advantageous) state. The command B1XX (H) is an effect control command (time reduction number designation command) for designating the remaining number of times of the time reduction (advantageous) state (how many more times the time reduction state continues until the variation display is finished). "XX" in the command B1XX (H) indicates the number of remaining times in the time saving (advantageous) state.

The command C0XX (H) is an effect control command (total hold storage number designation command) for designating the total hold storage number obtained by adding the first special figure hold storage number and the second special figure hold storage number. "XX" in the command C0XX (H) indicates the total number of pending storages. The command C1XX (H) is an effect control command (first hold storage number designation command) for designating the first special figure hold storage number. "XX" in the command C1XX (H) indicates the number of stored first special figure reservations. The command C2XX (H) is an effect control command (second hold storage number designation command) for designating the second special figure hold storage number. "XX" in the command C2XX (H) indicates the second special figure reserved storage number.

The command C6XXH is an effect control command indicating the content of the winning determination result, and as the winning determination result, the determination result (variation pattern type) of which determination value range the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is in This is a variation category command that indicates the determination result of That is, as with the fluctuation pattern command, when a unique number is assigned to each of the fluctuation patterns that can be used, which will be described later, there is a command corresponding to each of the fluctuation patterns specified by the number.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and is a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 that stores a game control program, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. The RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides the area, the CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes the game control program to perform the control operation, and the numerical data indicating the random value are updated independently of the CPU 103. It is configured to include a random number circuit 104 to perform, and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105.

As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed by executing the program read from the ROM 101 by the CPU 103. At this time, a fixed data read operation in which the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, a variable data writing operation in which the CPU 103 writes various variable data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores them, and various variable data temporarily stored in the RAM 102 by the CPU 103. The variable data read operation, the CPU 103 receives input of various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, and the CPU 103 goes to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105. A transmission operation that outputs various signals is also performed.

The one-chip microcomputer constituting the game control microcomputer 100 may have at least a RAM 102 built in in addition to the CPU 103, and the ROM 101, the random number circuit 104, the I / O 105, and the like may be externally attached.

In the game control microcomputer 100, numerical data indicating various random number values used for controlling the progress of the game is updatablely counted by, for example, a random number circuit 104. Random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also called game random numbers. The game random number may be updated by hardware such as a random number circuit 104, or may be updated by software when the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 executes a predetermined computer program. You may. For example, a predetermined random number value is shown in a random counter provided in a predetermined area (game control counter setting unit, etc.) of the RAM 102 in the game control microcomputer 100, or in a random counter provided in an internal register separate from the RAM 102. Numerical data may be stored, and the CPU 103 may update the stored value periodically or irregularly so that the random value is updated.

The ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various selection data, table data, and the like used for controlling the progress of the game, in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables, etc. prepared for the CPU 103 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings. Further, the ROM 101 includes table data constituting a plurality of command transmission tables used by the CPU 103 to transmit control signals to be various control commands from the main board 11, and a variation pattern table for storing a plurality of types of variation patterns. The table data to be configured is stored. In the RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100, various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are temporarily stored in a rewritable manner.

The effect control board 12 includes an effect control CPU 120 that performs control operations according to a program, a ROM 121 that stores an effect control program, fixed data, and the like, a RAM 122 that provides a work area for the effect control CPU 120, and an image display device. The display control unit 123 that executes processing for determining the control content of the display operation in 5, the random number circuit 124 that updates the numerical data indicating the random number value independently of the effect control CPU 120, and the I / O 125. And are installed.

As an example, in the effect control board 12, a process of controlling the effect operation by the effect electric component is executed by executing the effect control program read from the ROM 121 by the effect control CPU 120. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 reads the fixed data from the ROM 121, the effect control CPU 120 writes various variation data to the RAM 122, and the effect control CPU 120 temporarily stores the variation data in the RAM 122. Fluctuation data read operation to read various temporarily stored fluctuation data, reception operation in which the effect control CPU 120 receives input of various signals from the outside of the effect control board 12, and the effect control CPU 120 to the outside of the effect control board 12. Transmission operations that output various signals are also performed.

The effect control CPU 120, ROM 121, and RAM 122 may be included in a one-chip effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board 12. The effect control board 12 has wiring for transmitting image data to the image display device 5 and wiring for transmitting an effect sound signal as an information signal indicating sound number data to the voice control board 13. Wiring for transmitting an illumination signal as an information signal indicating lamp data is connected to the lamp control board 14. Further, on the effect control board 12, wiring for transmitting an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action with respect to the stick controller 31A has been detected from the controller sensor unit 35A, and a game for the push button 31B. A wiring for transmitting an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that a person's operation action has been detected from the push sensor 35B is also connected. Further, the effect control board 12 is also connected to a wiring for transmitting a predetermined drive command signal to the motor drive circuit 16 for driving the movable body motor 61 that rotates the movable effect body 99. ..

In the effect control board 12, for example, a random number circuit 124 or the like counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values used for controlling the effect operation. The random number used to control such an effect operation is also called an effect random number.

The ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 stores various data tables and the like used for controlling the effect operation in addition to the program for effect control. For example, the ROM 121 contains a plurality of determination tables prepared for the effect control CPU 120 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings, table data constituting the determination tables, pattern data constituting various effect control patterns, and the like. It is remembered. The effect control pattern is, for example, from process data including effect control execution data (display control data, voice control data, lamp control data, operation detection control data, etc.) and an end code associated with the effect control process timer determination value. It is configured. Various data used for controlling the effect operation are stored in the RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12.

The effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 generates various commands. For example, the effect control CPU 120 determines the content to be displayed by the image display device 5, and outputs a display control command to the display control unit 123 according to the determination. The display control unit 123 mounted on the effect control board 12 determines the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5 based on the display control command from the effect control CPU 120, and generates image data. For example, the display control unit 123 controls the variable display of the decorative pattern and various effect displays by determining the switching timing of the effect image to be displayed in the display screen of the image display device 5. As an example, the display control unit 123 may include a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), an LCD drive circuit, and the like. The VDP may be a GPU (Graphics Processing Unit), a GCL (Graphics Controller LSI), or a microprocessor for image processing generally referred to as a DSP (Digital Signal Processor). The CGROM may be, for example, a non-rewritable semiconductor memory, a rewritable semiconductor memory such as a flash memory, or a non-volatile recording medium such as a magnetic memory or an optical memory. It may be configured.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 has an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and an output port for transmitting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 12. It is composed including and. For example, from the output port of the I / O 125, a video signal transmitted to the image display device 5, a command (sound signal) transmitted to the audio control board 13, and a command transmitted to the lamp control board 14 (Illumination signal), a command (drive control signal) transmitted to the motor drive circuit 16 and the like are output.

With the above configuration, the effect control CPU 120 causes the effect image to be displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 via the display control unit 123. Further, the effect control CPU 120 controls the speakers 8L and 8R via the voice control board 13 to output sound, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED via the lamp control board 14. The effect image is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 via the display control unit 123, or the movable body motor 61 is driven via the motor drive circuit 16 to move the movable body 99. In this way, various effects (such as a reach effect, a movable effect member effect, a message effect in which the image display device 5 displays an image of a message to the player, and an effect for enlivening the game, which will be described later) are executed. ..

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a predetermined game is performed using a game ball as a game medium, and a predetermined game value can be given based on the game result. As an example of a game using a gaming ball, a predetermined hitting ball is launched based on a predetermined operation (for example, a rotation operation) of a hitting ball operation handle installed at the lower right of the front surface of the housing of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A game ball as a game medium is launched toward the game area by a launch motor or the like provided in the device. When the game ball flowing down the game area enters the first start winning opening (first starting area) formed in the normal winning ball device 6A, the game ball is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A shown in FIG. As a result, the first starting condition is satisfied. After that, based on the fact that the first start condition is satisfied, for example, due to the end of the previous special figure game or the jackpot game state, the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A starts. Will be done.

Further, when the game ball enters the second start winning opening (second starting area) formed in the normally variable winning ball device 6B, the game ball is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B shown in FIG. The second starting condition is satisfied. After that, based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied, for example, due to the end of the previous special figure game or the jackpot game state, the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B starts. Will be done. However, when the normally variable winning ball device 6B is in the normally open state or the closed state as the second variable state, it is difficult or impossible for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening.

Based on the fact that the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21 shown in FIG. 2, the normal symbol start condition for executing the variable display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 20 is established. After that, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started based on the fact that the normal symbol start condition for starting the variable display of the normal symbol is satisfied, for example, that the previous normal symbol game has ended. In this normal symbol game, when a predetermined time elapses after starting the fluctuation of the normal symbol, the confirmed normal symbol, which is the variable display result of the normal symbol, is stopped and displayed (derivated display). At this time, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed as the confirmed normal symbol, the variable display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the normal symbol per symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed normal symbol, the variable display result of the normal symbol becomes "normal symbol loss". In response to the fact that the variable display result of the normal symbol is "per normal figure", the opening control and the expansion opening control are performed so that the movable wing piece of the electric tulip constituting the normal variable winning ball device 6B becomes the tilting position. , Closing control or normal opening control that returns to the vertical position after a predetermined time has passed is performed. Whether or not the variable display result of the normal symbol is set to "per normal figure" as a predetermined specific display result depends on the variable display result such as when the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. Is determined (predetermined) before it is derived and displayed.

When the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A is started, or when the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B is started, it is special. Whether or not the variable display result of the symbol is to be a "big hit" as a predetermined specific display result is determined (predetermined) before the variable display result is derived and displayed. Then, the variation pattern is determined at a predetermined ratio based on the determination of the variable display result, and the effect control command for designating the variable display result and the variation pattern is the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 shown in FIG. Is transmitted from the effect control board 12 to the effect control board 12.

After the special figure game is started based on the determination of the variable display result and the variation pattern, for example, when a predetermined variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern elapses, a definite special symbol that becomes the variable display result is derived. Is displayed. "Left", "middle", and "right" decorations arranged on the screen of the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. In the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, a decorative symbol (directed symbol) different from the special symbol is variably displayed. In a special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B, a definite special that results in a variable display of the special symbol. When the symbol is derived and displayed, the image display device 5 derives and displays a definite decorative symbol that is a variable display result of the decorative symbol.

When a predetermined jackpot symbol is derived and displayed as the variable display result of the special symbol, the variable display result (special symbol display result) becomes a "big hit" (specific display result), and an advantageous value is given to the player. It is controlled to the jackpot game state as a specific game state. That is, whether or not the variable display game state is controlled corresponds to whether or not the variable display result becomes a "big hit", and is determined (predetermined) before the variable display result is derived and displayed. As a variable display result of the special symbol, when the jackpot symbol is not derived and displayed and the lost symbol is derived and displayed, the variable display result (special symbol display result) becomes "missing".

As an example, a special symbol indicating the numbers "3", "5", and "7" is used as a jackpot symbol, and a special symbol indicating the symbol "-" is used as a lost symbol. It should be noted that each symbol such as the jackpot symbol or the lost symbol in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A may be a special symbol different from each symbol in the special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B. However, the special symbol common to both special symbol games may be a jackpot symbol or a lost symbol.

In the big hit game state, the big winning opening is opened and the special variable winning ball device 7 is in the first state which is advantageous for the player. Then, the large winning opening is continued for a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 0.1 seconds) or for a period until a predetermined number (for example, 9) of game balls enter the large winning opening and a winning ball is generated. A round game (also simply referred to as a "round") that is opened is executed. During the period other than the execution period of such a round game, the large winning opening is closed, and the winning ball is difficult or impossible to be generated. When a game ball enters the large winning opening, the winning ball is detected by the count switch 23, and a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball for each detection. The round game in the jackpot game state is repeatedly executed until a predetermined upper limit number of times (for example, "15") is reached.

When the special figure display result is "big hit", the case where the big hit type is either "non-probable change" or "probable change" is included. For example, as a variable display result of a special symbol, when a jackpot symbol indicating the numbers "3" and "5" is derived and displayed, the jackpot type is "non-probability" and the jackpot symbol indicating the number "7" is derived and displayed. When it is done, the jackpot type becomes "probability change". When the jackpot type is "non-probability change" or "probability variation", the special variable winning ball device 7 is set to the first state (the jackpot is open) which is advantageous for the player as a round game in the jackpot game state. A normal open round is performed with a relatively long upper limit (eg, 29 seconds). The jackpot game state in which the normal open round is executed is also referred to as a normal open jackpot state or a first specific game state.

When the special figure display result is "big hit", the case where the big hit type is either "non-probable change" or "probable change" is included. For example, as a variable display result of a special symbol, when the jackpot symbol indicating the number "3" is derived and displayed, the jackpot type is "non-probability", and when the jackpot symbol indicating the number "7" is derived and displayed, the jackpot is displayed. The type is "probability change". When the jackpot type is "non-probability change" or "probability variation", the special variable winning ball device 7 is set to the first state (the jackpot is open) which is advantageous for the player as a round game in the jackpot game state. A normal open round is performed with a relatively long upper limit (eg, 29 seconds).

After the jackpot game state ends, the probability that the variable display result becomes a "big hit" (big hit probability) is controlled to a probability variation state that is higher than the normal state based on the establishment of the predetermined probability variation control condition. There is. The probability change state is controlled so as to continue until a predetermined probability change end condition such as the start of the next big hit game state is satisfied. Further, after the jackpot game state is completed, the average variable display time may be controlled to a shorter time state than the normal state. The time saving state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state, and for example, the average variable display time is different. The time saving state is controlled so as to continue until one of the time saving end condition of either the execution of the variable display a predetermined number of times or the start of the next big hit game state is satisfied first. .. The probability change state is controlled so as to continue until one of the predetermined number of variable displays is executed and the next jackpot game state is started, and one of the probability change end conditions is satisfied first. It may be done.

As an example, when the jackpot type is "non-probability variation", the gaming state becomes the time saving state after the jackpot gaming state ends. On the other hand, when the jackpot type is "probability change", after the jackpot game state ends, the game state becomes the time saving state and the probability change state.

In the time saving state, the normal variable winning ball device 6B is placed in the first variable state (open state or expanded open state) and the second variable state (in the open state or expanded open state) in an advantageous changing mode in which the game ball is more likely to enter the second starting winning opening than in the normal state. Change to closed state or normally open state). For example, the normal symbol display 20 controls the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (normal symbol fluctuation time) in the normal symbol game to be shorter than that in the normal state, and the variable display result of the normal symbol in each normal symbol game is "normal". Control to improve the probability of "hit the figure" compared to the normal state, tilt control time to control the tilt of the movable wing piece in the normal variable winning ball device 6B based on the variable display result being "hit the normal figure" The normal variable winning ball device 6B is changed into the first variable state and the second variable state in an advantageous change mode by controlling to make the normal variable winning ball device 6B longer than in the normal state and by controlling to increase the number of tilts as compared with the normal state. Just do it. In addition, any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls may be combined and performed. In this way, the control for changing the normally variable winning ball device 6B into the first variable state and the second variable state in an advantageous changing mode is called high opening control (also referred to as "time saving control" or "high base control"). Will be done. By being controlled to such a time saving state, the time required until the next variable display result becomes a "big hit" is shortened, and the special gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.

The time saving state in which the high opening control is performed is also called "high base state" or "high base", and the gaming state that is not in the time saving state is also called "low base state" or "low base". The probabilistic state in which the probabilistic control is performed is also called "high probabilistic state" or "high probability", and the gaming state that is not in the probabilistic state is also called "low probability state" or "low probability". The gaming state in the probabilistic state and the time saving state is also called "high accuracy high base state", "high accuracy high base" and the like. The gaming state when the time is shortened instead of the probability change state is also called "low probability high base state", "low probability high base state", or the like. The gaming state when the time is not shortened but is in the probabilistic state is also called "high probability low base state", "high probability low base state", or the like. A normal state that does not fall into either a time saving state or a probability variation state is also called a "low probability low base state" or a "low probability low base state".

The game balls used as a game medium in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the recorded information of the scores given according to the number thereof may have valuable value that can be exchanged for special prizes or general prizes according to the quantity, for example. Just do it. Alternatively, the recorded information of these game balls and scores may have valuable value that can be used for another game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, although it cannot be exchanged for a special prize or a general prize.

Further, the game value that can be given by the pachinko game machine 1 is not limited to paying out the game ball as a prize ball and giving points, for example, controlling to a big hit game state or a special game state such as a probability change state. Control, the maximum number of round games that can be executed in the jackpot game state is the number of the first round (for example, "15"), which is larger than the number of the second round (for example, "7"), and the game is executed in the time saving state. The upper limit of the possible variable display is the first number (for example, "100"), which is larger than the second number (for example, "50"), and the jackpot probability in the probability variation state is higher than the second probability (for example, 1/50). The number of consecutive chans, which is the number of times that the first probability is high (for example, 1/20) and the number of times that the jackpot game state is repeatedly controlled without being controlled in the normal state, is larger than the number of consecutive chans (for example, "5"). It may include a more favorable gaming situation for the player, such as part or all of the large number of first consecutive chans (eg, "10"). The advantage for the player is, for example, a state in which the player is actually advantageous when a certain event occurs (a state in which the privilege is given or is given, a state in which the ratio of the privilege is given is high). , The rate of being in an advantageous state different from the privilege, etc., or the rate of being in an advantageous state, etc. In addition, the privilege that is shown to be highly likely to be granted by a special aspect may be the same as the target of the advantage for the player (advantageous state), and is different from the target of the advantage for the player. It may be a thing.

In the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the image display device 5, a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A is used. , Of the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in response to the start of any special symbol game. Then, the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the end of the variable display due to the stop display of the fixed decorative symbol in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In (the period during the variable display), the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may be a predetermined reach mode.

Here, the reach mode is a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination (“reach variable symbol”). (Also referred to as) is a display mode in which the fluctuation is continuous, or a display mode in which all or part of the decorative symbols are changed in synchronization while forming all or part of the jackpot combination. Specifically, some of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, etc.) are preliminarily used. When the decorative symbol (for example, the decorative symbol indicating the alphanumeric characters of "7") that constitutes the specified jackpot combination is stopped and displayed, the remaining decorative symbol display area (for example, "medium" decoration) that has not yet been stopped is displayed. In the symbol display area 5C, etc.), the decorative symbol is fluctuating, or the decorative symbol is a big hit in all or part of the decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". It is a display mode that varies synchronously while forming all or a part of the combination.

Further, in response to the reach mode, the fluctuation speed of the decorative symbol is reduced, or a character image (directed image imitating a person or the like) different from the decorative symbol is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. By changing the display mode of the background image, reproducing and displaying a moving image different from the decorative pattern, or changing the variable mode of the decorative pattern, a different production operation from before the reach mode is executed. May be done. Such an effect operation such as a change in the display mode of the character image, a display mode of the background image, a reproduction display of the moving image, and a change in the variation mode of the decorative pattern is called a reach effect display (or simply a reach effect). In addition, in the reach effect, not only the display operation on the image display device 5, but also the sound output operation by the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation (blinking operation) on the light emitting body such as the game effect lamp 9, and the like before the reach mode is reached. It may be included that the operation mode is different from the operation mode of the above.

As the effect operation in the reach effect, a plurality of types of effect patterns (also referred to as "reach patterns") having different operation modes (effect modes) may be prepared in advance. Then, the possibility of becoming a "big hit" (also referred to as "reliability" or "big hit reliability", "expectation" or "big hit expectation") differs depending on the production mode in each reach production. That is, the possibility that the variable display result will be a "big hit" can be different depending on which of the plurality of types of reach effects is executed. In this embodiment, as an example, reach effects such as normal, super A, super B, and super C are preset. The reach effects of the supermarkets A to C in this embodiment are reach effects in which a plurality of characters fight. In the following, the reach production of Super A to C may be referred to as Super Reach A to C, and the normal reach production may be referred to as Normal Reach.

As described above, the super reach A to C in this embodiment is a reach effect in which a plurality of characters fight. In Super Reach A to C, for example, the fighting characters may be different, and each of Super Reach A to C may have a different production mode. In Super A or B, when the predetermined character wins the battle, the variable display result becomes "big hit", and when the predetermined character loses the battle, the variable display result becomes "miss". When Super Reach C is executed, Super Reach A may be executed after the execution of Super Reach C (it may develop into Super Reach A). When Super Reach C is executed but Super Reach A does not develop (for example, when a predetermined character loses the battle), the variable display result is "missing". On the other hand, when it develops into Super Reach A (for example, when a predetermined character wins the battle), the variable display result may be a "big hit".

Depending on which reach effect is executed, the variable display result of the variable display may be "big hit" (in this embodiment, the big hit type is "non-probable change" or "probable change" "big hit"). Big hit expectation) changes. For example, the jackpot expectation is higher when Super Reach A to C is executed than when Normal Reach is executed. Also, among the super reach, when super reach A (including the case where it evolved from super reach C) is executed, when super reach B is executed or when super reach C is executed (super reach). Expectations for big hits are higher than when it does not develop into A). On the contrary, when Super Reach C is executed, the jackpot expectation may be higher than when Super Reach B is executed or Super Reach A is executed. In this case, the super reach C may be executed after the execution of the super reach A (it may develop into the super reach C).

The jackpot expectation is, for example, (probability that the effect is executed at the time of a big hit) x (probability of being a big hit) / {(probability that the effect is executed at the time of a big hit) x (probability of being a big hit) + (other than at the time of a big hit) (Probability that the effect is executed) x (Probability of not becoming a big hit)} (When the big hit expectation is "1", the variable display result is always "Big hit". Same for degrees.)

During the variable display of the decorative pattern, unlike the reach effect, the variable display state of the decorative pattern may be in the reach state, and the variable display result may be a "big hit". Depending on the variable display mode of the decorative pattern, a variable display effect for notifying the player may be executed. Although the description is omitted in this embodiment for ease of understanding, variable display effects such as "sliding" and "pseudo-ream" can be executed. It suffices to decide whether or not to execute the variable display effect of "sliding" and "pseudo-ream" in response to the fact that the fluctuation pattern is determined on the side of the main board 11. It should be noted that whether or not the variable display effect of "slip" is executed on the effect control board 12 side may be determined regardless of the fluctuation pattern determined on the main board 11 side.

In the variable display effect of "slip", the decorative symbols are changed in all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right", and then a plurality of decorative symbol display areas (for example,). After the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, etc.), a predetermined number (for example, "1" or "2") of the temporarily stopped decorative symbol display areas is displayed. ”) Decorative symbol display area (for example, either one or both of the“ left ”decorative symbol display area 5L and the“ right ”decorative symbol display area 5R), and then stop display after changing the decorative symbol again. , An effect display is performed to change the decorative pattern to be stopped and displayed. In this way, in the variable display effect of "slip", a predetermined number of decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the derivation display of the final decorative symbol that is the variable display result. By executing the variable display of the decorative symbol again, the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach state, and the decorative symbol constituting the non-reach combination is stopped and displayed without being in the reach state. is there.

In the variable display effect of the "pseudo-ream", the variable display is performed after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in response to the fact that either the first start condition or the second start condition of the special figure game is satisfied once. After the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right" before the resulting finalized decorative symbol is derived and displayed. The effect display in which the decorative symbols are changed (re-variated) again in all the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R can be performed a predetermined time (for example, up to 3 times). The number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations in this embodiment is "left", "middle", and "right", excluding the initial fluctuation from the start of variable display of decorative symbols to the first temporary stop of all decorative symbols. It shall refer to the number of times that the decorative symbol revariates in all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In the variable display effect of "pseudo-ream", in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right", for example, one of a plurality of predetermined pseudo-ream chances. Once the decorative symbol constituting the above is temporarily stopped and displayed as a predetermined display result, the variable display (re-variation) is performed again thereafter. The pseudo-ream chance may include a combination of decorative symbols that is a predetermined non-reach combination instead of the variable display mode of the decorative symbol being the reach mode. Further, the pseudo-ream chance may include a combination of decorative symbols that becomes a predetermined reach loss combination (simply also referred to as “reach combination”) after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode. For example, among the pseudo-ream chance eyes, the decorative symbol (middle symbol) that is stopped and displayed in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C is a special decorative symbol (pseudo-ream chance symbol) that is not used in the variable display of the decorative symbol in normal times. ) May be used. Among the decorative symbols used in the variable display of the decorative symbol in the normal state, a pseudo-continuous chance symbol that becomes a pseudo-continuous chance eye by being stopped and displayed in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C may be included. ..

In the variable display effect of "pseudo-ream", the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed multiple times based on the fact that the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied once by performing the re-variation (pseudo-ream fluctuation). You can make it look as if it was started in succession.

In addition to "sliding" and "pseudo-ream", for example, "development chance eyes", "development chance eyes end", and "slip after chance eyes stop" as variable display effects using the variable display operation of such decorative patterns. Various production operations such as, may be executed. Here, in the variable display effect of the "development chance eye", "left", "middle", and "right" are used from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the derivation display of the final decorative symbol that is the variable display result. After temporarily stopping and displaying the decorative symbols that make up the development chance eyes included in the predetermined special combination in all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is in the reach state. As a predetermined reach production is started. As a result, when the decorative symbol constituting the development chance eye is temporarily stopped and displayed, the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach state, and the variable display result becomes the "big hit" after the reach state. Expectations are raised.

In addition, in the variable display effect of "end of development chance", after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, in all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". , An effect display is performed in which a predetermined combination of decorative symbols is derived and displayed as a final decorative symbol as a development chance eye. In the variable display effect of "slip after stopping the chance", as in the variable display effect of "pseudo-ream", from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the derivation display of the final decorative symbol that is the variable display result. , "Left", "Middle", "Right" Decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, 5R After temporarily stopping and displaying the decorative pattern of the lost combination (special combination) that is a pseudo-consecutive chance eye in all Unlike the variable display effect of "pseudo-ren", which changes the decorative pattern again in all of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the decorative pattern changes again in a part of the decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R. By doing so, an effect display is performed in which the decorative pattern to be stopped and displayed is changed.

In addition, during the variable display of the decorative pattern, unlike the reach effect or the variable display effect such as "pseudo-ream", for example, a predetermined effect image is displayed, an image display as a message, a voice output, etc. , The variable display state of the decorative pattern may be in the reach state due to the effect operation different from the variable display operation of the decorative pattern, the reach effect by super reach may be executed, and the variable display result. There is a case where a notice effect is executed to notify the player in advance that there is a possibility that the player will be a "big hit".

The effect operation that becomes the advance notice effect is the variable display mode of the decorative symbol after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Is executed (started) before the reach mode is reached (before the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R of the "left" and "right"). Further, the advance notice effect for notifying that the variable display result may be a "big hit" may include one executed after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is changed to the reach mode. In this way, the advance notice effect can be in the big hit game state at a predetermined timing from the start of the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol to the derivation of the finalized special symbol or the confirmed decorative symbol which is the variable display result. Anything that can foretell the sex will do. A plurality of notice patterns are prepared in advance according to the content (effect mode) of the effect operation when the advance notice effect is executed.

The advance notice effect includes a look-ahead advance notice effect (also referred to as a look-ahead effect). In the look-ahead notice effect, the variable display result is "big hit" according to the effect mode before the variable display is executed, which is the target (notice target) for which the possibility that the variable display result will be "big hit" is announced. It is a notice production that can announce the possibility of becoming. In particular, the look-ahead notice effect that continuously gives notice over the variable display of the decorative pattern that is executed a plurality of times in response to a plurality of special figure games is also called a continuous notice effect. In the look-ahead notice effect, before the variable display to be notified is started, the possibility that the variable display result will be a "big hit" is announced based on, for example, the hold memory of the special figure game due to the occurrence of the start prize. The production operation for this is started.

For example, as a look-ahead notice effect, by changing the display of the hold display in the start winning memory display area 5H to a display mode different from the display mode in the normal time, there is a possibility that the variable display to be notified will be a “big hit”. A look-ahead notice effect of "hold display change" for notifying such things is executed. More specifically, the display color in the display portion for identifiablely displaying the number of reserved special figures is any one of a specific color (for example, red, green, blue, and white) different from the predetermined color (for example, gray) in the normal state. It suffices to be able to notify that the variable display result is more likely to be a "big hit" than usual by making the shape (for example, a star shape) different from the shape (for example, a round shape) at the normal time. In addition, by setting the display pattern of the hold display in the start winning memory display area 5H to a specific pattern (for example, Sakura pattern) different from the normal one, the variable display result is more likely to be a "big hit" than usual. May be able to be notified. Alternatively, by setting the display mode to show a predetermined message (for example, "secret") as the hold display, it is possible to notify (suggest) that the display color is more likely to change to a specific color than usual. Good. A hold display that suggests that such a display mode is likely to change to a specific mode is also referred to as a suggestion hold display. The pre-reading notice effect of "hold display change" is also called a hold change effect. In comparison with the look-ahead notice effect, the notice effect whose execution is started after the variable display to be notified is started is a single notice effect (also referred to as a single notice, the variable notice, or a variable display during notice effect). Is called. In this embodiment, as a pre-reading effect of the "hold display change", an effect of changing the display mode of the hold display to be announced is performed so that it is possible to recognize which hold the variable display to be notified is on hold. May be Specifically, an effect effect that displays an effect image showing a character (character for change effect) prepared in advance on the screen of the image display device 5 and exerts an effect on the hold display corresponding to the variable display to be notified. By performing the above, it becomes possible to recognize which hold the variable display to be notified is on hold. In addition, in order to facilitate understanding, in this embodiment, the execution timing of the action effect (the timing at which the variable display to be notified becomes recognizable) is set to the hold display to be notified. Although the timing of the first shift is set, the execution timing of the action effect may be determined at a different ratio depending on the variable display result, which shift timing is set among the plurality of shifts. As will be described in detail later, in the look-ahead effect of the "hold display change" in this embodiment, the action effect may or may not be performed, and when the action effect is not performed, it is for the change effect. The character is not displayed, and the mode is changed so that it is possible to recognize which hold the variable display to be notified is on hold.

The look-ahead notice effect executed based on the occurrence of the start prize is executed (started) after the start prize occurs, before the player can determine whether or not the notice content by the look-ahead notice effect is realized. Anything is fine. For example, the pre-reading notice effect that announces that a certain start prize may occur may result in a reach state, rather than at least the variable display state of the decorative symbol based on the occurrence of the start prize becomes the reach state (or non-reach state). Anything that is executed (started) before may be used. In addition, the pre-reading notice effect that announces that the variable display result may become a "big hit" due to the occurrence of a certain start prize is at least more than the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display based on the occurrence of the start prize. Anything that is executed (started) before may be used.

In this embodiment, as an example of the single notice effect, the display of the effect image in the active display area 5HA is changed to a display mode different from the display mode in the normal time, so that the variable display in which the start condition is satisfied is "big hit". The notice effect of "active display change" for notifying the possibility of becoming "" is executed. More specifically, the display color in the active display area 5HA is a specific color (for example, red, green, blue, or white) different from a predetermined color (for example, gray) in the normal time, or a shape in the normal time. By using different shapes, it is sufficient to be able to notify that the variable display result is more likely to be a "big hit" than usual. In addition, by making the icon displayed in the active display area 5HA a specific icon different from the round solid color at the normal time, a message such as "?", "Chance", or "extreme heat" is notified. It suffices to suggest the possibility that the variable display result will be a "big hit". In addition, the icon displayed in the active display area 5HA includes an icon that notifies a message such as "NEXT" to notify that the pseudo-ream variation in the variable display effect of the "pseudo-ream" is executed. May be good. The notice effect of "active display change" is also called an active change effect.

Specifically, in the active change effect according to this embodiment, an effect image (effect image displayed at the time of hold display effect) showing a character (character for change effect) prepared in advance is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. The display color is displayed by performing an action effect on the display (active display) of the active display area 5HA at the timing when the hold display of the notice target (hold display of the target of the hold change effect) shifts (shifts) to the active display area 5HA. There are cases where the display color of the active display is changed without the action effect being performed. As described above, in this embodiment, as the hold change effect, an effect of changing the display mode so that it is possible to recognize which hold the variable display to be notified is on hold is performed. Then, an active change effect is performed as an independent notice effect, the hold display whose display mode has changed shifts to the active display area 5HA, and the display color changes. That is, first, the notice target is indicated in the hold change effect, and the display color changes in the active change effect (suggesting the jackpot expectation), and this series of effects (hold change effect and active change effect) is performed. In this embodiment, it is called a hold / active change effect. In this embodiment, in order to facilitate understanding, the pending change effect only makes the notice target recognizable to the player, and the jackpot expectation is suggested by the active change effect (that is, in the active change effect). Although the display color changes for the first time), the display color may be changed to suggest the jackpot expectation even in the hold change effect. Specifically, the display color may be changed in the hold change effect, and the display color may not change in the active change effect, or the display color may be changed in the hold change effect and further displayed in the active change effect. The color may be changed. For example, in the hold change effect, the display color is changed stepwise each time the hold display is shifted (including the case where it does not change even if it is shifted), and when the hold display area is shifted to 5HA, the active change effect is performed and further displayed. You may change the color (you may also produce a ghost). Further, in the hold / active change effect in this embodiment, all the hold display and the active display in the display including the hold display to be announced may be enlarged and displayed. Specifically, as will be described later, in the hold / active change effect, when the hold / active change effect whose display color changes to green or red is started, it is being displayed for a period until the hold / active change effect ends. All the hold display and active display of are sometimes enlarged (the display color is changed to white or blue, and the hold / active change effect is not enlarged). Further, when the hold / active change effect to be enlarged and displayed is started, a small screen as a specific display area is displayed in the image display device 5, and the image displayed in the hold / active change effect (for example, hold display). , Active display, character image in action production, etc.) are all displayed on a small screen as a specific display area. The small screen display ends when the hold / active change effect ends (display control in the specific display area ends). The various images displayed on the small screen may have the same ratio as the image displayed on the image display device 5 (for example, the screen size of the image display device 5 is 10 and the screen size of the small screen). If is 1, the image displayed on the small screen may have a ratio of 1/10 of the size displayed on the image display device 5). Further, in this embodiment, when the enlarged display is not performed, the action effect is not performed in the hold / active change effect. However, for example, the action effect is performed by displaying a small character image. The action effect may be performed in a mode different from the case of performing the enlarged display.

Further, in this embodiment, as a look-ahead notice effect, a movable body is used every time the variable display is performed during the period until the variable display corresponding to the hold of the notice target is performed (including the variable display of the hold of the notice target). A movable body effect that rotates 99 is executed. Specifically, the movable body effect is executed in a plurality of variable displays until the variable display of the hold to be announced is performed, and is performed for a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) from the start of each variable display. At that time, the image display device 5 displays an effect image and displays that the movable body 99 is effectively conspicuous.

That is, in this embodiment, two types of look-ahead effects such as a hold / active change effect and a movable body effect are executed, but these may be performed individually or in duplicate. It should be noted that the movable body effect when the hold / active change effect and the movable body effect in which the enlarged display is performed are performed in duplicate is called a movable body special effect. In the movable body special effect, the effect image is displayed on a small screen as a specific display area displayed on the image display device 5. This makes it possible for the player to easily recognize that the movable body 99 is rotating, and prevents the hold display and the active display from becoming unrecognizable.

When the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol in the special symbol game, becomes a "big hit", a fixed decorative symbol which is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. As an example, the same decorative symbols are aligned and stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right", so that the jackpot combination is confirmed. It suffices if the decorative pattern is derived and displayed.

When the jackpot type is "non-probability variation", a definite decorative symbol that is a non-probability variation jackpot combination may be derived. The definite decorative symbol that is a non-probability change jackpot combination is, for example, the symbol number that is variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right" in the image display device 5 is "1". ~ Of the decorative symbols of "8", any one of the decorative symbols whose symbol numbers are even "2", "4", "6", "8" is "left", "middle", "right". In the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the above, the stop display is aligned on a predetermined effective line, and any type of fixed decorative symbol that is a big hit combination may be used. The decorative symbols whose symbol numbers constituting the non-probability jackpot combination are even numbers "2", "4", "6", and "8" are called non-probability variation symbols.

When the jackpot type is "probability variation", a definite decorative symbol that is a non-probability variation jackpot combination may be derived, or a definite ornamental symbol that is a probability variation jackpot combination may be derived. The fixed decorative symbols that are the probabilistic jackpot combination are, for example, the symbol numbers that are variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" in the image display device 5 are "1" to Among the decorative symbols of "8", any one of the decorative symbols whose symbol numbers are odd numbers "1", "3", "5", and "7" is "left", "middle", and "right". The decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are aligned on a predetermined effective line and stopped and displayed, and may be a type of fixed decorative symbol that is a big hit combination. The decorative symbols whose symbol numbers constituting the probability variation jackpot combination are odd numbers "1", "3", "5", and "7" are referred to as probability variation symbols.

A re-lottery effect may be executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol in which the fixed decorative symbol is a non-probable variable jackpot combination or a probabilistic jackpot combination. In the re-lottery effect, after temporarily stopping and displaying the decorative symbols that are the non-probable change jackpot combination in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" in the image display device 5, for example, " In each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the same decorative symbols are changed again with the same decorative symbols aligned, and the decorative symbols (probability variation symbols) that are a probabilistic jackpot combination and non-probability variation symbols. One of the decorative symbols (non-probable variation symbols) that is a probabilistic jackpot combination is displayed as a definite decorative symbol (final stop display). Here, when the re-lottery effect is executed when the jackpot type is "non-probability change", as the re-lottery effect, a definite decoration that becomes a non-probability change jackpot combination after re-variating the decorative symbol displayed temporarily stopped. A re-lottery defeat effect is performed in which the symbols are derived and displayed. On the other hand, when the re-lottery effect is executed when the jackpot type is "probability change", as the re-lottery effect, the definite decoration that becomes the probability change jackpot combination after the decorative symbol displayed temporarily stopped is re-variated. The re-lottery winning effect of stopping and displaying the symbol may be executed, or the re-lottery losing effect may be executed.

When the jackpot type is "probability change", the decorative symbol that is a non-probability change jackpot combination is displayed once during the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the re-lottery effect is executed during the variable display, or the jackpot game state after that. At the end of the medium or big hit game state, the big hit middle promotion effect may be executed, and the start of the control in the probable change state may be notified. The jackpot promotion effect is performed in the jackpot game state at the start of the jackpot game state, during the execution of a round in the jackpot game state, and during the period from the end of one round in the jackpot game state to the start of the next round. During the period from the end of the final round to the start of the next variable display game, etc., the probability change notification of whether or not to control the probability change state is performed. Note that the same notification effect as the jackpot promotion effect may be executed during the first variable display game after the end of the jackpot game state. In the big hit game state, the big hit middle promotion effect that is executed after the final round is finished is sometimes called "ending promotion effect" in particular. The start of the control in the probabilistic state may be notified without executing the re-lottery effect or the promotion effect during the big hit.

When the special symbol display result is "missing", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol does not become the reach mode, and the decorative symbols constituting the predetermined non-reach combination are stopped and displayed, so that the non-specific display result is obtained. The definite decorative design may be derived and displayed. Further, when the special symbol display result is "missing", the decorative symbols constituting the predetermined reach combination (also referred to as "reach losing combination") are stopped and displayed after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is changed to the reach mode. By doing so, a definite decorative symbol that results in a non-specific display may be derived and displayed.

Next, the main operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment will be described.

When the power supply from the predetermined power supply board is started on the main board 11, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process which is the game control main process. When the game control main process is started, the CPU 103 sets the interrupt disabled and then performs the necessary initial settings. In this initial setting, for example, RAM 102 is cleared. In addition, the register of the CTC (counter / timer circuit) built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set. As a result, after that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process. When the initial setting is completed, interrupts are permitted and then loop processing is started. In the game control main process, the process for returning the internal state of the pachinko game machine 1 to the state at the time of the previous power supply stop may be executed, and then the loop process may be started.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such a game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, it sets the interrupt disabled state and executes a predetermined game control timer interrupt process. The game control timer interrupt processing includes, for example, switch processing, main side error processing, information output processing, game random number update processing, special symbol process processing, ordinary symbol process processing, command control processing, and the like. It includes processing to control the progress of.

The switch process is a process of determining the state of detection signals input from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 via the switch circuit 110. The error processing on the main side is a processing in which an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result. The information output process is a process of outputting data such as jackpot information, start information, and probability fluctuation information supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. The game random number update process is a process for updating at least a part of a plurality of types of game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software.

As an example, the game random numbers used on the side of the main board 11 include a random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, a random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and a random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern. It may be included (see FIG. 6). The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is a random number value used for determining whether or not to control the variable display result such as a special symbol in the special figure game as a “big hit” to the big hit game state, and is “1”. It can take any value of ~ "65535". The random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is used to determine the jackpot type to be one of a plurality of types, such as either "non-probability variation" or "probability variation", when the variable display result is "big hit". It is a random number value and can take any value of "1" to "100". The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol to any one of a plurality of prepared patterns, and is "1" to "251". Can take any value of.

In the special symbol process process included in the game control timer interrupt process, the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and is displayed on the special symbol display device 4. Various processes are selected and executed in order to control the operation and set the opening / closing operation of the large winning opening in the special variable winning ball device 7 according to a predetermined procedure. The normal symbol process process controls the display operation (for example, turning on and off of the segment LED) on the normal symbol display 20, and sets the variable display of the normal symbol and the tilting operation of the movable wing piece on the normal variable winning ball device 6B. It is a process that enables.

The command control process is a process of transmitting a control command from the main board 11 to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12. As an example, in special symbol process processing, ordinary symbol process processing, etc., the transmission settings of control commands (effect control commands, etc.) are set in advance for each command in the command transmission table (in advance in ROM 101) according to the effect control command to be transmitted. ) Is performed by designating the storage address (start address) in the ROM 101 (for example, storing the value of the storage address in the transmission command buffer provided in the RAM 102), and is provided in the RAM 102 in the command control process. Corresponding to the setting in the command transmission table specified by the value of the transmission command buffer (for example, the value indicating the storage address in ROM 101), among the output ports included in the I / O 105, the effect control board 12 is used. After setting the control data in the output port for transmitting the effect control command, the predetermined control data is set in the output port of the effect control INT signal, and the effect control INT signal is turned on for a predetermined time and then turned off. By doing so, it is possible to transmit the effect control command (effect control command set to be transmitted) based on the setting in the command transmission table. After executing the command control process, the interrupt enable state is set, and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol process processing. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes the start winning prize determination process (step S101). FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the start winning determination process executed in step S101.

When the start winning determination process is started, the CPU 103 first starts the first starting opening based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A. It is determined whether or not the switch 22A is on (step S201). At this time, if the first start port switch 22A is on (step S201; Yes), the number of reserved special figure reservations, which is the number of reserved special figure games using the first special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value. (For example, "4") is determined (step S202). At this time, the CPU 103 holds the first special figure by reading the first hold storage number count value, which is the stored value of the first hold storage number counter provided in the predetermined area (game control counter setting unit, etc.) of the RAM 102. It suffices if the number of memories can be specified. When the first special figure reserved storage number is not the upper limit value in step S202 (step S202; No), the start port which is the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the predetermined area (game control buffer setting unit or the like) of the RAM 102. The buffer value is set to "1" (step S203).

When the first start port switch 22A is off in step S201 (step S201; No), or when the first special figure reserved storage number reaches the upper limit value in step S202 (step S202; Yes), it is normal. Based on the detection signal from the second starting port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, it is determined whether or not the second starting opening switch 22B is on ( Step S204). At this time, if the second start port switch 22B is on (step S204; Yes), the second special figure hold storage number, which is the hold storage number of the special figure game using the second special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value. (For example, "4") is determined (step S205). At this time, the CPU 103 holds the second special figure by reading the second hold storage number count value, which is the stored value of the second hold storage number counter provided in the predetermined area (game control counter setting unit, etc.) of the RAM 102. It suffices if the number of memories can be specified. When the second special figure reserved storage number is not the upper limit value in step S205 (step S205; No), the start port buffer value is set to "2" (step S206). If the second start port switch 22B is not turned on (step S204; No) or the number of second special figure reserved storage is the upper limit value (step S205; Yes), the start winning determination process is terminated.

After executing any of the processes of steps S203 and S206, the hold storage count value corresponding to the start port buffer value is updated to be added by 1 (step S207). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the first hold storage count value is added by 1, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the second hold storage count value is added by 1. In this way, the first reserved memory count value is incremented by 1 when the game ball enters the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied. ) Is updated. In addition, the second reserved memory count value is incremented by 1 when the game ball enters the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied. ) Is updated. At this time, the total hold storage count value, which is the stored value of the total hold storage counter provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 102 (game control counter setting unit, etc.), is updated so as to be added by 1 (step S208).

After executing the process of step S208, the CPU 103 extracts a predetermined game random number corresponding to the occurrence of the start winning prize (step S209). As an example, in the process of step S209, among the numerical data updated by the random number counter or the like provided in the predetermined area (game control counter setting unit or the like) of the random number circuit 104 or the RAM 102, the random number for determining the special figure display result is determined. Numerical data indicating the numerical value MR1, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted (see FIG. 6). Numerical data indicating each random number value extracted in this way is stored as hold data by being set at the beginning of a free entry in the special figure hold storage unit corresponding to the start port buffer value (step S210). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the hold data is set in the first special figure hold storage unit as shown in FIG. 7 (A). On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2", the hold data is set in the second special figure hold storage unit as shown in FIG. 7 (B).

The first special figure reservation storage unit shown in FIG. 7 (A) has not been started yet, although the game ball has entered the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A and the first starting winning has been generated. The reserved data of the special figure game (the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit associates the winning order with the first starting winning opening (the order of detecting the game ball) with the holding number, and based on the establishment of the first starting condition by the entry of the game ball. The number of stored data such as the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 by the CPU 103, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are reserved data. Is stored until a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4") is reached. The hold data stored in the first special figure hold storage unit in this way indicates that the execution (variable display) of the special figure game using the first special figure is held, and the variable display result in this special figure game (variable display). It is possible to determine whether or not it is determined to control the jackpot game state based on the special figure display result), and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is a specific mode (for example, a reach effect of super reach). It becomes the hold storage information.

The second special figure reservation storage unit shown in FIG. 7B has been started even though the game ball has entered the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B and the second starting winning has been generated. The reserved data of the special figure game (the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit associates the winning order with the second starting winning opening (the order of detecting the game ball) with the holding number, and based on the establishment of the second starting condition by the entry of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104 or the like are set as pending data, and the number thereof is Store until a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4") is reached. The hold data stored in the second special figure hold storage unit in this way indicates that the execution (variable display) of the special figure game using the second special figure is held, and the variable display result in this special figure game (variable display) It is possible to determine whether or not it is determined to control the jackpot game state based on the special figure display result), and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is a specific mode (for example, a reach effect of super reach). It becomes the hold storage information.

Following the process in step S210, the CPU 103 performs a start winning determination process (step S211). The start winning determination process is a process for so-called look-ahead. In this embodiment, when the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is started, the special symbol display result (variable display result of the special symbol) is performed by the special symbol normal processing (step S110, FIG. 9 in FIG. 4) described later. Is set as "big hit" and it is decided whether or not to control the big hit game state. Further, in the variation pattern setting process (steps S111 and 11 in FIG. 4), which will be described later, the variation pattern that specifically defines the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is determined.

On the other hand, apart from these determinations, the CPU 103 executes the winning determination process in step S211 at the timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening or second starting winning opening). , Judgment as to whether or not the special figure display result of the special figure game executed by this start prize is a "big hit", and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol executed by this start prize is a display mode with reach. Judgment as to whether or not As a result, before the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the starting winning opening is started, the special symbol display result becomes a "big hit" and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol. Is predicted to be a display mode with reach, and based on this prediction result, the color of the hold change effect or the active display is changed by the effect control CPU 120 or the like on the effect control board 12 side. It is possible to decide whether or not to execute an active change effect that changes the color.

FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing an example of the start winning prize determination process. First, the CPU 103 checks the state of the time saving flag (flag that turns on when the time saving state) and the probability change flag (flag that turns on when the time saving state) provided in the predetermined area in the RAM 102, for example. The current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is specified (step S401). The CPU 103 identifies that it is in the probabilistic state when the probabilistic flag is on, identifies that it is in the time saving state when the time saving flag is on, and is in the normal state when both the probabilistic flag and the time saving flag are off. You just have to specify that.

Following the process of step S401, the CPU 103 selects a table prepared corresponding to the current gaming state from among a plurality of special figure display result determination tables prepared by storing in a predetermined area of the ROM 101 in advance. It is selected and set in the used table (step S402). A plurality of special figure display result determination tables are prepared depending on whether the game state is a probabilistic state or the like. In the special figure display result determination table, for example, as shown in FIG. 10 (A), the numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result sets the special figure display result as "big hit". It suffices if it is assigned to the decision result of which one is "missing".

For example, as the special figure display result determination table, a special figure display result determination table (see FIG. 10A) corresponding to the non-probable change state and the probable change state is prepared. The CPU 103 sets the table in use by reading the table corresponding to the current gaming state from the ROM 101 to the RAM 102 among the tables.

After that, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted in step S209 of FIG. 5 is within the predetermined jackpot determination range (step S403). In the jackpot determination range, individual decision values assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" are set in the usage table set in the process of step S402, and the CPU 103 compares the random number value MR1 with each decision value one by one. By doing so, it suffices if it can be determined whether or not there is a determined value that matches the random number value MR1. Alternatively, a numerical value indicating the minimum value (lower limit value) and the maximum value (upper limit value) of the determined value included in the jackpot determination range is set, and the CPU 103 sets the random number value MR1 and the minimum value or maximum value of the jackpot determination range. By comparing, it suffices if it can be determined whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination range. At this time, by determining that the random number value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination range, it can be determined that the variable display result based on the reserved data including the random number value MR1 is determined as "big hit" (big hit start determination). ..

If it is determined in step S403 that it is not within the jackpot determination range (step S403; No), the CPU 103 uses a display result specification command (determination at the time of starting winning) according to the case where the variable display result is "missing". A command for designating "loss" as a display result among the results) is set to be transmitted to the effect control board 12 (step S405).

If it is determined in step S403 that it is within the jackpot determination range (step S403; Yes), the CPU 103 determines the jackpot type based on the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type (step S409). At this time, the CPU 103 refers to a jackpot type determination table prepared in advance by storing it in a predetermined area of the ROM 101. In the jackpot type determination table, for example, as shown in FIG. 10B, the numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type determines the jackpot type as "non-probability change" and "probability change". It may be assigned to the decision result of which one to use. The CPU 103 uses the jackpot type assigned to the determined value that matches the random number value MR2 as the determination result this time. A display result specification command (a command for designating a "big hit" of "probability change" or "non-probability change" as a display result among the judgment results at the time of starting winning) according to the judgment result by the processing of step S409 is provided on the effect control board. A transmission setting for transmission to 12 is performed (step S410).

After executing any of the processes of steps S405 and S410, the CPU 103 transmits a variable category command (a command for designating the variable category among the determination results at the time of starting winning) to the effect control board 12. (Step S413).

After step S413, the CPU 103 sets the transmission of the start winning opening designation command (step S414). The first start winning opening designation command here is the effect control board 12 as the effect control information for notifying the increase in the number of reserved first special figures when the first start condition is satisfied due to the occurrence of the first start prize. Is sent to the side of. Further, the second start winning opening designation command is the effect control board 12 as the effect control information for notifying the increase of the second special figure reserved storage number when the second start condition is satisfied due to the occurrence of the second start prize. It is sent to the side. After step S414, the winning determination process ends.

It will be described again by returning to FIG. After that, the CPU 103 determines whether the start port buffer value is "1" or "2" (step S212). At this time, if the start port buffer value is "2" (step S212; "2"), the start port buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (step S213), and then the start prize is won. The judgment process ends. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "1" (step S212; "1"), the start port buffer is cleared and the stored value is initialized to "0" (step S214). The process proceeds to step S204. As a result, even when both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B simultaneously detect a valid start prize for the game ball, the process based on the detection of both valid start prizes can be reliably completed.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101 shown in FIG. 4, the CPU 103 uses steps S110 to S117 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the predetermined area (game control flag setting unit or the like) of the RAM 102. Select and execute one of the processes of.

The special symbol normal processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0”. In this special symbol normal processing, the first special symbol display device 4A or the like is based on the presence or absence of reserved data stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, such as the first special symbol reservation storage unit and the second special symbol reservation storage unit. The second special symbol display device 4B determines whether or not to start the special symbol game. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, the variable display result determines whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is a "big hit" based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result. Derived Determined (predetermined) before being displayed. At this time, when the variable display result is determined to be "big hit", the big hit type is determined to be either "non-probable change" or "probable change". The jackpot type is stored by storing the data indicating the determination result of the jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer provided in the predetermined area (for example, the game control buffer setting unit) of the RAM 102. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, the fixed special symbol (big hit symbol,) in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B corresponds to the variable display result of the special symbol in the special symbol game. Any of the lost symbols) is set. In the special symbol normal processing, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1" when the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is determined in advance.

FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S110 of FIG. 4 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 9, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the second special figure hold storage number is “0” (step S231). The second special figure hold storage number is the hold storage number of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. The CPU 103 may read the second hold storage number count value and determine whether or not the read value is "0".

When the number of the second special figure reserved storage is other than "0" in step S231 (step S231; No), for example, the head area of the second special figure reserved storage unit (for example, the storage area corresponding to the hold number "1"). As the reserved data stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 102, numerical data indicating a predetermined random value is read out (step S232). As a result, the game random numbers extracted in response to the occurrence of the start prize (second start prize) at the second start prize opening in the process of step S209 shown in FIG. 5 are read out. The numerical data read at this time may be stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation and temporarily stored.

Following the process of step S232, for example, by subtracting 1 from the second reserved storage number count value and updating, the second special figure reserved storage number is updated so as to be subtracted by 1, and the second special figure reserved storage is updated. The stored contents in the unit are shifted (step S233). For example, the reserved data stored in the storage area lower than the reserved number "1" (the storage area corresponding to the reserved numbers "2" to "4") in the second special figure reserved storage unit is placed one entry higher. shift. Further, in the process of step S233, the total number of reserved storages (total number of reserved storages count value) is updated to be subtracted by 1. Then, the variation special figure designation buffer value, which is the storage value of the variation special figure designation buffer provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 102 (for example, the game control buffer setting unit), is updated to "2" (step S234).

When the second special figure reserved storage number is "0" in step S231 (step S231; Yes), it is determined whether or not the first special figure reserved storage number is "0" (step S235). The first special figure hold storage number is the hold storage number of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. The CPU 103 may read the first hold storage number count value and determine whether or not the read value is "0". As described above, the process of step S235 is executed when it is determined in step S231 that the number of reserved second special figures is "0", and the number of reserved first special figures is "0". Judge whether or not. As a result, the special figure game using the second special figure is started to be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure.

In addition, regardless of whether it is the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening, if the special figure game is executed in the order in which the game balls enter the starting winning opening, the first starting winning opening The start opening data indicating which of the two start winning openings and the second start winning opening the game ball has entered is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 together with the hold data or separately from the hold data in association with the hold number. For the special figure game corresponding to each reserved data, the order in which the start conditions are satisfied may be specified.

Following the process of step S236, for example, by subtracting 1 from the first reserved storage number count value and updating, the first special figure reserved storage number is updated so as to be subtracted by 1, and the first special figure reserved storage is updated. The stored contents in the unit are shifted (step S237). For example, the reserved data stored in the storage area lower than the reserved number "1" (the storage area corresponding to the reserved numbers "2" to "4") in the first special figure reserved storage unit is placed one entry higher. shift. Further, in the process of step S237, the total number of reserved storages (total number of reserved storages count value) is updated to be subtracted by 1. Then, the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is updated to "1" (step S238).

After executing any of the processes of steps S234 and S238, the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol, is determined to be either "big hit" or "loss" (step S239). As an example, in the process of step S239, a special figure display result determination table prepared by storing in a predetermined area of ROM 101 in advance is selected and set as a table used for determining the special figure display result. In the special figure display result determination table, for example, as shown in FIG. 10A, the numerical value (decision value) compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result determines the special figure display result as "big hit". It suffices that the result of determining which of the “missing” is to be assigned is assigned according to the presence or absence of the probability change control in the probability change state (whether or not the game state is the probability change state). The CPU 103 reads numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result included in the game random number temporarily stored in the variable random number buffer in step S232 or S236 from the variable random number buffer, and the game state is in the probabilistic state. By referring to the special figure display result determination table set in the usage table based on whether or not there is, and the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1, the game state is disturbed depending on whether or not it is in the probabilistic state. The determination result of either "big hit" or "loss" assigned to the determination value corresponding to the numerical value MR1 may be determined as the special figure display result. The CPU 103 determines that the probability change control is performed when the probability change flag (the flag that turns on in the probability change state) provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 102 (for example, the game control flag setting unit) is in the on state. do it. For example, when the random number value MR1 is "9000", the CPU 103 determines that the special figure display result is "big hit" when the probability change flag is on (when there is probability change control), and the probability change flag is set. When it is in the off state (when there is no probability change control), it is determined that the special figure display result is "missing".

As shown in FIG. 10 (A), when the probability change control is performed in the probability change state, the special figure display result is "" at a higher rate than when the probability change control is not performed in the normal state or the time saving state. It is decided as a big hit. Therefore, for example, by the jackpot end processing of step S117 shown in FIG. 4 (details will be described later), the probability variation flag is set to the on state corresponding to the case where the jackpot type is "probability variation". When the current gaming state is in the probabilistic state, the special figure display result is more likely to be a "big hit" and the jackpot game state is more likely to occur than when the probabilistic control is not performed in the normal state or the time saving state.

After that, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the special figure display result determined by the process of step S239 is a "big hit" (step S240). When the special figure display result is determined to be "big hit" (step S240; Yes), the big hit flag provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 102 (for example, the game control flag setting unit) is set to the on state (step S241). ..

Further, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types (step S242). As an example, in the process of step S242, the jackpot type determination table shown in the table prepared by storing in a predetermined area of the ROM 101 in advance is selected and set in the table used for determining the jackpot type. In the jackpot type determination table, the determination result of whether to set the jackpot type to multiple types (“probability variation” or “non-probability variation”) according to the numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type. It suffices if it is assigned to (see FIG. 10B). The CPU 103 reads numerical data indicating the jackpot type determination random number value MR2 included in the game random number temporarily stored in the variation random number buffer in step S232 or S236 from the variation random number buffer, and reads the numerical data indicating the jackpot type determination random number value MR2 from the variation random number buffer. By referring to the jackpot type determination table set in the usage table based on the numerical data indicating, one of the jackpot types assigned to the determination value corresponding to the random number MR2 may be selected. For example, when the random number value MR2 is “75”, the CPU 103 determines (selects) “probability variation” as the jackpot type.

After executing the process of step S242, the jackpot type is stored (step S243). The CPU 103 puts a jackpot type buffer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 (for example, a game control buffer setting unit) into a jackpot type buffer setting value (for example, as shown in FIG. 10B), which indicates a determination result of the jackpot type. The jackpot type may be stored by storing "0" in the case of "probability variation" and "1" in the case of "probability variation").

When the special symbol display result is not "big hit" in step S240 (step S240; No), or after the processing of steps S241 to S243 is executed, the final special symbol which becomes the variable display result of the special symbol in the special symbol game is confirmed. Is determined (step S246). As an example, when it is determined in steps S240 and S244 that the special symbol display result is not a "big hit", a special symbol predetermined as a lost symbol is determined as a final special symbol. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S240 that the special figure display result is "big hit", a plurality of types of big hits are made according to the determination result of the big hit type in step S242 (according to the big hit type buffer set value). Any of the special symbols predetermined as the symbols may be determined as the final special symbol.

After executing the process of step S246, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1" (step S247), and then the special symbol normal process is terminated. By updating the value of the special figure process flag to "1" in step S247, when the next timer interrupt occurs, the fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 shown in FIG. 4 is executed.

If the number of reserved memory of the special figure game using the first special figure is "0" in step S235 (step S235; Yes), after performing the predetermined demo display setting (step S248), the special symbol Ends normal processing. In this demo display setting, for example, an effect control command (customer waiting demo specification command) for designating a demonstration display (demo screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image on the image display device 5 is produced from the main board 11. It is determined whether or not the transmission has been completed to the board 12. At this time, if it has already been sent, the demo display setting is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it has not been sent, the setting for sending the customer waiting demo specification command is made, and then the demo display setting is terminated. When the customer waiting demo designation command is transmitted, the effect control board 12 displays the demo screen.

The fluctuation pattern setting process in step S111 of FIG. 4 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. This variation pattern setting process includes a process of determining the variation pattern to one of a plurality of types based on a pre-determination result of whether or not the variable display result is a "big hit". Since the variable pattern specifies the content of the variable display of the decorative symbol (variable display mode), the content of the variable display of the decorative symbol is determined by this determination. The variable display time of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is set in advance according to the variable pattern. Therefore, by determining the variation pattern in the variation pattern setting process, the variable display time from the start of the variable display of the special symbol to the derivation of the finalized special symbol that is the variable display result is determined. Further, the variable pattern setting process may include a process of determining whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is set to "reach" when the variable display result is "missing". Alternatively, even if it is determined whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is set to "reach" by determining the variation pattern when the variable display result is "missing" in the variation pattern setting process at a predetermined ratio. Good. Further, the variation pattern setting process may include a process of setting the special symbol display device 4 to start the variation of the special symbol. When the variation pattern setting process is executed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2".

FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S111 of FIG. 4 as the variation pattern setting process. In the fluctuation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 11, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the jackpot flag is on (step S261). Then, when the big hit flag is on (step S261; Yes), the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the big hit when the special figure display result is "big hit" is determined (step S262).

When the jackpot flag is off in step S261, the CPU 103 determines the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the loss when the special figure display result is “loss” (step S265).

FIG. 12 shows a variation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result (special figure display result) is "missing", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" which is not the reach mode, and the reach mode is ". Multiple cases corresponding to each case of "reach", and also corresponding to the case where the variable display result (special figure display result) is "big hit" and the big hit type is "non-probable change" or "probable change". Fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance.

In this embodiment, as the fluctuation pattern for which the variable display result is "missing" and "non-reach" is specified, the fluctuation patterns for normal time (non-time reduction) are changed from PA1-1 to PA1-3, and the fluctuation for time reduction is used. Patterns PB1-1 and PB1-2 are prepared.

In addition, a variation pattern is prepared in which the contents correspond to the case where the variable display result is "big hit" (the big hit type is "probable change" or "non-probable change" "big hit") and the case where the variable display result is "miss". Specifically, a fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (for loss) and a fluctuation pattern PA3-1 (“big hit”) that specify that normal reach is to be executed are prepared. In addition, a fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (for loss) and a fluctuation pattern PA3-2 (“big hit”) that specify that Super Reach A is executed are prepared. Further, a fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (for loss) and a fluctuation pattern PA3-3 (“big hit”) that specify that Super Reach B is to be executed are prepared. Further, a fluctuation pattern PA2-4 (for loss) and a fluctuation pattern PA3-4 (“big hit”) that specify that the super reach C is executed and then developed into the super reach A are prepared.

In the process of step S262 shown in FIG. 11, the fluctuation pattern at the time of jackpot is determined by using, for example, the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. As an example, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is common regardless of whether the jackpot type is "non-probability" or "probability variation". It suffices if it is assigned to the determination result of the fluctuation pattern.

The CPU 103 refers to the jackpot variation pattern determination table based on the numerical data indicating the variation pattern determination random number value MR3 read from the variation random number buffer, and thereby assigns the variation assigned to the determination value corresponding to the random number value MR3. The pattern may be determined (selected) as the fluctuation pattern used this time. For example, when the random number value MR3 is “140”, the CPU 103 selects the variation pattern PA3-3.

In the process of step S265 shown in FIG. 11, a loss variation pattern prepared in advance corresponds to a case where the game state is the normal state and a case where the game state is the time reduction state and the time reduction control is performed. The fluctuation pattern at the time of loss is determined using the determination table. For example, whether or not the time is being shortened is specified by whether or not the time saving flag (flag that is turned on when the time is shortened) provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 (for example, the game control flag setting unit) is in the on state. If the time reduction is not in progress (when the time reduction flag is off), the variation pattern at the time of loss is determined using the loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 14 (A). On the other hand, during the time reduction (when the time reduction flag is on), the fluctuation pattern at the time of loss is determined using the loss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 14 (B).

In each loss fluctuation pattern determination table, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern may be assigned to the determination result of the fluctuation pattern according to the total number of reserved storages. The total number of reserved storages may be specified from, for example, the total number of reserved storages, which is the stored value of the total number of reserved storages, the total value of the first number of reserved storages, the second number of reserved storages, and the like. ..

The CPU 103 sets the normal time and the time saving based on whether or not the time is shortened, the total held storage count value, and the numerical data indicating the fluctuation pattern determination random value MR3 read from the fluctuation random number buffer. By referring to any of the loss fluctuation pattern determination tables according to the above, when the total number of reserved storages is not in the time saving, "0" to "1", "2" to "4", "5" to "8" Fluctuation pattern assigned to the determined value corresponding to the random value MR3 according to which of the above corresponds to, and which of "0", "1", "2" to "8" corresponds to when the time is shortened. Should be determined (selected) as the fluctuation pattern used this time.

For example, when the time saving flag is on and the random number value MR3 is "229", the CPU 103 selects the fluctuation pattern PA2-1 when the total number of pending storage count values is "0" and holds the total. When the storage number count value is "1", the fluctuation pattern PB1-1 is selected, and when the total reserved storage number count value is any of "3" to "8", the fluctuation pattern PB1-2 is selected.

After executing any of the processes of steps S262 and S265 shown in FIG. 11, the CPU 103 sets the special figure variation time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol (step S266). The special symbol fluctuation time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is the time required from the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol in the special symbol game until the definite special symbol, which is the variable display result (special symbol display result), is derived and displayed. Is. As shown in FIG. 12, the special figure fluctuation time is predetermined in accordance with a plurality of fluctuation patterns prepared in advance. The CPU 103 can set the timing at which the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is derived by setting the special symbol variation time corresponding to the variation pattern selected in the processes of steps S262 and S265.

Following the process of step S266, the CPU 103 determines the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A and the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. Among them, a setting for starting the fluctuation of the special symbol is made so as to start any of the special symbol games for which the start condition is satisfied (step S267). As an example, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1", a setting for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A is performed. On the other hand, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2", a setting for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is made. When the CPU 103 starts the variable display using the first special figure, the CPU 103 controls the first hold indicator 25A to display a display capable of specifying the subtracted 1st special figure hold storage number. The hold indicator 25A may be made to perform (for example, reduce the number of LEDs lit by one). When the CPU 103 starts the variable display using the second special figure, the CPU 103 controls the second hold display 25B to display a display capable of specifying the subtracted second special figure hold storage number. The hold indicator 25B may be made to perform (for example, reduce the number of LEDs lit by one).

After executing the process of step S267, the command transmission setting at the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol is performed (step S268). For example, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is "1", the CPU 103 receives the first symbol fluctuation start designation command, the fluctuation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the first from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Set the transmission settings for sequentially transmitting the hold storage number specification command. On the other hand, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is "2", the CPU 103 receives the second symbol fluctuation start designation command, the fluctuation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the second symbol from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Set the transmission settings for sequentially transmitting the hold storage number specification command. The set command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the above-mentioned command control process after the special symbol process process is completed. Here, the first symbol change start designation command and the second symbol change start designation command are transmitted as hold notification information that specifies which of the first special figure hold storage number and the second special figure hold storage number has decreased. Will be done.

After executing the process of step S268, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2" (step S269), and then the variation pattern setting process ends. By updating the value of the special figure process flag to "2" in step S269, when the next timer interrupt occurs, the special symbol variation process of step S112 shown in FIG. 4 is executed.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 of FIG. 4 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. The special symbol change processing includes a process of changing the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, a process of measuring the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol, and the like. It is included. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol fluctuation time, the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B stops the fluctuation of the special symbol, and the special symbol is displayed. The confirmed special symbol (confirmed special symbol set in step S110), which is the variable display result of the symbol, is stopped and displayed (deriving display), and the special symbol is stopped and displayed (deriving display) when the stop display is displayed. The value of the special figure process flag is updated to "3" by setting the transmission of the symbol confirmation specification command, which is an effect control command for notifying that. The symbol confirmation designation command set to be transmitted is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the above-mentioned command control process after the special symbol process process is completed. By repeatedly executing step S112, variable display of the special symbol, derivation display of the confirmed special symbol, and the like are realized.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 of FIG. 4 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In the special symbol stop process, a process of determining whether the jackpot flag is in the ON state, or when the jackpot flag is in the ON state, the time saving flag and the probability change flag are turned off, and a predetermined area of the RAM 102 (game control counter setting). The count value of the time reduction counter that counts the remaining number of times of the variable display executed during the time reduction control, which is provided in the unit, etc. It is a waiting time until the execution of the effect is started, which is a predetermined time.), And a hit start that specifies the start of the big hit game state based on the special figure display result being "big hit". The process of setting the transmission of the designated command (effect control command) and updating the special figure process flag to "4" is included. Further, the special symbol stop process includes a process of updating the value of the special symbol process flag to "0" when the jackpot flag is not in the ON state.

The command set to be transmitted is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the above-mentioned command control process after the special symbol process process is completed.

By these series of processes, at the time of a big hit, the time saving state and the probability change state are temporarily terminated, and at the time of losing, the remaining variable display that can be executed during the time saving is reduced "once". When the remaining variable display that can be executed during the time reduction reaches "0" times, the time reduction flag is turned off and the time reduction state ends. That is, the time saving state (time saving control) ends when the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (the following initial count value) before the variable display result becomes a "big hit" from the start. Further, when the gaming state is changed, the effect control board 12 is notified of the changed gaming state.

The jackpot release preprocessing in step S114 of FIG. 4 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit opening pre-processing includes that the variable display result is "big hit" and that the start timing of the round game has come (for example, the waiting time for the big hit start effect set above has elapsed. ) Etc., the process of starting the execution of the round game in the big hit game state to open the big winning opening, the process of starting the measurement of the elapsed time from the open state, and the like are included. In this process, for example, the jackpot type is open depending on whether the jackpot type is "non-probability variation" or "probability variation" (it can be specified by the jackpot type buffer setting value stored in the jackpot type buffer). The upper limit of the period may be set. As an example, by setting the upper limit of the period for opening the big prize opening to "29 seconds" corresponding to the jackpot type "non-probability change" or "probability change", the normal open round will be executed. do it. The value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5" when a process such as opening the large winning opening is executed. By repeating step S114, waiting until the start timing of the round game, opening of the big winning opening, and the like are realized.

The process of opening the jackpot in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this big hit opening process, the big winning opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. The process of determining whether or not it is time to return the game from the open state to the closed state (or the partially open state), and the timing to return the large winning opening from the open state to the closed state (of the game ball). When it is determined that the number of pieces reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9 pieces) or the elapsed time reaches the upper limit period set in step S114), the process of returning the large winning opening to the closed state or , The process of starting the measurement of the elapsed time after returning to the closed state is included. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6". By repeating step S115, the open state of the large winning opening is maintained until the timing of returning the large winning opening from the open state to the closed state.

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-opening process of the jackpot, a process of determining whether or not the number of executions of the round game in which the jackpot is open has reached a predetermined upper limit, and a process of determining whether the number of executions of the round game has reached the upper limit, or if the number of times has not reached the upper limit, the jackpot is opened. It includes processing to measure the elapsed time after returning to the closed state. Then, when the next round game is started, such as when the measured elapsed time is the time when the next round game is started, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4" (in this case). Is, for example, a control command for notifying that the jackpot game state has ended when the number of executions of the round game reaches the upper limit. The value of the special figure process flag is updated to "7" by setting to send the jackpot end specification command. The command set to be transmitted is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the above-mentioned command control process after the special symbol process process is completed. By repeating step S116, waiting is performed until the large winning opening is opened again.

By repeatedly executing steps S114 to S116, a jackpot game state is realized.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this post-opening process of the jackpot, a process of determining whether or not the number of executions of the round game in which the jackpot is open has reached a predetermined upper limit, and a process of determining whether the number of executions of the round game has reached the upper limit, or if the number of times has not reached the upper limit, the jackpot is opened. It includes processing to measure the elapsed time after returning to the closed state. Then, when the next round game is started, such as when the measured elapsed time is the time when the next round game is started, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4" (in this case). Is, for example, a control command for notifying that the jackpot game state has ended when the number of executions of the round game reaches the upper limit. The value of the special figure process flag is updated to "7" by setting to send the jackpot end specification command. The command set to be transmitted is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the above-mentioned command control process after the special symbol process process is completed. By repeating step S116, waiting is performed until the large winning opening is opened again.

It should be noted that the time saving state (time saving control) ends only when the next big hit game state is started, out of the execution of the variable display of a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit game state. You may do it. In this case, it is not necessary to set the initial count value or the time reduction counter itself.

Next, the main operations of the effect control board 12 will be described.

In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute a predetermined effect control main process. When the effect control main process is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process to clear the RAM 122, set various initial values, and CTC (counter / timer) mounted on the effect control board 12. Set the register of the circuit). After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 122 (for example, the effect control flag setting unit) is turned on. The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off, it waits.

Further, on the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that is not automatically interrupt disabled is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, a control signal to be an effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

When the timer interrupt flag is on, the timer interrupt flag is cleared to turn it off, and command analysis processing is executed. In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are performed.

After executing the command analysis process, the effect control process process is executed. In the effect control process processing, for example, various effects such as display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, lighting operation in the light emitting body such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the like. The control content of the effect operation using the device is determined, determined, set, and the like according to the effect control command and the like transmitted from the main board 11. Following the effect control process process, the effect random number update process is executed, and the software updates the numerical data indicating the effect random numbers counted by the random counter of the RAM 122 as various random number values used for the effect control.

FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 15, first, the effect control CPU 120 executes a look-ahead process for setting execution of a look-ahead effect such as a hold / active change effect or a movable body effect (step S160).

FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing an example of the look-ahead process executed in step S160 of FIG. As shown in FIG. 16, first, the effect control CPU 120 receives a start winning opening designation command (first starting winning opening designation command and second starting winning opening designated command) transmitted in the start winning prize determination process of FIG. 8 on the main board 11. It is determined whether or not the display result specification command (any of the display result 1 specified command, the display result 2 specified command, and the display result 3 specified command) and the variable category command have been input (any of the specified commands). Step S600). The effect control CPU 120 can recognize the start winning prize by the start winning opening designation command. Further, the effect control CPU 120 can recognize whether the winning determination result corresponding to the starting winning is a big hit or a loss by the display result designation command. Further, the effect control CPU 120 can recognize the variable display variation pattern (whether or not it is super reach, etc.) corresponding to the start winning by the variation category command. It should be noted that these commands may be stored in the start winning command receive command buffer provided in the RAM 122.

If the start winning opening designation command, the display result designation command, and the variable category command are not input (step S600; No), the look-ahead process is terminated. On the other hand, when the start winning opening designation command, the display result designation command, and the variable category command are input (step S600; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 sets the hold storage number count value indicating the special figure hold storage number to 1. Increase (step S601). The hold storage number count value is provided in, for example, the RAM 122. The hold memory count value is incremented by 1 each time the first start winning slot designation command or the second starting winning slot designation command is input, and the first symbol variation start designation command or the second symbol variation start designation command is input. It decreases by 1 for each command. As a result, the hold storage number count value indicates the current special figure hold storage number.

After increasing the hold storage count value by 1 (step S601), the effect control CPU 120 performs a look-ahead effect execution setting process for setting the execution of the look-ahead effect such as the hold / active change effect and the movable body effect (step S602).

FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing an example of the look-ahead effect execution setting process executed in step S602 of FIG. As shown in FIG. 17, first, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect such as the hold / active change effect and the movable body effect (step S700). Specifically, in the process of step S700, whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect is determined with reference to the look-ahead effect execution decision table shown in FIG. In addition, if the commands at the time of starting prize are missed or inconsistent, the look-ahead effect is restricted so that the look-ahead effect is not set until the variable display of the hold information corresponding to those commands is executed (digested). Will be done. Further, when the execution of the look-ahead effect is restricted, the look-ahead effect in all modes may not be executed for the look-ahead effect targeting the variable display corresponding to the start winning prize generated within the predetermined period. The look-ahead effect of some aspects may not be executed. Further, in this embodiment, when the look-ahead effect is already being executed, it is restricted so that the process of executing the look-ahead effect for other targets is not performed until the variable display to be the notice target is completed. .. Further, the process of executing the look-ahead effect may be restricted during the time reduction control (the look-ahead effect may be executed only in the normal state where the time reduction control is not performed), and the time reduction may be performed. During control, the look-ahead effect is executed based on the second start winning opening designation command (the look-ahead effect for winning the first start winning opening is restricted), and in the normal state where the time saving control is not performed, the first start is performed. The look-ahead effect may be executed based on the winning opening designation command (the look-ahead effect for winning a prize in the second starting winning opening is restricted). Further, the execution of the look-ahead effect may be restricted according to the number of hold storages, for example, the pre-reading effect can be executed only when the number of hold storages is 2 or more. In addition, when the look-ahead effect is executed when the number of reserved memories is 1, the hold display to be announced is changed so that it can be recognized (change to a special display mode that is displayed only when the hold / active change effect is performed). , Each change such as a change in the display mode of the active display is instantly performed for the player. Therefore, when the look-ahead effect is executed when the number of reserved storages is 1, it may be performed only when the display mode has the highest degree of expectation, such as when the final color is "red". According to this, the player's attention can be drawn to the hold display and the active display.

In addition, the variable category commands up to the previous time stored in the received command buffer at the time of starting winning are checked to determine whether or not the look-ahead effect is an executable variable category, and it is determined that the variable category is executable. The look-ahead effect may be executed only when this is done (the look-ahead effect may be restricted if it is not feasible). For example, all the variable categories specified by the variable category command stored in the start winning command buffer received before the latest variable category command are read, and all read are "non-reach". When the variation category corresponding to the variable display mode is specified, it may be determined that the variation category is capable of executing the look-ahead effect. According to this, in each variable display until the variable display to be notified is started, the look-ahead effect can be executed when all the variable display modes are "non-reach". Therefore, it is possible to prevent the reach effect from being executed in the middle of the look-ahead effect and impairing the continuity of the look-ahead effect.

FIG. 18 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a look-ahead effect execution determination table. In the look-ahead effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 18, when both the hold / active change effect and the movable body effect are executed, when only the hold / active change effect is executed and the movable body effect is not executed, the hold / active change effect and the movable body effect are executed. When only the movable body effect is executed without executing the movable body effect (when the above is the case where the look-ahead effect is executed), when both the hold / active change effect and the movable body effect are not executed (when the look-ahead effect is not executed), respectively. On the other hand, different determination ratios are set depending on whether the winning determination result indicated by the display result designation command determined to have been input in step S600 of FIG. 16 is a big hit or a loss. As shown in the figure, the execution rate of the look-ahead effect differs depending on the corresponding pending winning determination result, and in the case of a big hit, the rate of execution of the look-ahead effect is higher than in the case of loss. Further, even when the look-ahead effect is executed, in the case of a big hit, the ratio of performing both the hold / active change effect and the movable body effect is high. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's expectation that both the hold / active change effect and the movable body effect are performed. The look-ahead effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 18 is stored in, for example, the RAM 122. The effect control CPU 120 executes both the hold / active change effect and the movable body effect based on the look-ahead effect execution determination table and the winning determination result indicated by the display result designation command determined to have been input in step S600. Whether to execute only the hold / active change effect and not the movable body effect, or to execute only the movable body effect without executing the hold / active change effect and the movable body effect, or to execute the hold / active change effect and the movable body effect. Decide if you don't want to do both. That is, in the process of step S700 of FIG. 17, when the look-ahead effect is executed, whether the hold / active change effect is executed, the movable body effect is executed, or both are executed, as well as whether or not the look-ahead effect is executed. The type of look-ahead production is also decided at once. In addition to this, it is decided in two stages, such as determining whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect first, and then determining the type of the look-ahead effect to be executed when it is decided to execute the look-ahead effect. You may do it.

Returning to FIG. 17, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the decision in step S700 determines whether or not the hold / active change effect is executed (step S701). When it is determined not to execute the hold / active change effect (step S701; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the look-ahead effect execution setting process.

When it is determined to execute the hold / active change effect (step S701; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 refers to the final color determination table shown in FIG. 19 and finally changes the color (final color). Is determined (step S706). As described above, in this embodiment, in order to facilitate understanding, the pending change effect only makes the notice target recognizable by the player (changes to a special display mode), and is the first time in the active change effect. Although an example in which the display color changes is shown, for example, the display color may be changed stepwise in the hold change effect. Specifically, a plurality of hold / active change effect patterns may be prepared so that the display color can be changed each time the hold display shifts. In the hold / active change effect pattern, for example, the hold order indicating the number of the hold corresponding to the start winning prize counting from the oldest hold is the third (hold 3) and the second according to the number of hold memories. (Hold 2) The mode of the color of the hold display when it becomes the first (hold 1) and the mode of color change, and the active display when the variable display corresponding to the start winning is being executed (when it becomes active). It suffices if the color and the mode of the color change are shown. In the process of step S706, the final display color may be determined including the case where the color is changed stepwise.

FIG. 19 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the final color determination table. In the final color determination table, the final colors of "white", "blue", "green", and "red" are set to be determined at different ratios according to the variable display result. In the final color determination table in this embodiment, the case where the final color is "red" has the highest percentage of jackpots, followed by "green", followed by "blue" and "white". The ratio is set low. In the case of "green" and "red", the determination ratio is set so that the super reach or higher is confirmed. As described above, in the hold / active change effect in which the display color changes to green or red, all the hold display and the active display being displayed may be enlarged. , It means that it is definitely notified that the variable display corresponding to the hold display to be notified will be at least super reach. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's expectation that the enlarged display will be performed.

Returning to FIG. 17, after executing the process of step S706, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the final color determined in the process of step S706 is “green” or “red” (step S707). .. When the final color is neither "green" nor "red", that is, "white" or "blue" (step S707; No), the effect control CPU 120 is all displayed including the hold display to be announced. The enlargement mode setting for magnifying and displaying the hold display and the active display of the above is determined to be none (step S708). As a result, in the hold / active change effect that changes to "white" or "blue", the enlarged display is not performed, and the small screen as the specific display area is not displayed in the image display device 5. After executing the process of step S708, the effect control CPU 120 ends the look-ahead effect execution setting process.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S707 that the final color is "green" or "red" (step S707), the effect control CPU 120 displays all the pending displays including the pending display to be announced. In addition, the presence / absence of the enlargement mode setting for displaying the active display in an enlarged manner is determined with reference to the enlargement mode setting presence / absence determination table shown in FIG. 20 (step S709).

FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a configuration example of an enlarged mode setting presence / absence determination table. In the enlargement mode setting presence / absence determination table shown in FIG. 20, the display result designation command determined to have been input in step S600 of FIG. Different decision ratios are set depending on whether the judgment result at the time of winning is a big hit or a loss. As shown in the figure, the percentage determined to have the enlarged mode setting to perform the enlarged display is different depending on the corresponding pending winning judgment result, and in the case of a big hit, it is determined to have the enlarged mode setting than in the case of loss. The percentage is high. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's expectation that the enlarged display is performed.

Returning to FIG. 17, after executing the process of step S709, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is determined in step S709 that the expansion mode is set (step S710). If it is determined without setting the expansion mode (step S710; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the look-ahead effect execution setting process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the expansion mode is set (step S710; Yes), whether or not the effect control CPU 120 is determined to perform the movable body effect in step S700, that is, the hold / active change effect and the movable body It is determined whether or not it is decided to perform both body effects (step S711). When the movable body effect is not performed, that is, when only the hold / active change effect is performed (step S711; No), the effect control CPU 120 turns on the enlargement flag indicating that only the hold / active change effect for performing the enlarged display is executed. (Step S712). The expansion flag may be provided in the RAM 122. After executing the process of step S712, the effect control CPU 120 ends the look-ahead effect execution setting process.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the movable body effect is to be performed, that is, when both the active change effect and the movable body effect are performed (step S711; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 is held to perform the enlarged display. The active change effect is executed, and the movable body effect is further performed, that is, the overlapping flag indicating that the movable body effect to be executed is the above-mentioned movable body special effect is set to the on state (step S713). The duplicate flag may be provided in the RAM 122. After executing the process of step S713, the effect control CPU 120 ends the look-ahead effect execution setting process. It is also said that the specific condition is satisfied when the duplicate flag is set to the on state, that is, both the hold / active change effect for enlarging the display and the movable body effect are performed.

After returning to FIG. 16 and executing the process of step S602, the effect control CPU 120 performs a process of adding a hold display or an active display (step S603). For example, when the number of reserved memories is 1 and the condition for starting the special figure game is satisfied, the effect control CPU 120 controls to add the active display to the active display area 5HA, and in other cases, the effect display is added to the active display area 5HA. The effect control CPU 120 controls to add a hold display according to the hold order to the start winning memory display area 5H. As described above, the conditions for starting the special figure game are the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure and the first condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure. There are two start conditions. For example, when the previous special figure game or the jackpot game state is completed and the variable display is not executed on the image display device 5 and the demo image or the like is displayed, the first start condition and the second start condition are satisfied. It becomes a state.

Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 determines the contents of the hold display and the active display (gray display as the initial state) to be displayed by the image display device 5, and displays the contents to the display control unit 123 according to the determination. Output a control command. The display control unit 123 mounted on the effect control board 12 determines the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5 based on the display control command from the effect control CPU 120, generates image data, and activates the active display area 5HA. Is displayed in the active display, and the hold display is displayed in the start winning memory display area 5H. After executing the process of step S603, the effect control CPU 120 ends the look-ahead process.

It will be described again by returning to FIG. After the look-ahead process in step S160, the effect control CPU 120 responds to the value of the effect process flag (initially "0") provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 122 (for example, the effect control flag setting unit). One of the processes of steps S170 to S177 is selected and executed.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0”. In this variable display start waiting process, the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is performed based on whether or not the first symbol symbol variation start designation command or the second symbol variation start designation command from the main board 11 is received. It includes a process for determining whether or not to start. When the first symbol variation start designation command or the second symbol variation start designation command is received and it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1". Will be done.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. This variable display start setting process corresponds to the start of variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the decorative symbol in the image display device 5. In order to perform the variable display of the above, the look-ahead effect set in the process of step S602 of FIG. It includes processing to determine the effect control pattern. The variable display start setting process ends when the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2".

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to the timer value in the effect control process timer provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 122 (for example, the effect control timer setting unit), and the effect control determined in step S171. Various control data are read from the pattern, and various effect controls are performed during the variable display of the decorative pattern.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the hit start designation command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received. Then, when the hit start designation command is received, the hit start designation command specifies the start of the jackpot game state, and the jackpot type specified by the display result designation command received before that is "probability change". Or, if it is "non-probability change", the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4". In addition, when the effect control process timer times out without receiving the hit start designation command (when the hit start designation command reception waiting time elapses), it is determined that the special figure display result in the special figure game is "missing". Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0".

The process when the large winning opening is normally opened in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “4”. In this process when the large winning opening is normally opened, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state of "probability change" or "non-probability change", and the effect image based on the setting content. Is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound and sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting the command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and the command (electricity) to the lamp control board 14 is output. Various effect controls (for example, that a big hit has occurred) in a "probable change" or "non-probable change" big hit game state, such as turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by the output of the decoration signal). , Including the effect control to be notified by the image display device 5). Further, in the process when the large winning opening is normally opened, for example, the value of the effect control process flag is set to "5", which is a value corresponding to the ending effect process, in response to receiving the jackpot end designation command from the main board 11. Update.

The ending effect process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “5”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, and displays an effect image based on the set contents in the display area of the image display device 5. , The output of the command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13 is to output the sound and sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the output of the command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14 is for the game effect lamp 9 and decoration. Various effect controls at the end of the jackpot game state, such as turning on / off / blinking the LED, are executed. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0".

FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S171 of FIG. 15 as the variable display start setting process. In the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 21, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the special figure display result is "missing" based on, for example, a display result designation command transmitted from the main board 11. Determine (step S521). When it is determined that the special figure display result is "missing" (step S521; Yes), for example, the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern command transmitted from the main board 11 changes the variable display mode of the decorative symbol. It is determined whether or not the non-reach variation pattern corresponds to the case of “non-reach” which is not the reach mode (step S522).

If it is determined in step S522 that the pattern is a non-reach variation pattern (step S522; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines a combination of fixed decorative symbols that is the final stop symbol constituting the non-reach combination (step S522; Yes). Step S523). As an example, in the process of step S523, first, the effect control CPU 120 determines the left fixed symbol that is updated by the effect random counter or the like provided in the predetermined area (for example, the effect control counter setting unit) of the random number circuit 124 or the RAM 122. By extracting the numerical data indicating the random number value for use and referring to the left confirmed symbol determination table prepared in advance stored in the ROM 121, the “left” of the confirmed decorative symbols in the display area of the image display device 5 The left fixed decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display area 5L is determined. Next, the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the right-determined symbol, which is updated by the random number circuit 124 or the random counter for effect, is extracted, and the right-determined symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 and prepared is referred to. Among the fixed decorative symbols, the right fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined. At this time, it is preferable that the symbol number of the right fixed decorative symbol is determined to be different from the symbol number of the left fixed decorative symbol by the setting in the right confirmed symbol determination table or the like. Subsequently, the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the medium-determined symbol updated by the random number circuit 124 or the random counter for effect is extracted, and the medium-determined symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 and prepared is referred to. Among the fixed decorative symbols, the medium fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined.

When it is determined in step S522 that the pattern is not a non-reach variation pattern (step S522; No), a combination of fixed decorative symbols to be the final stop symbol constituting the reach combination is determined (step S524). As an example, in the process of step S524, first, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining a left-right confirmed symbol updated by a random number circuit 124 or a random counter for effect is extracted, and left and right stored in advance in ROM 121 and prepared. By referring to the finalized symbol determination table, among the finalized decorative symbols, the symbol numbers that are stopped and displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R in the display area of the image display device 5 are displayed. Determine the same decorative pattern. Further, the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the medium-determined symbol updated by the random number circuit 124 or the random counter for effect is extracted, and the medium-determined symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 and prepared is referred to. Therefore, among the fixed decorative symbols, the medium fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined. Here, for example, when the symbol number of the medium-fixed decorative symbol is the same as the symbol number of the left-fixed decorative symbol and the right-fixed decorative symbol, and the fixed decorative symbol is a jackpot combination, an arbitrary value is used. By adding or subtracting (for example, "1") to the symbol number of the medium fixed decorative symbol, the fixed decorative symbol may be a reach combination instead of a jackpot combination. Alternatively, when determining the medium-fixed decorative symbol, the difference (design difference) between the left-fixed decorative symbol and the right-fixed decorative symbol may be determined, and the medium-fixed decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol difference may be set. ..

When it is determined in step S521 that the special figure display result is not "missing" (step S521; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines the combination of the final stop symbols forming the jackpot combination. (Step S527). As an example, in the process of step S527, first, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining a jackpot confirmed symbol updated by a random number circuit 124, a random counter for effect, or the like is extracted. Subsequently, by referring to the jackpot confirmation symbol determination table stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 121, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L in the display area of the image display device 5 Determines decorative symbols with the same symbol number that is stopped and displayed along with 5C and 5R. At this time, for example, the same decorative symbol is determined according to the jackpot type specified by the display result designation command or the like.

Information on the mode and stop order of the left fixed decorative symbol, the right fixed decorative symbol, and the middle fixed decorative symbol set in steps S523, S524, and S527 is stored in, for example, the RAM 122.

After executing any of the processes of steps S523, S524, and S527, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the duplicate flag is set to the ON state (step S528). As described above, the duplicate flag is a flag indicating that the hold / active change effect for enlarging the display is executed and the movable body effect is further performed, and is set to the ON state in the process of step S712 of FIG. .. When it is determined that the duplication flag is set to the ON state (step S528; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 has an effect on a small screen as a specific display area displayed on the image display device 5 as a movable body effect. The movable body special effect setting process for performing the setting for executing the movable body special effect for displaying the image is executed (step S529). Specifically, in the process of step S529, the movable body 99 is rotated for 2 seconds from the start of each variable display in a plurality of variable displays until the variable display of the hold to be announced is performed, and the rotary operation is performed. At the same time, the effect image is set to be displayed on a small screen as a specific display area. After executing the process of step S529, the effect control CPU 120 performs a hold / active change effect execution setting process for setting to execute the hold / active change effect (step S530). In the process of step S530, all the hold display and the active display being displayed including the hold display to be announced are set to be enlarged and displayed, and the action effect is performed at the timing when the hold display to be notified is first shifted. Further, a setting is made to change the display color of the active display by performing an action effect at the timing of shifting to the active display area 5HA. Further, in the process of step S530, a small screen as a specific display area is displayed on the image display device 5, and an image displayed in the hold / active change effect (for example, a hold display, an active display, a character image in the action effect, etc.) ) Is set to be displayed on the small screen, and after the hold / active change effect is finished, the display on the small screen as the specific display area is finished and the setting is made to restore the original display. The process of step S529 may be executed after the process of step S530.

When it is determined in step S528 that the duplicate flag is in the off state (step S528; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the movable body effect (step S531). When executing the movable body effect (step S531; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 performs the movable body effect setting process for executing the movable body effect (step S532). Specifically, in the process of step S532, the movable body 99 is rotated for 2 seconds from the start of each variable display in a plurality of variable displays until the variable display of the hold to be announced is performed, and the rotary operation is performed. At the same time, a setting is made to display an effect image in the vicinity of the movable body 99 in the image display device 5.

After executing the process of step S532, or when it is determined in step S531 that the movable body effect is not executed (step S531; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the hold / active change effect. (Step S533). When it is determined to execute the hold / active change effect (step S533; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 sets the hold / active change effect execution setting for executing the hold / active change effect according to the setting status of the expansion flag. Process (step S534). As described above, the expansion flag is set to the ON state in step S712 of FIG. In the process of step S534, when the enlargement flag is set to the ON state, all the hold display and the active display being displayed including the hold display of the notice target are set to be enlarged and displayed, and the notice target is set. The action effect is performed at the timing when the hold display is first shifted, and the display color of the active display is changed at the timing when the hold display is shifted to the active display area 5HA. On the other hand, if the enlargement flag is not set to the on state and is in the off state, no setting or action effect for enlarging all the hold display and the active display being displayed including the hold display to be announced is not performed. , The display mode is changed so that the notice target can be recognized at the timing when the hold display to be notified is first shifted, and the display color of the active display is changed at the timing when the notice target is shifted to the active display area 5HA. Only make settings to change (without directing).

After executing the process of step S530 or step S534, or when it is determined in step S533 that the hold / active change effect is not executed (step S533; No), the effect control CPU 120 is for executing another effect. The effect pattern setting process is performed (step S535).

Subsequently, the effect control CPU 120 sets the effect control pattern, which is the pattern to be used later, based on the contents set in the processes of steps S528 to S534 and the effect pattern set in the process of step S529. Select from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance (step S536).

Subsequently, the effect control CPU 120 sets the initial value of the effect control process timer provided in a predetermined area (effect control timer setting unit, etc.) of the RAM 122 in response to the variation pattern specified by, for example, the variation pattern command. (Step S537).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 makes settings for starting the variation of the decorative pattern and the like in the image display device 5 (step S538). At this time, for example, the image display device 5 is transmitted to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123 a display control command specified by the display control data included in the effect control pattern determined as the pattern to be used in step S536. The variation of the decorative symbol may be started in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the display area of.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 makes settings for updating the hold display in the start winning memory display area 5H and the active display in the active display area 5HA in response to the start of the variable display (step S539). Here, when the hold display is displayed in the start winning memory display area 5H, the effect control CPU 120 erases the hold display corresponding to the hold order 1 and moves the remaining hold displays one by one (shift). ). On the other hand, when the hold display is not displayed in the start winning memory display area 5H and only the active display in the active display area 5HA is displayed, the effect control CPU 120 does not update the display.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect process flag to “2”, which is a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S540), and then ends the variable display start setting process.

FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S172 of FIG. 15 as the variable display effect process. In the effect processing during variable display shown in FIG. 22, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern has elapsed based on, for example, the effect control process timer value (step S801). ). As an example, in the process of step S541, the effect control process timer value is updated (for example, 1 is subtracted), and when the end code is read from the effect control pattern corresponding to the updated effect control process timer value, or the like. It may be determined that the variable display time has elapsed.

If the variable display time has not elapsed in step S541 (step S801; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the movable body effect execution period for executing the movable body effect (step S801; No). Step S802). The movable body effect execution period is set in steps S529 and S532 shown in FIG. When it is determined that the movable body effect execution period is in effect (step S802; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the duplicate flag is set to the ON state (step S803). When the duplication flag is set to the ON state (step S803; Yes), the movable body 99 is rotated and the effect image is displayed on a small screen as a specific display area according to the rotating motion. Control is performed (step S805). On the other hand, when the duplication flag is off (step S803; No), the movable body 99 is rotated and the effect image is displayed in the vicinity of the movable body 99 in the image display device 5 in accordance with the rotational movement. (Step S804).

After performing the processing of step S805 or step S804, or when it is determined in step S802 that it is not the movable body effect execution period (step S803; No), the effect control CPU 120 executes the hold / active change effect. (Step S806). The hold / active change effect execution period is set in steps S530 and S534 shown in FIG. When it is determined that the hold / active change effect execution period is reached (step S806; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 executes the hold / active change effect according to the contents set in step S530 or step S534 of FIG. (Step S807). Specifically, in the process of step S807, when the enlargement mode setting for enlarging the display is performed, the enlargement control for enlarging and displaying all the hold display and the active display in the display including the hold display to be announced is performed. At the same time, a character for performing an action effect is displayed, and control for changing the display mode of the hold display and the active display is performed, and a display other than the display related to the hold / active change effect is performed on a small screen as a specific display area. Control etc. are performed. Specifically, on the small screen as the specific display area, all the displays other than the display related to the hold / active change effect, such as the background image, the variable display, and the notice effect other than the hold / active change effect, are performed. On the other hand, when the magnifying mode setting for performing the magnifying display is not performed, the magnifying control is not performed, and the control for changing the display mode of the hold display and the active display is performed without executing the action effect.

After executing the process of step S807, or when it is determined in step S806 that it is not the hold / active change effect execution period (step S806; No), the effect control CPU 120 sets the duplicate flag or the expansion flag to the ON state. It is determined whether or not it has been performed (step S808). When it is determined that the duplicate flag or the expansion flag is set to the ON state (S808; Yes), it is determined whether or not the hold / active change effect execution period has expired (step S809). When the hold / active change effect execution period ends (step S809; Yes), the display control by the small screen as a special area, that is, the specific display area control is ended, and the display is restored (step S810). After executing the process of step S810, the effect control CPU 120 clears the overlapping flag or the expansion flag, which is set to the on state, to the off state (step S811).

After executing the process of step S811, if it is determined in step S808 that both the duplicate flag and the expansion flag are off (step S808; No), or in step S809, the hold / active change effect execution period has not ended. When it is determined (step S809; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the reach effect execution period for executing the reach effect (step S812). The reach effect execution period may be predetermined in the effect control pattern selected in response to the predetermined reach effect. When the reach effect execution period is reached in step S812 (step S812; Yes), the effect operation control for executing the reach effect is performed (step S813).

When it is not the reach effect execution period in step S812 (step S812; No), or after the process of step S813 is executed, for example, based on the setting in the special figure variation effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern, etc. After performing the effect operation control including the variable display operation of the decorative symbol (step S814), the effect process during the variable display is terminated. If a small screen as a specific display area is displayed, the effect performed in step S814 will be performed on the small screen. Whether or not the small screen display is performed may be determined by referring to, for example, the state of the small screen display flag provided in the RAM 122. The small screen display flag may be set to the on state when the small screen is displayed in the process of step S807, and may be cleared to the off state in the process of step S810.

When the variable display time has elapsed in step S801 (step S801; Yes), it is determined whether or not the symbol determination command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received (step S815). At this time, if the symbol confirmation command is not received (step S815; No), the effect processing during variable display is terminated and the process waits. If the predetermined time elapses without receiving the symbol confirmation command after the variable display time has elapsed, the predetermined error processing is executed in response to the failure to normally receive the symbol confirmation command. You may do so.

When the symbol confirmation command is received in step S815 (step S815; Yes), for example, in the variable display of the decorative symbol such as transmitting a predetermined display control command to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123. Control is performed to derive and display the final stop symbol (fixed decorative symbol) that is the display result (step S816). Subsequently, a predetermined fixed time is set as the waiting time for receiving the hit start designation command (step S817), and the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", which is a value corresponding to the special figure hit waiting process (step S817). Step S818), the effect processing during variable display is terminated.

Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 23 and 25, an effect in the case where a hold / active change effect for enlarging the display and a movable body effect (the movable body effect executed here is a movable body special effect) is performed. The operation will be described. FIG. 23 is a timing chart when the hold / active change effect and the movable body effect are performed (more specifically, the timing when the hold / active change effect for enlarging the display and the movable body special effect are performed). It is a chart). FIG. 25 is a diagram showing an example of the effect operation of the hold / active change effect and the movable body effect (more specifically, the effect operation in the case of performing the hold / active change effect for enlarging the display and the movable body special effect). It is a figure which shows an example). In the illustrated example, the third variable display is the variable display of the advance notice target of the look-ahead effect, the variable display of the advance notice target is referred to as target variation, and the hold display of the advance notice target is referred to as target hold.

First, when the first variable display is started (transition from FIG. 25 (A) to FIG. 25 (B)), the hold / active change effect is executed, and all the hold display and the active display being displayed are enlarged and displayed. (The hold display of the start winning memory display area 5H and the active display of the active display area 5HA shown in FIG. 25 (A) are the hold display and the active display area 5HA of the start prize memory display area 5H shown in FIG. 25 (B). The action effect is executed together with the active display of. It should be noted that the effect may be changed to a star shape (special mode) in connection with the switching of the background without executing the action effect. Further, the display mode of the hold display may be changed by executing the action effect of a different mode between the cases shown in FIGS. 25 (B) and 25 (F). In the illustrated example, the entire active display area 5HA (both the active display AH and the pedestal display AHA) is enlarged and displayed. In addition, the display mode of the hold display of the notice target is changed to a star shape (special mode) so that the player can recognize which hold display is the hold display of the notice target (Fig. 25 (B)). Hold display HG). A small screen as a specific display area is displayed in accordance with this (small screen 6DP shown in FIG. 25 (B)). At the same time, as a movable body effect, the movable body 99 is rotated for 2 seconds from the start of the variable display, and an effect image (effect image 44 shown in FIG. 25B) is displayed on a small screen. Is executed (above, FIG. 25B). Further, the background image and the decorative design are reduced and displayed on a small screen (the background image 66 and the decorative design 5L, 5C, and 5R shown in FIG. 25 (A) are the background image 66 and the decorative design shown in FIG. 25 (B). It is reduced and displayed as 5L, 5C, and 5R). As shown in the figure, once the hold / active change effect for enlarged display is executed, the small screen as the specific display area continues to be displayed for at least the period until the hold / active change effect ends. It becomes.

Then, when the first variable display is completed (FIG. 25 (C)) and the second variable display is started, the movable body 99 is rotated for 2 seconds from the start of the variable display, and the movable body special effect is performed. It is executed (FIG. 25 (D)). When the target fluctuation is started, the movable body 99 is rotated for 2 seconds from the start of the target fluctuation, the movable body special effect is executed, and the action effect is performed on the active display (FIG. 25 (FIG. 25). F)). Subsequently, when the movable body special effect is completed, the display color of the active display changes to the final color determined in step S706 of FIG. 17 as a result of the action effect (active display of the special mode shown in FIG. 25 (F)). The aspect of 5HG changes to the aspect of active display 5HK). In the illustrated example, an example in which the color has changed to red is shown (FIG. 25 (G)). When the hold / active change effect ends, the enlarged display ends in accordance with the end (as shown in FIG. 25 (H), the hold display of the start winning memory display area 5H and the active display of the active display area 5HA (pedestal display). (Including) is displayed in its original size). After that, the control by the small screen is terminated by hiding the specific display area, and the original display (decorative symbols 5L, 5C, 5R are also displayed in the original size, and the background image 66 is also displayed in the original size). (Fig. 25 (H)). Then, a production operation such as a reach effect is performed. As shown in FIG. 23, the hold / active change effect in this embodiment ends after the movable body effect (in this case, the movable body special effect) is completed. In addition, the small screen as the specific display area is deleted after the hold / active change effect is completed. Therefore, the end timing of the effect is clarified, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced. In addition, it is possible to reduce (prevent) the sense of incongruity caused by the end of the movable body production when it is in a halfway state. Further, as shown in FIG. 25, on the small screen as the specific display area, the display related to the hold / active change effect (for example, the hold display, the active display, and the character in the action effect) such as the variable display of the background image and the decorative pattern and the effect image. Display other than (image, etc.) is performed, and hold display and active display are not performed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a sense of incongruity caused by displaying a corresponding display corresponding to a variable display such as a hold display or an active display in a plurality of display areas.

FIG. 24 is a diagram showing an example of an effect operation of the movable body effect, and more specifically, is a diagram showing an example of an effect operation when only the movable body effect is performed as the look-ahead effect. As described above, the movable body effect includes a special movable body effect that displays an effect image for effectively conspicuous that the movable body 99 is operating on a small screen as a specific display area, and the effect. Since a (normal) movable body effect of displaying an image in the vicinity of the movable body 99 in the image display device 5 can be executed, the difference will be described. As shown in FIG. 24 (A), the third hold display is stored during the variable display (three hold displays are displayed in the start winning memory display area 5H shown in FIG. 24 (A), and the active display area 5HA The active display AH and the pedestal display AHA are displayed), and the case where the hold is determined as the target hold will be described as an example. As shown in FIG. 24 (B), when the variable display being executed ends and the next variable display is started, as shown in FIG. 24 (C), the movable body effect is produced for 2 seconds from the start of the variable display. As a result, the movable body 99 rotates, and an effect image (effect image 44 shown in FIG. 24C) is displayed. In this case, since the enlarged display is not performed, unlike FIGS. 25 (B), 25 (D), and 25 (F), the effect image is the movable body 99 in the image display device 5 as shown in the figure. It is displayed in the vicinity (the effect image 44 is displayed in the vicinity of the movable body 99 as shown in FIG. 24C). Further, unlike FIG. 25 (B), the background image (background image 66 shown in FIG. 24 (A)) and the decorative design (decorative design 5L, 5C, 5R shown in FIG. 24 (A)) are displayed on the image display device 5. It is displayed and not displayed on the small screen. Then, when 2 seconds have passed from the start of the variable display, the movable body effect ends, the rotational operation of the movable body 99 stops, and the effect image is also erased. After that, until the fluctuation corresponding to the target hold (target fluctuation) is started (including the target fluctuation), the movable body effect is executed for each fluctuation.

When the movable body effect is executed a plurality of times before the target fluctuates as in the movable body effect in FIGS. 24 and 25, the speed of the rotation operation in each time is gradually increased, and the color of the effect image is changed each time. You may change it. In this case, the effect image of the final color in the hold / active change effect may be displayed in the final movable body effect. According to this, a sense of unity in the production can be maintained, and the game entertainment can be improved. The movable body 99 may also be provided with an LED or a lamp, and may be lit or blinked in various colors according to the rotation operation. For example, the movable body 99 may be provided with an LED to emit light in a color according to the degree of expectation and be rotated (that is, the movable body effect may be executed in a different manner depending on the degree of expectation). Then, the color of the effect image to be displayed as the effect auxiliary display may be a color corresponding to the emission color of the LED. According to this, the effect of production can be improved. In addition, the execution patterns of the production auxiliary display are diversified, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game. Further, in the movable body effect, the operation sound may be output in accordance with the rotational movement of the movable body 99. In this case, even if the speaker to be output is different depending on whether the moving body effect being executed is a movable body special effect that displays an effect image on a small screen as a specific display area or a normal movable body effect. Good. For example, in the normal movable body effect, the operating sound is output by the speaker 8L and the speaker 8R, while in the movable body special effect, the speaker on the side where the specific display area is displayed (in the example shown in FIG. 25). Since a small screen as a specific display area is displayed on the left side of the image display device, the operating sound may be output only from the speaker 8L). In addition, during the period in which the small screen as the specific display area is displayed (that is, the period in which the hold / active change effect is executed), all the audio outputs related to the display performed on the small screen as the specific display area are output. The output may be made only from the speaker on the side where the specific display area is displayed. According to this, the effect of production can be enhanced.

As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the following effects can be obtained.

The effect control CPU 120 can execute two types of effects such as a hold / active change effect and a movable body effect as a look-ahead effect. Then, when both the hold / active change effect and the movable body effect are executed, the effect image is displayed on a small screen as a specific display area displayed on the image display device 5, and the movable body is displayed in a mode different from the normal state. The production can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest in the game due to a decrease in the visibility of the effect.

Further, when the effect control CPU 120 executes both the hold / active change effect and the movable body effect, the effect image is displayed on a small screen as a specific display area displayed on the image display device 5, and the movable body effect is displayed. Notifies the player that is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to easily recognize that the movable body production is being executed, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment. Further, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the hold / active change effect that enlarges the display as the hold / active change effect. Therefore, it is possible to easily recognize that the display mode is changed as a hold / active change effect, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

The effect control CPU 120 rotates the movable body 99 as a movable body effect, and displays an effect image as an effect auxiliary display so that the operation of the movable body 99 is effectively conspicuous. Then, when only the movable body effect is performed, the effect image is displayed in the vicinity of the movable body 99 in the image display device 5, whereas when both the hold / active change effect and the movable body effect which perform the enlarged display are performed, the effect image is displayed. Displays the effect image on a small screen as a specific display area. Therefore, the production auxiliary display can be appropriately performed, and the game entertainment can be improved.

Further, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the hold / active change effect that enlarges the display, the display (background) other than the display related to the hold / active change effect (for example, the hold display, the active display, the character image in the action effect, etc.) (Variable display of images and decorative patterns, effect images, etc.) are all performed on the small screen as a specific display area, and hold display and active display are not displayed on the small screen. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a sense of incongruity caused by displaying a corresponding display corresponding to a variable display such as a hold display or an active display in a plurality of display areas. In addition, the effect control CPU may perform all displays other than the display related to the hold / active change effect, such as a background image, a variable display, and a notice effect other than the hold / active change effect, on a small screen as a specific display area. It is possible. Therefore, the visibility of the effect can be improved, the effect of the effect can be improved, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 ends the hold / active change effect after the end of the movable body effect, hides the small screen as the specific display area after the end of the hold / active change effect, and ends the control by the small screen. .. Therefore, the end timing of the effect is clarified, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 changes the hold / active change effect so that the player can recognize which hold the advance notice target of the look-ahead effect is. That is, when the hold / active change effect is performed, the display mode is changed to a peculiar display mode. Therefore, the target to which the hold / active change effect is performed becomes clear, and the effect of the effect can be improved.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the movable body effect according to the degree of expectation, and displays the effect image as the effect auxiliary display in the movable body effect. Then, when the hold / active change effect for further magnified display is performed (when the specific condition of performing both the hold / active change effect for magnified display and the movable body effect is satisfied), the effect image is displayed. , It is possible to display at a different position compared to the case where the hold / active change effect is not performed (when the specific condition is not satisfied). Therefore, the execution pattern of the production auxiliary display is diversified, and it is possible to prevent the game from being enjoyed. More specifically, when a hold / active change effect for enlarged display is performed, the effect control CPU 120 executes a movable body special effect as the movable body effect to display an effect image on a small screen as a specific display area. indicate. Therefore, it is possible to easily recognize that a specific condition is satisfied, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the active display area 5HA is arranged close to the start winning memory display area 5H on the screen of the image display device 5, and the active display is displayed close to the hold display. As a result, when the hold display is deleted, the player can pay attention to the active display.

The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 does not have to have all the technical features shown in the above-described embodiment, and has been described in the above-described embodiment so as to solve at least one problem in the prior art. It may have a structure of parts. In addition, at least a part of each of the following modifications may be combined.

In the above embodiment, in the hold / active change effect for which the enlarged display is performed, it is possible to recognize which hold is the variable display to be notified by performing the action effect (hold / active change effect is performed). An example (see FIG. 25B) is shown (which is a special display mode that is displayed only in case), but this is an example. For example, the action effect may be performed only when the display mode of the active display is changed, or the action effect may not be performed when the display mode is a special display mode. The timing of changing to the special display mode may be the timing at which the hold / active change effect is started, or the timing at which the hold (target hold) corresponding to the variable display of the advance notice is shifted (the number of times). It may be decided whether it is the timing of the shift). Further, in the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the enlarged display may not be performed when the hold / active change effect in which the display mode of the active display changes to "green" or "red" is executed. When a hold / active change effect in which the display mode of the active display changes to "green" or "red" is executed, 100% enlarged display may be performed. Further, even when the hold / active change effect in which the display mode of the active display changes to "white" or "blue" is executed, the enlarged display may be performed. Further, in the above embodiment, when the enlarged display is performed in the hold / active change effect, an example is shown in which the target of the enlarged display is all the hold display and the active display itself being displayed, but in addition to this, the hold display is shown. In addition, a display unit or a display area of the active display (for example, a pedestal display or a region-divided portion) may be enlarged and displayed.

Further, in the above embodiment, the hold / active change effect and the movable body effect are performed as the look-ahead effect, and the hold / active change effect and the movable body effect for enlarging the display are performed in the same period. An example is shown in which the execution mode of the movable body effect is different (the movable body special effect is performed), but this is an example. The condition is not limited to the two types of effects executed as the look-ahead effects being performed in the same period. For example, notices for the fluctuations performed during variable display, such as notices by characters, notices using characters and telops, and notices of background changes that change the mode of the background, are performed during the same period, or jackpot control is in progress. It suffices if two types of effects performed in an arbitrary state are performed in the same period, such as the effects performed in the same period, and if one effect is executed, the other effect becomes difficult to see. For example, the type of effect may be any effect. Further, one effect may be a look-ahead effect, and the other effect may be a notice effect for the fluctuation performed during the variable display. Further, the effects executed in the same period are not limited to two types, and may be three or more types. In this case, the specific display area may be further displayed. Further, when three or more kinds of effects are executed in the same period, a plurality of effects may be executed on a small screen as a specific display area. Further, by displaying the pseudo-continuous chance symbol which is the pseudo-continuous chance eye on the small screen as the specific display area, the expansion control may be performed over a plurality of fluctuations in the fluctuation. Further, in the above embodiment, an example in which the specific display area is displayed in the image display device 5 is shown, but in a gaming machine or the like provided with a sub liquid crystal in addition to the image display device 5, the specific display area is displayed. It is not necessary to do so, and the display performed on the small screen as the specific display area may be performed on the sub liquid crystal. Further, in the above embodiment, on the condition that the hold / active change effect and the movable body effect are performed in the same period, the execution mode of the movable body effect is different, and the hold display and the active display are enlarged and displayed with priority. An example of displaying in is shown, but on the contrary, the movable body effect may be prioritized. Specifically, it is possible to execute a notice effect for operating the movable body 99 to fill the screen of the image display device 5, and in that case, the hold display or the active display may be displayed on a small screen as a specific display area. ..

Further, in the above embodiment, the various images displayed on the small screen have the same ratio as the images displayed on the image display device 5, that is, the screen size of the image display device 5 is 10. An example is shown in which if the screen size of the small screen is 1, the image displayed on the small screen has a ratio of 1/10 of the size displayed on the image display device 5, but this is an example. is there. As described above, on the small screen as the specific display area, all the displays other than the images displayed in the hold / active change effect such as the hold display, the active display, and the character image in the action effect are displayed. Of these, when performing an effect that requires the player's operation, such as a button effect, only the image that prompts the operation (promotion display) should not be reduced by the same ratio as the image displayed on the image display device 5. (The small screen may be reduced to 1/10, and the button display as the promotion display may be reduced to 2/10). According to this, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the promotion display. Further, while the small screen is displayed as the specific display area, the execution of an effect that requires the operation of the player, such as a button effect, may be prohibited. According to this, the player's attention can be drawn to the hold / active change effect. It should be noted that the button effect executed after the end of the hold / active change effect may be made executable.

Further, in the above embodiment, when the hold / active change effect for enlarging the display is executed, the action effect is executed and the display mode of the active display is a display having a relatively high degree of expectation such as "green" or "red". An example of changing to a mode is shown, which is an example. For example, the action effect that changes the active display may include a success effect and a failure effect. Specifically, when a success effect is performed, the display mode of the active display changes from the special display mode to "green" or "red", while when a failure effect is performed, the special display mode is used. Changes from to the normal mode of being "gray". Further, when the failure effect is performed, the display mode may be changed to "white" or "blue" instead of the normal mode.

In the above embodiment, in order to facilitate understanding, the pending change effect only allows the player to recognize the notice target (changes to a special display mode), and the display color changes for the first time in the active change effect. As shown, the display color may be changed in the hold change effect. Further, in the above-described embodiment, an example in which the action effect is not performed in the hold / active change effect in which the enlarged display is not performed is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, by performing the hold change effect as shown in FIG. 26, the operation related to the variable display corresponding to the hold display may be announced. In the illustrated example, the case where the hold change effect as the hold / active change effect without the enlarged display is executed is shown as an example, but in the hold change effect as the hold / active change effect with the enlarged display. Is also applicable.

FIG. 26 is a diagram showing an example of an effect operation of the hold change effect. The illustrated hold change effect is whether or not the color of the target hold display changes when the color ball thrown toward one of the hold displays hits the target hold display and breaks (that is, acts). It is a production to show. The setting here is that the color ball always hits the target hold display, and the player is entertained with the effect of whether or not the ball breaks. Of course, it may be set so that the thrown ball does not hit the target hold display. If the ball breaks and the color of the hold display changes, the production result is successful, and if the ball does not break and the color of the hold display does not change, it is a failure. When it succeeds, it is more likely that the hold display will be a big hit than when it fails. The change of the color of the hold display to a color with a high degree of expectation such as a big hit is also called "upstart".

The illustrated hold change effect has one feature in that the speed of the color ball thrown toward one of the hold displays slows down in the middle. In particular, the length of the deceleration period is not uniform, and is determined from at least two types, and the case where the deceleration period is long is more likely to be successful than the case where the deceleration period is short. However, regardless of which deceleration period is selected, the timing at which the ball starts decelerating after being thrown is the same.

On the screen of the image display device 5, various images are displayed during the variable display of the decorative pattern indicated by the three downward arrows. At the lower end, an image TH or H displaying the generated hold storage information is displayed corresponding to the number of hold storage information (hereinafter, referred to as a hold storage image or hold display). In these hold display, the hold storage image may be displayed in a format in which the first hold storage number and the second hold storage number are distinguished. In the active display area 5HA at the lower left of the screen, a position display AHA (pedestal display AHA) indicating the display position of the active display is displayed. The active display AH is displayed above the pedestal display AHA. In addition, when it is executed as a hold change effect in the hold / active change effect that enlarges the display, the variable display of the decorative symbol indicated by the three downward arrows in the illustrated example is specified as shown in the above embodiment. It may be performed on a small screen as a display area. In this case, the hold display and the active display shown in FIG. 26 may be enlarged (note that the movable body 99 is omitted in the illustrated example).

A character 930 having a color ball 931 appears during the variable display of the decorative pattern with reference to FIG. 26 (a). The appearance timing of the character 930 can be set in various ways. However, it is necessary to prevent the production from being wasted by shifting the hold display during the production period from the appearance of the character 930 to the result of the success or failure of the production. Therefore, the character 930 is made to appear at a stage where the remaining period of the variable display is sufficiently longer than the effect period.

Character 930 throws a color ball 931 toward the second hold display TH from the left among the four hold displays appearing on the screen. The time from when the character 930 throws the color ball 931 until the color ball 931 hits the hold display TH is a predetermined period. The length of the predetermined period differs depending on whether the production succeeds or fails, but it may be the same. In any case, the speed of the color ball 930 changes during the predetermined period.

The color ball 931 moves at a constant speed from the time it is pitched until a certain period of time elapses (until it moves a predetermined distance), but when a certain period of time elapses, the speed decelerates. That is, the deceleration period is entered. The situation is shown in FIG. 26 (b). The effect of such deceleration control is, for example, the effect of slow motion reproduction. The deceleration period is 3 seconds or 5 seconds. However, regardless of which deceleration period is set, the period from when the character 930 throws the ball to when it enters the deceleration period is the same. After the deceleration period due to such slow motion reproduction, the speed of the color ball 931 returns to the initial speed, and the color ball 931 eventually collides with the target hold display TH. The effect may be completed while decelerating without returning to the initial speed, or the speed after the end of the deceleration period may be different from the initial speed or the speed in the deceleration period.

After that, the pattern of the production is a success pattern in which the colliding color ball 931 is broken and the paint inside covers the target hold display, and the color of the hold display is changed to a different color from the original color, and the collided color ball 931 is broken. It bounces without bounces and is divided into a failure pattern in which the color of the hold display does not change. FIG. 26 (c) shows a success pattern, and FIG. 26 (d) shows a failure pattern. In the case of a success pattern, the push button 31B vibrates before the color ball 931 breaks, and the success pattern is notified to the player (button notification effect). As a result, the player's expectation can be improved. Of course, the push button 31B may or may not vibrate. It should be noted that such advance notice may be performed by voice or image in place of the push button 31B or in addition to the push button 31B. Further, the button notification effect may be determined by lottery. In such a case, it is desirable that the jackpot expectation is higher when the push button 31B vibrates than when the push button 31B does not vibrate. Further, the vibration of the push button 31B may be provided with different strength. In such a case, the lottery including the strength of the push button 31B may be performed at the time of the lottery for the button notification effect. Then, the jackpot expectation may be higher when the push button 31B vibrates strongly than when the push button 31B vibrates weakly.

In the success pattern, the color of the hold display changes from the original color (eg gray) to one of several colors. For example, its color variations are white, blue, green, and red. Such a difference in color represents, for example, a difference in the degree of expectation that the variable display corresponding to the hold display will be a big hit. For example, red has the highest expectation of a big hit, followed by green and blue in that order. The player can provide a more interesting game because he / she can pay attention to which color changes in the success pattern. In addition, in order to further raise the expectation for the color change, the movement of the color ball 931 may be temporarily stopped at the stage where the color ball 931 collides with the hold display or at the stage immediately before the collision.

According to the hold change effect described above, since there is a period in which the speed of the color ball 931 decelerates after the color ball 931 is released and before it collides with the hold display, the player's expectation during that period. You can enhance the feeling. In particular, the player's expectation is significantly improved as compared with the effect of colliding with the hold display at the same speed without decelerating the speed of the color ball 931. Further, since the deceleration period is selectively set from a plurality of deceleration periods, it is possible to provide a variety of effects while paying the player attention to the deceleration period.

Further, in the above embodiment, the colors of the active display and the hold display are changed in the active change effect and the hold display change effect, but the size and shape of the active display and the hold display are changed, and the active display and the hold display are changed. The display may change in various ways. In addition, the colors of active display and hold display such as red, green, blue, and white can be used for both active display and hold display, but there are colors, characters, characters, etc. that are displayed only during active display. There may be colors, characters, characters, etc. that are displayed only when the hold display is on hold.

Further, in the above embodiment, by using the look-ahead effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 18, the execution rate of the look-ahead effect is different between the case of a big hit and the case of a loss, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the reach effect is executed by changing the execution ratio of the look-ahead effect depending on the presence or absence of the reach effect corresponding to the start winning based on the variation pattern corresponding to the variation category command, the reach effect is not executed. The execution rate of the look-ahead effect may be higher than that. Further, based on the fluctuation time indicated by the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation category command, the execution ratio of the look-ahead effect is different, and when the fluctuation time is longer than the predetermined time, the look-ahead effect is executed more than when it is less than the predetermined time. The ratio may be increased.

Further, in the above embodiment, the type of jackpot is determined based on the value of the random number value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, but the conditions for determining the type of jackpot are not limited to this. For example, a specific area may be provided in the vicinity of the large winning opening or inside the large winning opening, and the type of big hit may be determined based on the entry (passage) of the game ball into the specific area. .. For example, when a probabilistic jackpot and a normal jackpot are provided, the probabilistic jackpot may be determined based on the entry of the game ball into the specific area.

Further, in the above embodiment, the jackpot game state is controlled based on the fact that the jackpot symbol is displayed on the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B, but the jackpot game state is controlled. The mode to be used is not limited to this. For example, a specific area is provided in the vicinity of the second start winning opening or inside the second starting winning opening, and the jackpot game state is controlled based on the entry (passage) of the game ball into the specific area. You may stay in.

In the above embodiment, a mode is shown in which a plurality of types of special symbols such as numbers or symbols from 0 to 9 are variably displayed and a display result is derived and displayed, but the variable display is not limited to such a mode. For example, the special symbol to be variably displayed and the special symbol derived and displayed as the variable display result may be different. In other words, special symbols that are not included in the variable multiple types of special symbols may be derived and displayed as variable display results, and some of the variable multiple types of special symbols are not specially derived and displayed as variable display results. May be included. Further, it is not always necessary to variably display a plurality of types of special symbols, and the variable display may be executed using only one type of special symbol. As a variable display using one type of special symbol, for example, the one type of special symbol may be blinked (the lighting / extinguishing may be repeated alternately). That is, the repetition of turning on and off may be a variable display. Even in this case, the one type of special symbol may be derived and displayed (lit) at the end, or a symbol different from the one type of symbol may be derived and displayed at the end. It may be. The same applies to the variable display of other symbols (for example, ordinary symbols, decorative symbols, etc.).

For example, in the above, the "ratio" is not limited to the relationship such as A: B = 70%: 30% or A: B = 30%: 70%, but is such as A: B = 100%: 0%. It is a concept that also includes relationships (that is, a concept that also includes allocations such that one is 100% and the other is 0%). Further, when A is said to have a higher ratio than B, it is a concept including the case where A is 100% and B is less than 100%, and the case where B is 0% and A is larger than 0%. is there.

Further, for example, in the above embodiment, one variation is made when the variation is started in order to notify the effect control board 12 of the variation pattern indicating the variation time, the type of reach effect, the presence / absence of pseudo-ream, and the like. Although the example of transmitting the pattern designation command is shown, the variation pattern may be notified to the effect control board 12 by two or more commands. Specifically, when notifying by two commands, the game control microcomputer 100 uses the first command to determine whether or not there is a pseudo-ream, whether or not there is a slip effect, etc. A command indicating the fluctuation time and fluctuation mode before the second stop is sent, and the second command indicates the type of reach, the presence or absence of a re-lottery effect, etc. 2 After the stop, a command indicating the fluctuation time and the fluctuation mode may be transmitted. In this case, on the effect control board 12 side, the effect control in the variation display may be performed based on the variation time derived from the combination of the two commands. The game control microcomputer 100 notifies the fluctuation time by each of the two commands, and the effect control board 12 selects the specific fluctuation mode to be executed at each timing. May be good. When sending two commands, the two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt, and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the first command is sent (for example, the next timer interrupt). In), the second command may be sent. The variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the order of transmission can be changed as appropriate. By notifying the fluctuation pattern by two or more commands in this way, it is possible to reduce the amount of data that must be stored as the fluctuation pattern designation command.

Further, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a pay-out type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, but a score is scored based on the occurrence of a prize by enclosing the gaming medium. It can also be applied to the enclosed gaming machine to be given.

In addition, only one type of off-design symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display is performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. May be good. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

Further, in the above embodiment, the pre-reading determination is performed on the main side and the command corresponding to the determination result is transmitted to the sub side, but the command indicating the random value is transmitted from the main side and the pre-reading determination is performed on the sub side. You may try to do it.

Further, in the above embodiment, the jackpot type is determined at the start of the fluctuation to determine whether or not the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state is set to the "probability change state", but the jackpot is opened at the start of the fluctuation. Only the pattern (aspect of the round game) is determined (it is sufficient to specify by the big hit type, etc.), and based on the fact that the game ball passes through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit game state. The game state after the big hit game state may be set to the "probability change state".

In addition, for example, a game score for use in a game is given and given by using a frequency that is a game value of a size specified from the recording information of a game recording medium such as a prepaid card or a membership card. The present invention can also be applied to a game machine in which a player plays a game by driving a game ball enclosed in the game machine into a game area using the game score or the game score given by winning a game.

Further, in the above, an example is used in which a gaming medium is used as a gaming machine, but the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to a gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as a prize, and is not limited to a gaming medium such as a gaming ball. It can also be applied to an enclosed gaming machine that encloses and gives a score when the conditions for giving a prize are satisfied.

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided by the detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the computer device and the like in advance. It may take the form of being distributed by pre-installing it in the storage device of the. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from another device on the network connected via the communication line or the like by providing the communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the programs and data downloaded via the communication line or the like in the internal memory or the like. It may be executed directly using the hardware resources of other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

The present invention is not limited to those described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention, in addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiment examples described later.

Further, all or a part of the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modification, and the configurations shown in the following embodiment and each modification may be arbitrarily combined.

It should be noted that the above-described embodiment and the following-described embodiment disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and are not considered to be restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description and the description below, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

The gaming machine of the present invention is a gaming machine that is further provided with a display means capable of performing variable display (for example, an image display device 5 or the like) and can be controlled in an advantageous state by a predetermined effect means. Suggestion effect execution means that can execute the suggestion effect suggesting whether or not the advantageous state is controlled depending on the mode of the effect to be executed, and can execute the effect auxiliary display related to the suggestion effect by the display means. (For example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the process of step S804 or step S805), the suggestion effect execution means can execute the effect auxiliary display at different positions depending on whether or not a specific condition is satisfied. (For example, the process of step S805 is executed when it is determined to be Yes in step S803), and further, a mode accompanied by an operation (for example, a mode of switching the display position to the advance position or the retract position, an expressionless display). Specific display corresponding to variable display (for example, active display corresponding to the fluctuation during execution, fluctuation that has not been started yet) in the display mode in which the eyes are opened and the display mode is switched to the display mode in which tears are shed. The corresponding hold display) can be displayed, and the display mode of the specific display (for example, display color (white, blue, red), which may be the shape, pattern, position, range, etc. to be displayed) can be changed. Specific display means (for example, in the effect control microcomputer 90100, the active display is displayed by performing steps S90663B and S90667B, the hold display is displayed by performing steps S903911 and S903929, and the specific display is displayed by performing step S904713. A change suggestion effect execution means (for example, a change suggestion effect (for example, a change effect (first change effect, a second change effect)) that suggests a change in the display mode of a specific display). For example, in the effect control microcomputer 90100, a change effect is set in step S904506, a process table corresponding to the change effect is selected in step S908004, and the change effect is executed by performing steps S90806 and S908105). The specific display means is provided with a specific display operation mode (for example, display position (advance position, retracted position)), operation frequency (high frequency, low frequency), and display direction (for example, downward) when the change suggestion effect is executed. , Rightward), etc.) can change the display mode of the specific display at different rates. (For example, the effect control microcomputer 90100 executes steps S904707 to S904709 at a rate of 100% when the display position of the specific display to be executed of the first change effect is the advance position. While changing the display mode of the specific display, when the display position of the specific display, which is the execution target of the first change effect, is the evacuation position, the display mode of the specific display is not changed (at a rate of 0%, the specific display is displayed). The display mode is changed)) A game machine can be mentioned.

According to such a configuration, the execution pattern of the production auxiliary display is diversified, and it is possible to prevent the game from being enjoyed. In addition, the player can be made to pay attention to the operation mode of the specific display.

Furthermore, variable display is performed as an example of a form of a gaming machine in which the execution pattern of the production auxiliary display is diversified, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game, and the player can pay attention to the operation mode of the specific display. It is a gaming machine capable of performing, and in a mode involving movement (for example, a mode in which the display position is switched to an advance position or a retract position, a display mode in which the eyes are opened to sweat or a display mode in which tears are shed from an expressionless display mode. It is possible to display a specific display corresponding to the variable display (for example, an active display corresponding to a fluctuation during execution, a hold display corresponding to a fluctuation that has not yet been started) in a variable display mode (for example, a display mode of the specific display). , Display color (white, blue, red). It may be a shape, pattern, position, range, etc. to be displayed.) Specific display means (for example, in the effect control microcomputer 90100, steps S90663B, S90667B). The active display is displayed by performing the above, the hold display is displayed by performing steps S903911 and S903929, and the display mode of the specific display is changed by performing step S904713) and the change of the display mode of the specific display. The change suggestion effect (for example, the change suggestion effect (for example, the first change effect, the second change effect)) can be executed by the change suggestion effect execution means (for example, the change effect is set in step S904506 in the effect control microcomputer 90100). , A part in which the process table corresponding to the change effect is selected in step S908004 and the change effect is executed by performing steps S90806 and S908105), and the specific display means is a specific display when the change suggestion effect is executed. (For example, display position (advance position, retract position). Other operation modes such as operation frequency (high frequency, low frequency) and display direction (for example, downward, rightward) may be used). The display mode of the specific display can be changed at a rate (for example, the effect control microcomputer 90100 advances the display position of the specific display, which is the execution target of the first change effect, by executing steps S904707 to S904709. When it is a position, the display mode of the specific display is changed at a rate of 100%, while when the display position of the specific display which is the execution target of the first change effect is the retracted position, the display mode of the specific display is changed. A gaming machine that does not change (changes the display mode of the specific display at a rate of 0%) can be mentioned. Hereinafter, an example of the form example of this gaming machine will be described as another form example.

(Example of other forms)
Hereinafter, other form examples will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 901, which is an example of the gaming machine, will be described. In addition, this other embodiment may be referred to as an "embodiment". FIG. 27 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 901 as viewed from the front.

The pachinko gaming machine 901 is composed of an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and a game frame that is openably and closably attached to the inside of the outer frame. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 901 has a glass door frame 902 formed in a frame shape provided on the gaming frame so as to be openable and closable. The game frame includes a front frame (not shown) that can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate (not shown) to which mechanical parts and the like are attached, and various parts attached to them (game described later). It is a structure including a board 906).

On the lower surface of the glass door frame 902, there is a ball hitting plate (upper plate) 903. At the lower part of the hitting ball supply plate 903, a surplus ball receiving plate 904 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply plate 903 and a hitting ball operation handle (operation knob) 905 for firing the hitting ball are provided. A game board 906 is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 902. The game board 906 is a structure including a plate-shaped body constituting the game board 906 and various parts attached to the plate-shaped body. Further, on the front surface of the game board 906, a game area 907 is formed in which the driven game ball can flow down.

An effect display device 909 composed of a liquid crystal display (LCD) is provided near the center of the game area 907. The display screen of the effect display device 909 has an effect symbol display area for variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Therefore, the effect display device 909 corresponds to a variable display device that performs variable display of the effect symbol. In the effect symbol display area, for example, there is a symbol display area for variably displaying three decorative (effect) effect symbols of "left", "middle", and "right". The symbol display area has "left", "middle", and "right" symbol display areas, but the position of the symbol display area does not have to be fixed on the display screen of the effect display device 909, and the symbol display area does not have to be fixed. The three areas of the display area may be separated. The effect display device 909 is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. When the effect control microcomputer is executing the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 908a, the effect display is executed by the effect display device 909 in accordance with the variable display, and the second special When the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed on the symbol display device 908b, the effect display is executed on the effect display device 909 along with the variable display, so that it is possible to easily grasp the progress of the game. ..

Further, in the effect display device 909, the symbols other than the symbol that becomes the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol among the left and right middle symbols) continue for a predetermined time, and the jackpot symbol (for example, the left middle right symbol is aligned with the same symbol). It is stopped, rocked, enlarged / reduced or deformed while matching the combination of symbols), or multiple symbols are synchronized and fluctuated with the same symbol, or the positions of the displayed symbols are swapped. The effect performed in a state where the possibility of a big hit continues before the final result is displayed (hereinafter, these states are referred to as reach states) is referred to as a reach effect. In addition, the reach state and its state are referred to as a reach mode. Further, the variable display including the reach effect is called the reach variable display. Then, when the display result of the symbol that is variablely displayed on the effect display device 909 is not the jackpot symbol, it becomes "missing" and the variable display state ends. The player plays the game while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

In the upper right portion of the display screen of the effect display device 909, fourth symbol display areas 909c and 909d for displaying the fourth symbol following the effect symbol and the special symbol and the ordinary symbol described later are provided. In this embodiment, the fourth symbol display area 909c for the first special symbol and the second symbol display area 909c for which the variable display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol described later. A fourth symbol display area 909d for the second special symbol is provided, in which the variation display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

In this embodiment, the variation display of the effect symbol is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol (however, to be exact, the variation display of the effect symbol varies on the effect control microcomputer 90100 side. It is performed by measuring the fluctuation time recognized based on the pattern command.) When performing the production using the effect display device 909, for example, the effect content including the variation display of the effect symbol disappears from the screen for a moment. The mode of production is diversifying, such as the production of production and the production of moving objects blocking all or part of the screen. Therefore, even when looking at the display screen on the effect display device 909, it may be difficult to recognize whether or not the variable display is currently being performed. Therefore, in this embodiment, is it currently in the variable display state by confirming the state of the fourth symbol by further performing the variable display of the fourth symbol on a part of the display screen of the effect display device 909? Whether or not it can be reliably recognized. It should be noted that the fourth symbol is always displayed in a variable manner with a constant operation, and is not erased from the screen or shielded by a shield, so that it can always be visually recognized.

The fourth symbol for the first special symbol and the fourth symbol for the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as the fourth symbol, and the fourth symbol display area 909c for the first special symbol and the second special symbol are used. The fourth symbol display area 909d for symbols may be collectively referred to as the fourth symbol display area.

The variation (variable display) of the fourth symbol is realized by continuing the state in which the fourth symbol display areas 909c and 909d are repeatedly turned on and off at a predetermined display color (for example, blue) at regular time intervals. .. The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 908a and the variable display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 909c for the first special symbol are synchronized with each other. The variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 908b and the variable display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 909d for the second special symbol are synchronized. Note that "variable display is synchronized" means that the start time and end time of the variable display are the same, and the period of the variable display is the same. Further, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 908a, the display color reminiscent of the jackpot in the fourth symbol display area 909c for the first special symbol (display color different from the missed, for example, the missed). Sometimes it is displayed in blue, but when it is a big hit, it is displayed in red. It should be noted that the display color may be different depending on whether it is a normal big hit or a probabilistic big hit. It remains lit. When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 908b, the display color reminiscent of the jackpot in the fourth symbol display area 909d for the second special symbol (display color different from the missed one). For example, it is displayed in blue when it is out of the way, but it is displayed in red when it is a big hit. Note that the display color is different depending on the type of big hit (normal big hit or probabilistic big hit). The display color of the fourth symbol display areas 909c and 909d when the lights are turned off is assimilated with the background image and disappears when the lights are turned off. It is desirable that the display color is different from the image (for example, black).

In this embodiment, the case where the fourth symbol display area is provided on a part of the display screen of the effect display device 909 is shown, but a light emitting body such as a lamp or an LED is used separately from the effect display device 909. The fourth symbol display area may be realized. In this case, for example, the fluctuation (variable display) of the fourth symbol may be realized by continuing the state in which the two LEDs are alternately lit, and any of the two LEDs is stopped. Depending on whether it is displayed or not, it may be indicated whether or not the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed.

Further, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are associated with each other and separate fourth symbol display areas 909c and 909d are provided, but the first special symbol and the second special symbol are provided. A fourth symbol display area common to the symbol may be provided on a part of the display screen of the effect display device 909. Further, a fourth symbol display area common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be realized by using a light emitting body such as a lamp or an LED. In this case, when the variable display of the fourth symbol is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol, and when the variable display of the fourth symbol is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the second special symbol. For example, the variable display of the fourth symbol may be distinguished and executed by performing a display in which the display of different display colors is repeatedly turned on and off at regular time intervals. Further, when the variable display of the fourth symbol is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol, and when the variable display of the fourth symbol is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the second special symbol, for example. , The variable display of the fourth symbol may be distinguished and executed by displaying the lights and turns off repeatedly at different time intervals. Further, for example, the same jackpot symbol is used when the stop symbol is derived and displayed in response to the variation display of the first special symbol and when the stop symbol is derived and displayed in response to the variation display of the second special symbol. However, the stop symbol of a different mode may be stopped and displayed.

On the left side of the lower part of the game board 906, a first special symbol display (first variable display unit) 908a for variably displaying the first special symbol as identification information is provided. In this embodiment, the first special symbol display 908a is realized by a simple and small display (for example, a 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying the numbers 0 to 9. That is, the first special symbol display 908a is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9. On the lower right side of the game board 906, a second special symbol display (second variable display unit) 908b for variably displaying the second special symbol as identification information is provided. The second special symbol display 908b is realized by a simple and small display (for example, a 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. That is, the second special symbol display 908b is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9.

The small display is formed in a square shape, for example. Further, in this embodiment, the type of the first special symbol and the type of the second special symbol are the same (for example, both numbers 0 to 9), but the types may be different. Further, the first special symbol display 908a and the second special symbol display 908b may be configured to variably display, for example, a number (or a two-digit symbol) from 00 to 99, respectively.

Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol, and the first special symbol display 908a and the second special symbol display 908b are collectively referred to as a special symbol display (variable display unit). I have something to do.

In this embodiment, the case where two special symbol indicators 908a and 908b are provided is shown, but the gaming machine may include only one special symbol indicator.

In the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first start condition or the second start condition, which is the execution condition of the variable display, is satisfied (for example, the game ball has the first start winning opening 9013 or the second starting winning opening). After passing through 9014 (including winning), the variable display start condition (for example, when the number of reserved memories is not 0, and the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not executed). It is started based on the establishment of a state (a state in which the jackpot game is not executed), and when the variable display time (variable time) elapses, the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. In addition, the passing of the game ball means that the game ball has passed through a pre-determined area such as a winning opening or a gate, and the concept includes that the game ball has entered (winning) in the winning opening. Is. Further, the derivation display of the display result means that the symbol (example of identification information) is finally stopped and displayed.

Below the effect display device 909, a winning device having a first starting winning opening 9013 is provided. The game ball that has won the first start winning opening 9013 is guided to the back surface of the game board 906 and is detected by the first starting opening switch 9013a.

Further, below the winning device having the first starting winning opening (first starting opening) 9013, a variable winning ball device 9015 having a second starting winning opening 9014 capable of winning a game ball is provided. The game ball that has won the second start winning opening (second starting opening) 9014 is guided to the back surface of the game board 906 and is detected by the second starting opening switch 9014a. The variable winning ball device 9015 is opened by the solenoid 9016. When the variable winning ball device 9015 is opened, the game ball can win the second starting winning opening 9014 (it becomes easier to win the starting winning), which is advantageous for the player. In the state where the variable winning ball device 9015 is in the open state, the game ball is more likely to win in the second starting winning opening 9014 than in the first starting winning opening 9013. Further, when the variable winning ball device 9015 is in the closed state, the game ball does not win the second starting winning opening 9014. Therefore, in the state where the variable winning ball device 9015 is closed, the game ball is more likely to win the first starting winning opening 9013 than the second starting winning opening 9014. In the state where the variable winning ball device 9015 is closed, it may be difficult to win a prize, but it may be possible to win a prize (that is, it is difficult for a game ball to win a prize).

Hereinafter, the first starting winning opening 9013 and the second starting winning opening 9014 may be collectively referred to as a starting winning opening or a starting opening.

When the variable winning ball device 9015 is controlled in the open state, the game ball heading for the variable winning ball device 9015 is extremely easy to win the second starting winning opening 9014. The first start winning opening 9013 is provided directly below the effect display device 909, but the distance between the lower end of the effect display device 909 and the first start winning opening 9013 may be further narrowed, or the first starting winning opening may be further narrowed. By arranging the nails densely around 9013 or making it difficult to guide the game ball to the first start winning opening 9013 by arranging the nails around the first starting winning opening 9013, the winning rate of the second starting winning opening 9014 It may be made higher than the winning rate of the first starting winning opening 9013.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 27, the variable winning ball device 9015 that opens and closes only the second starting winning opening 9014 is provided, but the first starting winning opening 9013 and the second starting winning opening 9013 and the second. A variable winning ball device that opens and closes each of the starting winning openings 9014 may be provided.

On the side of the first special symbol display 908a, the number of valid winning balls that have entered the first starting winning opening 9013, that is, the number of first holding storages (holding memory is also referred to as starting memory or starting winning memory) is displayed. A first special symbol hold storage display 9018a including four displays is provided. The first special symbol hold storage display 9018a increases the number of lit indicators by 1 each time there is a valid start prize. Then, each time the variable display on the first special symbol display 908a is started, the number of lit indicators is reduced by one.

On the side of the second special symbol display 908b, the second special symbol holding storage display 9018b is composed of four indicators that display the number of valid winning balls that have entered the second starting winning opening 9014, that is, the number of the second reserved storage. Is provided. The second special symbol hold storage display 9018b increases the number of lit indicators by 1 each time there is a valid start prize. Then, each time the variable display on the second special symbol display 908b is started, the number of lit indicators is reduced by one.

Further, at the lower part of the display screen of the effect display device 909, a hold storage display unit 9018c for displaying either the first hold storage number or the second hold storage number is provided. For example, the hold storage display unit 9018c displays the first hold storage number in the low base state, while displaying the second hold storage number in the high base state. The first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number may be displayed individually. Further, a total hold storage display unit may be provided to display the total number of hold storages, which is the total number of the first hold storage number and the second hold storage number. With such a configuration, it is possible to easily grasp the total number of execution conditions that do not satisfy the variable display start condition. Further, in such a configuration, in the total hold storage display unit, the first hold memory and the second hold memory are displayed side by side in the order of winning the first start winning opening 9013 and the second starting winning opening 9014. , The first hold memory or the second hold memory is displayed in a recognizable manner (for example, the first hold memory is displayed in red and the second hold memory is displayed in blue). It may be configured.

Further, in the present embodiment, the hold storage display unit 9018c performs the hold display for the hold memory that has not yet been changed, and holds the hold from the start to the end of the change display for the hold memory. The hold display for the memory is continuously displayed on the active display unit 9018d different from the hold storage display unit 9018c. That is, the active display unit 9018d displays the active display (image corresponding to the variable display) corresponding to the variable display being executed.

Hereinafter, the range surrounding the hold storage display unit 9018c, the active display unit 9018d, the hold storage display unit 9018c, and the active display unit 9018d may be collectively referred to as an “interface image”. This interface image is displayed regardless of whether it is on hold or active, but it is deleted in a specific situation (for example, during a jackpot game or during a specific effect such as super reach). It is a thing. In addition, hereinafter, the hold display and the active display may be collectively referred to as "specific display".

Specifically, the mole character is displayed as the hold display and the active display on the hold storage display unit 9018c and the active display unit 9018d. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 27, one active display and three hold displays are displayed.

In addition, "white", "blue", and "red" are provided as display modes of the specific display, and the reliability of being a big hit in the corresponding fluctuation is different. For example, the reliability of the jackpot is red> blue> white.

The display mode of the specific display can be changed by performing a predetermined change effect. As the change effect, there are a first change effect in which the hammer is swung down toward the target specific display and a second change effect in which an arrow flies toward the target specific display. The display mode of the specific display hit or the specific display hit by the arrow changes.

Further, as the display position of the specific display, the advance position that seems to be protruding from the ground (for example, the display position of the first hold display in FIG. 27) and the evacuation position that seems to be submerged in the ground (for example, FIG. 27 active displays and second and third hold display display positions) are provided. The display position of each specific display is controlled to be randomly switched. For example, the frequency of switching the display position (operation frequency) is determined for each change, and the display position is switched based on the determined operation frequency.

The effect display device 909 is used for decoration (for effect) during the variable display time of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 908a and during the variable display time of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 908b. Variable display of the production symbol as the symbol of. The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 908a and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 909 are synchronized with each other. Further, the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 908b and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 909 are synchronized with each other. Further, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 908a and when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 908b, the effect symbol reminiscent of the jackpot on the effect display device 909. The combination of is stopped and displayed.

In this embodiment, as will be described later, the game control microcomputer 90560 that controls the variation display of the special symbol transmits a variation pattern command that can specify the variation time, and the effect control microcomputer 90100 receives the command. The variation display of the effect symbol is controlled according to the variation time specified by the variation pattern command. Therefore, since the fluctuation time is specified based on the fluctuation pattern command, the fluctuation display of the special symbol and the fluctuation display of the effect symbol should be executed synchronously in principle. However, in the unlikely event that the fluctuation pattern command data is garbled, the fluctuation time recognized by the game control microcomputer 90560 and the fluctuation time recognized by the effect control microcomputer 90100 There may be a gap between them. Therefore, when an unexpected situation such as garbled command data occurs, there is a possibility that the variable display of the special symbol and the variable display of the effect symbol may not be completely synchronized.

On the left side of the decorative portion around the effect display device 909, a movable member 9078 that is attached to the rotation shaft of the motor 9086 and moves when the motor 9086 rotates is provided. In this embodiment, the movable member 9078 operates when the advance notice effect (movable object advance notice effect) is executed. It should be noted that the movable member 9078 may be operated not only in the movable object notice effect but also in the pseudo-ream effect and the super reach effect, for example.

Further, in the decorative portion around the effect display device 909, a blade-shaped movable member attached to the rotation shaft of the motor 9087 and moving when the motor 9087 rotates (hereinafter, referred to as an effect blade accessory). 9079a and 9079b are provided. The effect feather accessory 9079a and 9079b operate, for example, when the advance notice effect (effect feather accessory advance notice effect) is executed. It should be noted that the effect feather accessory 9079a and 9079b may be operated not only in the effect feather accessory advance notice effect but also in the pseudo-ream effect and the super reach effect.

Further, as shown in FIG. 27, a special variable winning ball device 9020 is provided below the variable winning ball device 9015. The special variable winning ball device 9020 is provided with an opening / closing plate, and when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 908a and the specific display result (big hit symbol) on the second special symbol display 908b. In the specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) that occurs when is derived and displayed, the opening / closing plate is controlled to the open state by the solenoid 9021, so that the large winning opening, which is the winning area, is opened. The game ball that has won the big prize opening is detected by the count switch 9023.

The game area 906 is also provided with winning openings (ordinary winning openings) 9029, 9030, 9033, 9039 for paying out a predetermined number of prize game balls determined in advance based on the winning of the game balls. The game balls that have won the winning openings 9029, 9030, 9033, 9039 are detected by the winning opening switches 9029a, 9030a, 9033a, 9039a.

An ordinary symbol display 9010 is provided on the right side of the game board 906. The ordinary symbol display 9010 variably displays a plurality of types of identification information (for example, "◯" and "x") called ordinary symbols.

When the game ball passes through the gate 9032 and is detected by the gate switch 9032a, the variable display of the display of the normal symbol display 9010 is started. In this embodiment, the variable display is performed by alternately lighting the upper and lower lamps (the symbol becomes visible when lit). For example, if the lower lamp lights at the end of the variable display, it is a hit. .. Then, when the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 9010 is a predetermined symbol (hit symbol), the variable winning ball device 9015 is opened a predetermined number of times and for a predetermined time. That is, the state of the variable winning ball device 9015 is a state in which the player is advantageous from a disadvantageous state to an advantageous state when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol (a state in which the game ball can be won in the second starting winning opening 9014). Changes to. In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 9010, a normal symbol hold storage display 9041 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 9032 is provided. Every time the game ball passes through the gate 9032, that is, every time the game ball is detected by the gate switch 9032a, the normal symbol hold storage display 9041 increases the number of LEDs to be lit by one. Then, every time the variable display of the normal symbol display 9010 is started, the number of lit LEDs is reduced by one. Further, a probability variation state in which the probability of being determined to be a big hit is higher than that in the normal state (a state in which the probability of being determined to be a big hit as a result of the fluctuation display of a special symbol is increased as compared with the normal state. In the high probability state.), The probability that the stopped symbol on the normal symbol display 9010 becomes a hit symbol is increased, and the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 9015 are increased.

Decorative LEDs 9025 that blink during the game are provided around the left and right sides of the game area 907 of the game board 906, and an out port 9026 that captures a hit ball that has not won a prize is provided at the lower part. Further, two speakers 9027 for producing sound effects and sounds as predetermined sound outputs are provided on the upper left and right outside the game area 907. A frame LED 9028 provided on the front frame is provided on the outer periphery of the game area 907.

The member constituting the ball striking plate 903 is provided with an operation button 90120 as an operation means that can be operated by the player. The operation button 90120 is provided with a push button switch that allows the player to perform a pressing operation. The operation button 90120 is provided not only with a push button switch capable of being pressed by the player, but also with a dial capable of being rotated by the player. The player can make a predetermined selection (for example, selection of an effect) by rotating the dial.

The gaming machine is a hitting ball launching device (not shown) that drives a driving motor in response to the player operating the hitting ball operation handle 905 and launches the game ball into the gaming area 907 by using the rotational force of the driving motor. ) Is provided. The game ball launched from the ball striking device enters the game area 7 through a ball striking rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 907, and then descends from the game area 7. When the game ball enters the first start winning opening 9013 and is detected by the first start opening switch 9013a, if the variable display of the first special symbol can be started (for example, the variable display of the special symbol ends and the first 1), the first special symbol display 908a starts the variable display (variation) of the first special symbol, and the effect display device 909 starts the variable display of the effect symbol. That is, the variable display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to the winning of the first starting winning opening 9013. Unless the variable display of the first special symbol can be started, the first reserved storage number is incremented by 1 on condition that the first reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value.

When the game ball enters the second start winning opening 9014 and is detected by the second start opening switch 9014a, if the variable display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the variable display of the special symbol ends and the second special symbol is displayed. 2), the second special symbol display 908b starts the variable display (variation) of the second special symbol, and the effect display device 909 starts the variable display of the effect symbol. That is, the variable display of the second special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to the winning of the second starting winning opening 9014. Unless the variable display of the second special symbol can be started, the second reserved storage number is incremented by 1 on condition that the second reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value.

In this embodiment, in the case of a probabilistic jackpot, the game shifts to the so-called probabilistic state after the jackpot game ends, the game state shifts to the high probability state, and the game ball becomes easier to start and win (that is, a special symbol). It shifts to a high base state which is a game state controlled so as to easily satisfy the execution condition of the variable display on the displays 908a and 908b and the effect display device 909). In the high base state, for example, the frequency with which the variable winning ball device 9015 is opened is increased, or the time during which the variable winning ball device 9015 is opened is extended as compared with the case where the high base state is not achieved. It becomes easier to win a start prize.

It should be noted that, instead of extending the time during which the variable winning ball device 9015 is in the open state (also referred to as an open extension state), it shifts to a normal symbol probability variation state in which the probability that the stopped symbol on the normal symbol display 9010 becomes a hit symbol is increased. This may result in a transition to a high base state. When the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 9010 becomes a predetermined symbol (hit symbol), the variable winning ball device 9015 is opened a predetermined number of times and for a predetermined time. In this case, by controlling the transition to the normal symbol probability change state, the probability that the stopped symbol on the normal symbol display 9010 becomes a hit symbol is increased, and the frequency with which the variable winning ball device 9015 is opened increases. Therefore, if the state shifts to the normal symbol probability variation state, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 9015 are increased, and the starting winning is easy (high base state). That is, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 9015 are increased when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is the hit symbol or the stop symbol of the special symbol is the probabilistic symbol, which is disadvantageous to the player. It changes to an advantageous state (a state where it is easy to win a start). It should be noted that increasing the number of times of opening is a concept including changing from a closed state to an open state.

Further, the normal symbol display 9010 may shift to the high base state by shifting to the normal symbol time reduction state in which the fluctuation time (variable display period) of the normal symbol is shortened. In the normal symbol time reduction state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened, so that the frequency of starting the fluctuation of the normal symbol increases, and as a result, the frequency of hitting the normal symbol increases. Therefore, as the frequency of hitting the normal symbol increases, the frequency of opening the variable winning ball device 9015 increases, and the starting prize is easily won (high base state).

Further, in this embodiment, when the state is shifted to the high base state, it is also shifted to the time saving state (special symbol time saving state) in which the fluctuation time (variable display period) of the special symbol or the effect symbol is shortened. By shifting to the time saving state in this way, the fluctuation time of the special symbol or the effect symbol is shortened, so that the fluctuation of the special symbol or the effect symbol is started more frequently (in other words, the digestion of the reserved memory is digested. It will be faster.) It is possible to reduce the situation where an invalid start prize is generated. Therefore, a valid start winning prize is likely to occur, and as a result, the possibility that a big hit game is performed increases.

Furthermore, by shifting to all the states shown above (open extension state, normal symbol probability change state, normal symbol time reduction state and special symbol time reduction state), it becomes easier to win a start prize (shift to a high base state). You may. In addition, by shifting to any one or more of the above-mentioned states (open extension state, normal symbol probability change state, normal symbol time reduction state, and special symbol time reduction state), it becomes easier to win a start prize (high base). It may be changed to the state). In addition, by shifting to only one of the above-mentioned states (open extension state, normal symbol probability change state, normal symbol time reduction state, and special symbol time reduction state), it becomes easier to win a start prize (high). It may move to the base state).

FIG. 28 is a block diagram showing an example of a circuit configuration on the main board (game control board) 9031. Note that FIG. 28 also shows a payout control board 9037, an effect control board 9080, and the like. A game control microcomputer (corresponding to a game control means) 90560 that controls a pachinko game machine 901 according to a program is mounted on the main board 9031. The game control microcomputer 90560 includes a ROM 9054 that stores a program for game control (game progress control), a RAM 9055 as a storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 9056 that performs control operations according to the program, and an I / O port unit 9057. including. In this embodiment, the ROM 9054 and the RAM 9055 are built into the game control microcomputer 90560. That is, the game control microcomputer 90560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer may have at least a CPU 9056 and a RAM 9055 built-in, and the ROM 9054 may be externally attached or built-in. Further, the I / O port portion 9057 may be externally attached. The game control microcomputer 90560 also includes a random number circuit 9053 that generates a hardware random number (a random number generated by the hardware circuit).

Further, the RAM 9055 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means in which a part or all of the RAM 9055 is backed up by a backup power supply created on the power supply board 90910. That is, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 9055 are stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot supply power). In particular, at least the data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (special symbol process flag, etc.) and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are stored in the backup RAM. The data according to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for recovering the control state before the occurrence of the power failure or the like based on the data when the data is restored after the power failure or the like occurs. Further, the data corresponding to the control state and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as the data indicating the progress state of the game. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the entire RAM 9055 is backed up by the power supply.

Since the CPU 9056 of the game control microcomputer 90560 executes control according to the program stored in the ROM 9054, the game control microcomputer 90560 (or CPU 9056) executes (or performs processing) below. Specifically, the CPU 9056 executes control according to a program. This also applies to microcomputers mounted on substrates other than the main substrate 9031.

The random number circuit 9053 is a hardware circuit used to generate a random number for determination for determining whether or not to make a big hit based on the display result of the variable display of the special symbol. The random number circuit 9053 updates the numerical data according to the set update rule within the numerical range in which the initial value (for example, 0) and the upper limit value (for example, 65535) are set, and starts at random timing. Based on the fact that the winning time is the time when the numerical data is read (extracted), it has a random number generation function in which the read numerical data becomes a random number value.

The random number circuit 9053 has a numerical data update range selection setting function (initial value selection setting function and upper limit value selection setting function), a numerical data update rule selection setting function, and a numerical data update rule selection function. It has various functions such as a switching function. With such a function, the randomness of the generated random number can be improved.

Further, the game control microcomputer 90560 has a function of setting an initial value of numerical data to be updated by the random number circuit 9053. For example, a predetermined calculation is performed using the ID number of the game control microcomputer 90560 stored in a predetermined storage area such as ROM 9054 (ID number assigned by a different numerical value for each product of the game control microcomputer 90560). The numerical data obtained by the row is set as the initial value of the numerical data to be updated by the random number circuit 9053. By performing such processing, the randomness of the random number generated by the random number circuit 9053 can be further improved.

Further, an input driver circuit 9058 that gives detection signals from the gate switch 9032a, the start port switch 9013a, the count switch 9023, and the winning port switches 9029a, 9030a, 9033a, 9039a to the game control microcomputer 90560 is also mounted on the main board 9031. There is. The main board also includes an output circuit 9059 that drives a solenoid 9016 that opens and closes the variable winning ball device 9015 and a solenoid 9021 that opens and closes the special variable winning ball device 9020 that forms a large winning opening according to a command from the game control microcomputer 90560. It is mounted on the 9031.

Further, the game control microcomputer 90560 includes a first special symbol display 908a for variably displaying a special symbol, a second special symbol display 908b, a normal symbol display 9010 for variably displaying a normal symbol, and a first special symbol hold storage. The display control of the display 9018a, the second special symbol holding storage display 9018b, and the normal symbol holding storage display 9041 is performed.

An information output circuit (not shown) that outputs an information output signal such as jackpot information indicating the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state to an external device such as a hall computer is also mounted on the main board 9031.

In this embodiment, the effect control means (consisting of the effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 9080 instructs the effect content from the game control microcomputer 90560 via the relay board 9077. It receives the effect control command and controls the display of the effect display device 909 that variably displays the effect symbol.

Further, the effect control means mounted on the effect control board 9080 controls the display of the decorative LED 9025 provided on the game board and the frame LED 9028 provided on the frame side via the lamp driver board 9035. , The sound output from the speaker 9027 is controlled via the audio output board 9070.

FIG. 29 is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration example of the relay board 9077, the effect control board 9080, the lamp driver board 9035, and the audio output board 9070. In the example shown in FIG. 29, the lamp driver board 9035 and the audio output board 9070 are not equipped with a microcomputer, but a microcomputer may be mounted. Further, the lamp driver board 9035 and the audio output board 9070 may not be provided, and only the effect control board 9080 may be provided for the effect control.

The effect control board 9080 is equipped with an effect control CPU 90101 and an effect control microcomputer 90100 including a RAM for storing information related to the effect such as an effect symbol process flag. The RAM may be externally attached. In this embodiment, the RAM in the effect control microcomputer 90100 is not backed up. In the effect control board 9080, the effect control CPU 90101 operates according to a program stored in the built-in or external ROM (not shown), and the capture signal from the main board 9031 input via the relay board 9077 ( The effect control command is received via the input driver 90102 and the input port 90103 in response to the effect control INT signal). Further, the effect control CPU 90101 causes the VDP (video display processor) 90109 to control the display of the effect display device 909 based on the effect control command.

In this embodiment, the VDP 90109 that controls the display of the effect display device 909 in cooperation with the effect control microcomputer 90100 is mounted on the effect control board 9080. The VDP 90109 has an address space independent of the effect control microcomputer 90100, and VRAM is mapped there. VRAM is a buffer memory for expanding image data. Then, the VDP 90109 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the effect display device 909 via the frame memory.

The effect control CPU 90101 outputs a command for reading necessary data from the CGROM (not shown) to the VDP 90109 according to the received effect control command. The CGROM stores in advance character image data and moving image data displayed on the effect display device 909, specifically, people, characters, figures, symbols, etc. (including effect patterns), and background image data. ROM for. The VDP90109 reads image data from the CGROM in response to a command from the effect control CPU 90101. Then, the VDP 90109 executes display control based on the read image data.

The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to the input driver 90102 on the effect control board 9080. The input driver 90102 passes the signal input from the relay board 9077 only in the direction toward the inside of the effect control board 9080 (the signal is not passed in the direction from the inside of the effect control board 9080 to the relay board 9077). It is also a unidirectional circuit as a regulatory means.

As a signal direction regulating means, the relay board 9077 allows the signal input from the main board 9031 to pass only in the direction toward the effect control board 9080 (the signal does not pass in the direction from the effect control board 9080 to the relay board 9077). The unidirectional circuit 9074 of the above is mounted. As a unidirectional circuit, for example, a diode or a transistor is used. FIG. 29 illustrates a diode. Further, a unidirectional circuit is provided for each signal. Further, since the effect control command and the effect control INT signal are output from the main board 9031 via the output port 90571 which is a unidirectional circuit, the signal from the relay board 9077 to the inside of the main board 9031 is regulated. That is, the signal from the relay board 9077 does not enter the inside of the main board 9031 (on the side of the game control microcomputer 90560). The output port 90571 is a part of the I / O port portion 9057 shown in FIG. 28. Further, a signal driver circuit which is a unidirectional circuit may be further provided on the outside of the output port 90571 (on the relay board 9077 side).

Further, the effect control CPU 90101 drives the motor 9086 to operate the movable member 9078 via the output port 90106. Further, the effect control CPU 90101 drives a motor 9087 for operating the effect blade accessories 9079a and 9079b via the output port 90106.

Further, the effect control CPU 90101 inputs a signal from the operation button 90120 in response to a pressing operation of the operation button 90120 by the player via the input port 90107.

Further, the effect control CPU 90101 outputs a signal for driving the LED or the lamp to the lamp driver board 9035 via the output port 90105. Further, the effect control CPU 90101 outputs the sound number data to the audio output board 9070 via the output port 90104.

In the lamp driver board 9035, the signal for driving the LED or the lamp is input to the LED / lamp driver 90352 via the input driver 90351. The LED / lamp driver 90352 supplies a current to a light emitter provided on the frame side such as the frame LED 9028 based on the signal for driving the LED or the lamp. Further, a current is supplied to a decorative LED 9025 or the like provided on the game board side.

In the voice output board 9070, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC 90703 via the input driver 90702. The voice synthesis IC 90703 generates voices and sound effects corresponding to the phone number data and outputs them to the amplifier circuit 90705. The amplifier circuit 90705 outputs a voice signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the voice synthesis IC 90703 to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume 90706 to the speaker 9027. The voice data ROM 90704 stores control data according to the sound number data. The control data according to the telephone number data is a collection of data showing the output mode of the sound effect or the voice in a predetermined period (for example, the fluctuation period of the effect symbol) in chronological order.

Next, the operation of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the game control microcomputer 90560 on the main board 9031. When the power is turned on to the game machine and the power supply is started, the input level of the reset terminal into which the reset signal is input becomes high level, and the game control microcomputer 90560 (specifically, CPU 9056) After executing the security check process, which is a process for confirming whether the contents of the program are valid, the main process after step S901 is started. In the main process, the CPU 9056 first makes necessary initial settings.

In the initial setting process, the CPU 9056 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S901). Next, the interrupt mode is set to the interrupt mode 2 (step S902), and the stack pointer designated address is set in the stack pointer (step S903). Then, after initializing the built-in device (initializing the built-in device (built-in peripheral circuit) CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port), etc.) (step S904), the RAM can be accessed. (Step S905). In the interrupt mode 2, the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) built in the CPU 9056 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output by the built-in device is This mode indicates the interrupt address.

Next, the CPU 9056 confirms the state of the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (for example, mounted on the power supply board) input via the input port (step S906). When the ON is detected in the confirmation, the CPU 9056 executes a normal initialization process (steps S901 to S9015).

If the clear switch is not on, check whether data protection processing in the backup RAM area (for example, processing when power supply is stopped such as addition of parity data) was performed when power supply to the gaming machine was stopped. (Step S907). After confirming that such protection processing has not been performed, the CPU 9056 executes the initialization processing. Whether or not there is backup data in the backup RAM area is confirmed by, for example, the state of the backup flag set in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop processing.

After confirming that the power supply stop processing has been performed, the CPU 9056 checks the data in the backup RAM area (step S908). In this embodiment, a parity check is performed as a data check. Therefore, in step S908, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and saved by the same processing in the power supply stop processing. If the data is restored after the power supply is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) becomes normal (match). If the check result is not normal, it means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, the initialization process executed when the power is turned on, which is not the time when the power supply is stopped, is executed.

If the check result is normal, the CPU 9056 performs game state restoration processing (steps S9041 to S9043) for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electric component control means such as the effect control means to the state when the power supply is stopped. Processing) is performed. Specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 9054 is set in the pointer (step S9041), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (area in the RAM 9055) (step S9042). ). The work area is backed up by a backup power supply. In the backup setting table, initialization data for an area that may be initialized in the work area is set. By the processing of steps S9041 and S9042, the saved contents remain as they are for the portion of the work area that should not be initialized. The part that should not be initialized is, for example, the data indicating the game state before the power supply is stopped (special symbol process flag, probability change flag, time saving flag, etc.), and the area where the output state of the output port is saved (output port buffer). ), The part where the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls is set.

Further, the CPU 9056 transmits a power failure recovery designation command as an initialization command at the time of power supply recovery (step S9043). Further, the CPU 9056 transmits a display result designation command specifying a display result (normal jackpot, probability variation jackpot, sudden probability variation jackpot, small hit, or loss) stored in the backup RAM to the effect control board 9080 (step). S9044). Then, the process proceeds to step S9014. In step S9044, the CPU 9056 also transmits a first symbol variation designation command and a second symbol variation designation command (see FIG. 39), for example, when the value of the special symbol pointer described later is also stored in the backup RAM. You may try to do it. In this case, the effect control microcomputer 90100 may restart the variation display of the fourth symbol based on the reception of the first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command.

In this embodiment, the value of the variable time timer, which will be described later, is also stored in the backup RAM area. Therefore, when the power failure is restored, after the display result specification command is transmitted in step S9044, the measurement of the value of the saved fluctuation time timer is restarted, the fluctuation display of the special symbol is restarted, and the data is saved. When the value of the variable time timer that has been set timed out, the symbol confirmation specification command described later is transmitted. Further, in this embodiment, the value of the special symbol process flag described later is also stored in the backup RAM area. Therefore, when the power failure is restored, the special symbol process processing is restarted from the process corresponding to the value of the saved special symbol process flag.

The CPU 9056 may first check whether or not the value of the variable time timer stored in the backup RAM area is 0, instead of always transmitting the display result specification command when the power failure is restored. .. Then, if the value of the fluctuation time timer is not 0, it is determined that there is a power failure during the fluctuation, and a display result specification command is transmitted. If the fluctuation time timer is 0, the fluctuation is occurring during the power failure. It may be determined that the state is not present and the display result specification command may not be sent.

Further, the CPU 9056 may first check whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag stored in the backup RAM area is 3. Then, if the value of the special symbol process flag is 3, it is determined that a power failure occurs during the fluctuation, and a display result specification command is transmitted. If the special symbol process flag is not 3, the fluctuation occurs during a power failure. It may be determined that it was not inside, and the display result specification command may not be sent.

In this embodiment, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the backup RAM area is saved by using both the backup flag and the check data, but only one of them may be used. That is, either the backup flag or the check data may be used as an opportunity to execute the game state recovery process.

In the initialization process, the CPU 9056 first performs a RAM clear process (step S9010). By the RAM clear processing, predetermined data (for example, data of the count value of the counter for generating a random number for determining a normal symbol hit) is initialized to 0, but is an arbitrary value or a predetermined value. It may be initialized to. Further, the entire area of the RAM 9055 may not be initialized, and predetermined data (for example, data of the count value of the counter for generating a random number for determining a normal symbol hit) may be left as it is. Further, the start address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 9054 is set in the pointer (step S9011), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (step S9012).

By the processing of steps S9011 and S9012, for example, a random number counter for determining a normal symbol hit, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, a special symbol process flag, and other flags for selectively processing according to the control state are initially set. The value is set.

Further, the CPU 9056 is an initialization designation command for initializing a sub-board (a board on which a microcomputer other than the main board 9031 is mounted) (a command indicating that the game control microcomputer 90560 has executed the initialization process). Is also transmitted to the sub-board (step S9013). For example, when the effect control microcomputer 90100 receives the initialization designation command, the effect display device 909 performs a screen display for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized, that is, an initialization notification.

Further, the CPU 9056 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 9053 (step S9014). The CPU 9056 sets the random number circuit 9053 to update the value of the random number R'by executing the process according to, for example, the random number circuit setting program.

Then, in step S9015, the CPU 9056 sets the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 90560 so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied at predetermined time (for example, 4 ms). That is, as an initial value, a value corresponding to, for example, 4 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register). In this embodiment, it is assumed that the timer is interrupted periodically every 4 ms.

When the execution of the initialization process (steps S901 to S9015) is completed, the CPU 9056 repeatedly executes the display random number update process (step S9017) and the initial value random number update process (step S9018) in the main process. When executing the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process, the interrupt disabled state is set (step S9016), and when the execution of the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process is completed, the interrupt enabled state is set. Set (step S9019). In this embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining the stop symbol of the special symbol when it is not a big hit, or a random number for determining whether or not to reach when it is not a big hit, and it is displayed. The random number update process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating a random number for display. Further, the initial value random number update process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. In this embodiment, the initial value random number is the initial value of the count value of the counter for generating a random number for determining whether or not to hit the normal symbol (normal symbol hit determination random number generation counter). It is a random number to determine. Game control processing that controls the progress of the game, which will be described later (the game control microcomputer 90560 controls the game devices such as the effect display device, the variable winning ball device, and the ball payout device provided in the game machine. In the process of performing, or the process of transmitting a command signal to be controlled by another microcomputer, also called the game device control process), the count value of the normal symbol hit judgment random number is one lap (normal symbol hit judgment random number taking). The initial value is set in the counter when the step is taken by the number of numerical values between the minimum value and the maximum value of the possible value.

In this embodiment, the reach effect is executed by using the effect symbol that is variably displayed on the effect display device 909. In addition, when the display result of the special symbol is a jackpot symbol, the reach effect is always executed (however, in the case of a sudden probability variation jackpot, the sudden probability variation jackpot symbol (for example, "135") is not a reach. May be displayed as stopped). When the display result of the special symbol is not a big hit symbol, the game control microcomputer 90560 determines whether or not to execute the reach effect by performing a lottery to determine the fluctuation pattern type and the fluctuation pattern using random numbers. To do. However, it is the effect control microcomputer 90100 that actually executes the control of the reach effect.

When the timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 9056 executes the timer interrupt process of steps S9020 to S9034 shown in FIG. 31. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power failure detection process for detecting whether or not a power failure signal has been output (whether or not it has been turned on) is executed (step S9020). The power off signal is output when, for example, the power supply monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply board detects a drop in the voltage of the power supply supplied to the gaming machine. Then, in the power supply cutoff detection process, when the CPU 9056 detects that the power supply cutoff signal has been output, the CPU 9056 executes a power supply stop time process for storing necessary data in the backup RAM area. Next, the detection signals of the gate switch 9032a, the first start port switch 9013a, the second start port switch 9014a, and the count switch 9023 are input via the input driver circuit 9058, and their states are determined (switch processing: step S9021). ).

Next, the CPU 9056 includes a first special symbol display 908a, a second special symbol display 908b, a normal symbol display 9010, a first special symbol hold storage display 9018a, a second special symbol hold storage display 9018b, and a normal symbol. A display control process for controlling the display of the hold storage display 9041 is executed (step S9022). For the first special symbol display 908a, the second special symbol display 908b, and the normal symbol display 9010, a drive signal is output to each display according to the contents of the output buffer set in steps S9032 and S9033. Take control.

In addition, a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating each determination random number such as a normal symbol hit determination random number used for game control is performed (determination random number update process: step S9023). The CPU 9056 further performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number (initial value random number update process, display random number update process: steps S9024, S9025).

Further, the CPU 9056 performs a special symbol process process (step S9026). In the special symbol process process, the corresponding process is executed according to the special symbol process flag for controlling the first special symbol display 908a, the second special symbol display 908b, and the grand prize opening in a predetermined order. The CPU 9056 updates the value of the special symbol process flag according to the game state.

Next, the normal symbol process process is performed (step S9027). In the normal symbol process process, the CPU 9056 executes the corresponding process according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 9010 in a predetermined order. The CPU 9056 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag according to the game state. In the normal symbol process process of step S9027, the variation display of the normal symbol is executed based on the detection of the passage of the game ball to the gate 9032 to derive and display the variation display result, or the variation display result of the normal symbol. When is hit, the variable winning ball device 9015 is controlled to be in an open state or a closed state.

Further, the CPU 9056 performs a process of sending an effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 90100 (effect control command control process: step S9028).

Further, the CPU 9056 performs an information output process for outputting data such as jackpot information, start information, and probability fluctuation information supplied to the hall management computer (step S9029).

Further, the CPU 9056 executes a prize ball process for setting the number of prize balls based on the detection signals of the first start port switch 9013a, the second start port switch 9014a, and the count switch 9023 (step S9030). Specifically, the payout control micro mounted on the payout control board 9037 responds to the winning detection based on any of the first start port switch 9013a, the second start port switch 9014a, and the count switch 9023 being turned on. A payout control command (prize ball number signal) indicating the number of prize balls is output to the computer. The payout control microcomputer drives the ball payout device 9097 in response to a payout control command indicating the number of prize balls.

In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided, but the CPU 9056 relates to turning on / off the solenoid in the RAM area corresponding to the output state of the output port. The contents are output to the output port (step S9031: output processing).

Further, the CPU 9056 performs a special symbol display control process for setting the special symbol display control data for displaying the effect of the special symbol according to the value of the special symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data ( Step S9032).

Further, the CPU 9056 performs a normal symbol display control process for setting the normal symbol display control data for performing the effect display of the normal symbol according to the value of the normal symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting the normal symbol display control data (the normal symbol display control process). Step S9033). For example, when the start flag related to the fluctuation of the normal symbol is set, the CPU 9056 switches the display state (“○” and “×”) of the fluctuation speed of the normal symbol every 0.2 seconds until the end flag is set. At such a speed, the value of the display control data set in the output buffer (for example, 1 indicating "○" and 0 indicating "x") is switched every 0.2 seconds. Further, the CPU 9056 executes the effect display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 9010 by outputting the drive signal in step S9022 according to the display control data set in the output buffer.

After that, the interrupt permission state is set (step S9034), and the process ends.

With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 4 ms. The game control process corresponds to the process of steps S9021 to S9033 (excluding step S9029) in the timer interrupt process. Further, in this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the timer interrupt process, but in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set, and the game control process is the main process. It may be executed in.

When the misaligned symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 908a or the second special symbol display 908b and the effect display device 909, the variable display state of the effect symbol is changed after the variable display of the effect symbol is started. A combination of predetermined effect symbols that do not reach the reach state may be stopped and displayed without reaching the reach state. Such a variable display mode of the effect symbol is referred to as a "non-reach" (also referred to as "normally out of place") variable display mode when the variable display result is a missed symbol.

When the misaligned symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 908a or the second special symbol display 908b and the effect display device 909, the variable display state of the effect symbol is changed after the variable display of the effect symbol is started. The reach effect is executed after the reach state is reached, and a combination of predetermined effect symbols that do not finally become a jackpot symbol may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of the effect symbol is referred to as a variable display mode of "reach" (also referred to as "reach loss") when the variable display result is "out of reach".

In this embodiment, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 908a or the second special symbol display 908b, the reach effect is executed after the variable display state of the effect symbol becomes the reach state. Finally, the effect symbols are aligned and stopped and displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" symbol display areas 909L, 909C, and 909R of the effect display device 9 (however, in the case of a sudden probability change jackpot). In some cases, the probability change jackpot symbol (for example, "135") is stopped and displayed without becoming a reach.

When the small hit "5" is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 908a or the second special symbol display 908b, the variable display mode of the effect symbol is "sudden probability change big hit" in the effect display device 909. After the variable display of the effect symbol is performed as in the case of, a predetermined small hit symbol (the same symbol as the sudden probability change big hit symbol, for example, "135") may be stopped and displayed. The display effect in the effect display device 9 corresponding to the stop display of the small hit symbol "5" on the first special symbol display 908a or the second special symbol display 908b is referred to as a variable display mode of "small hit". ..

Here, the small hit is a hit that is allowed up to a number of times that the number of times the big winning opening is opened is smaller than that of the big hit (in this embodiment, the opening for 0.1 second is twice). When the small hit game is completed, the game state does not change. That is, there is no transition from the probabilistic state to the normal state or transition from the normal state to the probabilistic state. Further, the sudden probability change big hit is allowed up to the number of times that the big winning opening is opened a small number of times in the big hit game state (in this embodiment, opening for 0.1 second is twice), but the opening time of the big winning opening is extremely long. A short jackpot and a jackpot that shifts the gaming state after the jackpot game to a probabilistic state (that is, by doing so, it appears to the player as if it suddenly became a probabilistic state. Is). That is, in this embodiment, the sudden change big hit and the small hit have the same opening pattern of the big winning opening. By controlling in this way, if the big winning opening is opened twice for 0.1 seconds, it is not possible to recognize whether it is a sudden change big hit or a small hit, so it is a high probability state for the player. (Probability change state) can be expected, and the interest of the game can be improved.

When the gaming machine is configured so that all the jackpot types are probabilistic jackpots, it is not necessary to provide small hits. In addition, when a small hit is provided when all the big hit types are probabilistic big hits, the sudden probabilistic big hit is only shifted to the probabilistic state (high probability state) and is not accompanied by the time saving state (high base state). It is preferable to provide.

FIG. 32 is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern of the effect symbol prepared in advance. As shown in FIG. 32, in this embodiment, non-reach PA1 ′ -1 to 1 as a variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “off” and the variable display mode of the effect symbol is “non-reach”. Non-reach PA1'-4 variation patterns are available. Further, as fluctuation patterns corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off" and the variable display mode of the effect symbol is "reach", normal PA2'-1 to normal PA2'-2 and normal PB2'-1 to normal Fluctuation patterns of PB2'-2, super PA3'-1 to super PA3'-2, and super PB3'-1 to super PB3'-2 are prepared. As shown in FIG. 32, the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach PA1'-4, which is used when the reach is not reached and is accompanied by the effect of the pseudo-ream, is re-variated once. Among the fluctuation patterns used in the case of reaching and accompanied by the effect of pseudo-ream, when the normal PB2'-1 is used, the re-variation is performed once. Further, among the fluctuation patterns used in the case of reaching and accompanied by the effect of the pseudo-ream, when the normal PB2'-2 is used, the re-variation is performed twice. Further, among the fluctuation patterns used in the case of reaching and accompanied by the effect of the pseudo-ream, when the super PA3'-1 to the super PA3'-2 are used, the re-variation is performed three times. Note that the re-variation is to temporarily stop the effect symbol that is temporarily out of alignment from the start of the variable display of the effect symbol until the display result is derived and displayed, and then re-execute the variable display of the effect symbol. ..

Further, as shown in FIG. 32, in this embodiment, normal PA2'-3 to normal PA2'-4, as variable patterns corresponding to the case where the variable display result of the special symbol becomes a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol, Normal PB2'-3 to Normal PB2'-4, Super PA3'-3 to Super PA3'-4, Super PB3'-3 to Super PB3'-4, Special PG1'-1 to Special PG1'-3, Special PG2 Fluctuation patterns of ′ -1 to special PG2 ′ -2 are prepared. In FIG. 32, the fluctuation patterns of the special PG1'-1 to special PG1'-3 and the special PG2'-1 to special PG2'-2 are fluctuation patterns used when a sudden probability change big hit or small hit occurs. is there. Further, as shown in FIG. 32, among the fluctuation patterns used when the sudden change is not a big hit or a small hit and accompanied by the effect of a pseudo-ream, when the normal PB2'-3 is used, the re-variation is performed once. Further, among the fluctuation patterns used in the case of reaching and accompanied by the effect of the pseudo-ream, when the normal PB2'-4 is used, the re-variation is performed twice. Further, among the fluctuation patterns used in the case of reaching and accompanied by the effect of the pseudo-ream, when Super PA3'-3 to Super PA3'-4 are used, the re-variation is performed three times. Further, the fluctuation pattern of the special PG1'-3, which is used in the case of a sudden probability change big hit or a small hit and is accompanied by a pseudo-ream effect, is re-variated once.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 32, when the fluctuation time is fixedly determined according to the type of reach (for example, in the case of Super Reach A with pseudo-ream, the fluctuation time is 32). It is fixed at .75 seconds, and in the case of Super Reach A without pseudo-ream, the fluctuation time is fixed at 22.75 seconds), but even in the case of the same type of Super Reach, for example. , The fluctuation time may be different depending on the total number of reserved storages. For example, even when the same type of super reach is involved, the fluctuation time may be shortened as the total number of reserved storages increases. Further, for example, even in the case of the same type of super reach, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, the variable time may be different according to the first reserved storage number. 2 When the variable display of the special symbol is performed, the variable time may be made different according to the second reserved storage number. In this case, separate determination tables are prepared for each value of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number (for example, the variation pattern type determination table for the reserved storage numbers 0 to 2 and the reserved storage numbers 3 and 4). The determination table may be selected according to the value of the first reserved storage number or the second reserved storage number to make the fluctuation time different.

FIG. 33 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. Each random number is used as follows.
(1) Random 1'(MR1'): Determine the type of jackpot (normal jackpot, probability variation jackpot, sudden probability variation jackpot, which will be described later) (for determining the jackpot type).
(2) Random 2'(MR2'): Determine the type (type) of the fluctuation pattern (for determining the fluctuation pattern type)
(3) Random 3'(MR3'): Determine the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) (for determining the fluctuation pattern)
(4) Random 4'(MR4'): Determines whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol (for normal symbol hit determination).
(5) Random 5'(MR5'): Determine the initial value of random 4'(for determining the initial value of random 4')

In this embodiment, the variation pattern is determined by first determining the variation pattern type using the variation pattern type determination random number (random 2') and then using the variation pattern determination random number (random 3'). Determine one of the fluctuation patterns included in the fluctuation pattern type. As such, in this embodiment, the variation pattern is determined by a two-step lottery process.

The fluctuation pattern type is a group of a plurality of fluctuation patterns according to the characteristics of the fluctuation mode. For example, a plurality of fluctuation patterns are grouped by reach type, and include a fluctuation pattern type including a fluctuation pattern with normal reach, a fluctuation pattern type including a fluctuation pattern with super reach A, and a fluctuation pattern with super reach B. It may be divided into fluctuation pattern types. Further, for example, a plurality of fluctuation patterns are grouped by the number of re-variations of the pseudo-ream, and a fluctuation pattern type including a fluctuation pattern without a pseudo-ream, a fluctuation pattern type including a fluctuation pattern of one re-variation, and a re-variation. It may be divided into a fluctuation pattern type including a fluctuation pattern of two fluctuations and a fluctuation pattern type including a fluctuation pattern of three re-variations. Further, for example, a plurality of fluctuation patterns may be grouped according to the presence or absence of an effect such as a pseudo-ream or a sliding effect.

In this embodiment, as will be described later, in the case of a normal jackpot and a probabilistic jackpot, a normal CA3'-1 which is a fluctuation pattern type including a fluctuation pattern accompanied only by a normal reach, and a normal reach and a pseudo-ream are included. It is classified into a normal CA3'-2, which is a fluctuation pattern type including a fluctuation pattern, and a super CA3'-3, which is a fluctuation pattern type with super reach. Further, in the case of a sudden probability change jackpot, there are two types: special CA4'-1, which is a fluctuation pattern type including a non-reach fluctuation pattern, and special CA4'-2, which is a fluctuation pattern type including a fluctuation pattern with reach. It is divided. Further, in the case of a small hit, it is classified into a special CA4'-1 which is a fluctuation pattern type including a non-reach fluctuation pattern. In the case of deviation, non-reach CA2'-1 which is a fluctuation pattern type including a fluctuation pattern without reach, pseudo-ream, or slip effect, and a fluctuation pattern without reach but with pseudo-ream or slip effect. Non-reach CA2'-2, which is a variation pattern type including, and non-reach CA2'-3, which is a variation pattern type including a shortened variation variation pattern without reach, pseudo-ream, or slip effect, and variation with only normal reach. Normal CA2'-4, which is a fluctuation pattern type including patterns, normal CA2'-5, which is a fluctuation pattern type including fluctuation patterns with normal reach and two pseudo-revariations, and one pseudo of normal reach and re-variation. It is classified into a normal CA2'-6, which is a fluctuation pattern type including a fluctuation pattern accompanied by a chain, and a super CA2'-7, which is a fluctuation pattern type accompanied by a super reach.

In step S9023 in the game control process shown in FIG. 31, the game control microcomputer 90560 is a counter for generating the big hit type determination random number (1) and the ordinary symbol hit determination random number (4). Count up (add 1). That is, they are random numbers for determination, and random numbers other than these are random numbers for display (random 2', random 3') or random numbers for initial value (random 5'). In addition, random numbers other than the above random numbers may be used in order to enhance the game effect. Further, in this embodiment, as the jackpot determination random number, a random number generated by the hardware built in the game control microcomputer 90560 (or external hardware of the game control microcomputer 90560) is used. As the big hit determination random number, a software random number may be used instead of the hardware random number.

FIG. 34 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in ROM 9054, and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with random R'is set. The jackpot determination table includes a normal jackpot determination table used in a normal state (a gaming state that is not a probability variation state) and a probability variation jackpot determination table used in the probability variation state. Each numerical value shown in the left column of FIG. 34 (A) is set in the normal jackpot determination table, and each numerical value shown in the right column of FIG. 34 (A) is set in the probability variation jackpot determination table. Is set. The numerical value shown in FIG. 34 (A) is the jackpot determination value.

34 (B) and 34 (C) are explanatory views showing a small hit determination table. The small hit determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 9054, and is a table in which a small hit determination value to be compared with the random R'is set. The small hit determination table includes a small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) used when displaying the variation of the first special symbol and a small hit determination table used when displaying the variation of the second special symbol. (For the second special design) Each numerical value shown in FIG. 34 (B) is set in the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol), and in FIG. 34 (C) in the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol). Each numerical value described is set. Further, the numerical values shown in FIGS. 34 (B) and 34 (C) are small hit determination values.

It should be noted that the small hit may be determined only when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, and the small hit may not be provided when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed. In this case, it is not necessary to provide the small hit determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 34 (C). In this embodiment, when the gaming state is shifted to the probabilistic state, the variation display of the second special symbol is mainly executed. If a small hit is generated even when the game state is shifted to the probabilistic state, and if it is configured to incite whether or not the game state is probable, even though the current game state is in the probabilistic state. On the contrary, it makes the player feel annoyed. Therefore, if it is configured so that small hits do not occur during the variable display of the second special symbol, it is difficult for small hits to occur when the game state is in the probable change state, and the fanning effect for the probable change is not performed more than necessary. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the player feels annoyed.

The CPU 9056 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 9053 at a predetermined time and sets the extracted value as the value of the jackpot determination random number (random R'). The jackpot determination random number value is shown in FIG. 34 (A). If any of the indicated jackpot determination values is matched, it is determined to make a jackpot (normal jackpot, probability variation jackpot, sudden probability variation jackpot, which will be described later) for the special symbol. Further, when the random value for determining the big hit matches any of the small hit determination values shown in FIGS. 34 (B) and 34 (C), it is determined to make a small hit with respect to the special symbol. The "probability" shown in FIG. 34 (A) indicates the probability (ratio) of becoming a big hit. Further, the "probability" shown in FIGS. 34 (B) and 34 (C) indicates the probability (ratio) of a small hit. Further, determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to shift to the big hit game state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 908a or the second special symbol display 908b is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a big hit design. Further, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to shift to the small hit game state, but stop at the first special symbol display 908a or the second special symbol display 908b. It also means deciding whether or not to make the symbol a small hit symbol.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 34 (B) and 34 (C), when the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) is used, the small hit is determined at a rate of 1/300. On the other hand, when the small hit determination table (second special symbol) is used, the case where the small hit is determined at a rate of 1/3000 will be described. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the first start winning opening 9013 is entered and the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, the second starting winning opening 9014 is entered and the second special symbol is displayed. Compared to the case where the variable display is executed, the rate of being determined as "small hit" is high.

34 (D) and 34 (E) are explanatory views showing the jackpot type determination tables 90131a and 90131b stored in the ROM 9054. Of these, FIG. 34 (D) determines the jackpot type using the hold memory based on the game ball winning the first start winning opening 9013 (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed). The case jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) 90131a. Further, FIG. 34 (E) shows a case where the jackpot type is determined by using the hold memory based on the game ball winning the second start winning opening 9014 (that is, when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed). It is a jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) 90131b.

The jackpot type determination tables 90131a and 90131b set the jackpot type to "normal jackpot" based on a random number (random 1') for determining the jackpot type when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol. It is a table referred to for determining either "probability change jackpot" or "sudden change jackpot". In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 34 (D) and 34 (E), eight determination values are assigned to the “sudden probability change jackpot” in the jackpot type determination table 90131a (40 minutes). In contrast to the jackpot type judgment table 90131b, two judgment values are assigned to the "sudden probability change jackpot" (a ratio of 2/40). (Suddenly determined to be a probabilistic jackpot). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the first start winning opening 9013 is entered and the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, the second starting winning opening 9014 is entered and the second special symbol is displayed. Compared to the case where the fluctuation display is executed, the rate of being determined as "sudden probability change jackpot" is high. It should be noted that the "sudden probability change jackpot" is distributed only to the jackpot type determination table 90131a for the first special symbol, and the "sudden probability variation jackpot" is not distributed to the jackpot type determination table 90131b for the second special symbol (that is, , "Sudden probability change jackpot" may be determined only when the variation display of the first special symbol is performed).

In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 34 (D) and 34 (E), a sudden probability change jackpot (two round jackpot) as a first specific gaming state that imparts a predetermined amount of game value, and the game. In some cases, it may be determined to be a normal jackpot and a probabilistic jackpot (15 round jackpot) as the second specific game state in which a game value larger than the value is given, and the variation display of the first special symbol is executed. Although the case where it is decided to set the first specific game state at a high rate is shown, the game value to be given is not limited to the number of rounds as shown in this embodiment. For example, as compared with the first specific game state, the second specific game state in which the permissible amount of the number of winnings (count number) of the game ball to the large winning opening per round is increased as the game value is determined. May be good. Further, for example, the second specific game state in which the opening time of the big winning opening per big hit during the big hit is lengthened as compared with the first specific game state may be determined. Further, for example, even in the same 15-round big hit, the first specific gaming state in which the big winning opening is opened once per round and the second specific gaming state in which the big winning opening is opened a plurality of times per round are defined. It may be prepared and the game value of the second specific game state may be increased by substantially increasing the number of times the large winning opening is opened. In this case, for example, in either the first specific game state or the second specific game state, when the large winning opening is opened 15 times (in this case, all 15 rounds in the case of the first specific game state). In the case of the second specific game state, an undigested round remains), and an effect of a mode that encourages whether or not the jackpot continues further may be executed. Then, in the case of the first specific game state, all 15 rounds are internally completed, so the jackpot game is ended, and in the case of the second specific game state, undigested rounds remain internally. Therefore, the jackpot game may be continued (a production in which the opening of the jackpot is additionally started with a bonus after the jackpot of 15 times opening is completed).

In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 34 (D) and 34 (E), the jackpot types include "normal jackpot", "probability change jackpot", and "sudden probability variation jackpot". In this embodiment, the number of rounds executed in the jackpot game is two types, 15 rounds and 2 rounds, but the number of rounds executed in the jackpot game is shown in this embodiment. It is not limited to the ones. For example, a 7R probability variable jackpot controlled for a 7-round jackpot game or a 5R probability variable jackpot controlled for a 5-round jackpot game may be provided. Further, in this embodiment, the case where the big hit types are three types of "normal big hit", "probability change big hit" and "sudden change big hit" is shown, but the case is not limited to three types, for example, four or more types. A jackpot type may be provided. On the contrary, the number of jackpot types may be less than three, and for example, only two types may be provided as jackpot types.

The “normal jackpot” is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state of 15 rounds and shifts to a time saving state (high base state) after the end of the jackpot gaming state (see steps S90167 and 90168 described later). Then, after shifting to the time saving state, when the variation display is completed 100 times, the time saving state ends (see steps S90168 and S90137 to 90140 described later). In this embodiment, even if a big hit occurs after the transition to the time saving state and before the execution of the variation display 100 times is completed, the time saving state ends (see step S90132 described later).

The "probability change jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot game state of 15 rounds and shifts to a probability change state (high probability state) after the end of the jackpot game state (in this embodiment, it is shifted to the probability change state and at the same time. It also shifts to the time saving state (high base state). See steps S90169 and S90170 described later). Then, after shifting to the probabilistic state, the probabilistic state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see step S90132 described later).

Further, the "sudden change jackpot" is allowed up to the number of times that the big winning opening is opened less than the "normal jackpot" and the "probability change jackpot" (in this embodiment, the opening for 0.1 second is twice). It is a big hit to be done. That is, in the case of "sudden probability change big hit", it is controlled to the big hit game state of two rounds. In addition, in "normal jackpot" and "probability jackpot", the opening time of the jackpot per round is as long as 29 seconds, while in "sudden jackpot", the opening time of the jackpot per round is long. It is extremely short at 0.1 seconds, and it can hardly be expected that a game ball will win a prize at the big prize opening during a big hit game. Then, in this embodiment, after the end of the sudden probability change jackpot game state, the probability change state (high probability state) is shifted (in this embodiment, the probability change state is shifted and the time is shortened (high base state). Is also migrated. See steps S90169 and S90170 described later). Then, after shifting to the probabilistic state, the probabilistic state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see step S90132 described later).

As described above, in this embodiment, even when a "small hit" is obtained, the big winning opening is opened twice for 0.1 seconds each, and the big hit game state due to the "sudden probability change big hit" is obtained. Similar control is performed. Then, in the case of a "small hit", the gaming state does not change after the two opening of the large winning opening is completed, and the gaming state before the "small hit" is maintained. By doing so, it is not possible to recognize whether it is a "sudden change big hit" or a "small hit", and the interest of the game is improved.

The jackpot type judgment tables 90131a and 90131b are numerical values to be compared with the values of random 1', and are judgment values corresponding to each of "normal jackpot", "probability variation jackpot", and "sudden probability variation jackpot" (big hit type determination). Value) is set. When the value of random 1'matches any of the jackpot type determination values, the CPU 9056 determines the jackpot type to the type corresponding to the matched jackpot type determination value.

35 (A) to 35 (C) are explanatory views showing fluctuation pattern type determination tables 90132A to 90132C for big hits. In the jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 90132A to 90132C, when it is determined that the variable display result is to be a jackpot symbol, the variation pattern type is set to a random number for determining the variation pattern type according to the determination result of the jackpot type. It is a table referred to for determining one of a plurality of types based on (random number 2').

The variable pattern type determination tables 90132A to 90132C for each jackpot are numerical values (judgment values) to be compared with the values of random numbers (random 2') for determining the variable pattern type, and are normal CA3'-1 to normal CA3'. A determination value corresponding to any of the fluctuation pattern types of -2, super CA3'-3, special CA4'-1, and special CA4'-2 is set.

For example, the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 90132A shown in FIG. 35 (A) used when the jackpot type is "normal jackpot" and FIG. 35 (B) used when the jackpot type is "probability variation jackpot". The allocation of the determination values for the fluctuation pattern types of the normal CA3'-1 to the normal CA3'-2 and the super CA3'-3 is different from that of the jackpot fluctuation pattern type determination table 90132B shown in the above.

As described above, when the jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 90132A to 90132C selected according to the jackpot type are compared, the assignment of the determination value for each variation pattern type is different depending on the jackpot type. In addition, judgment values are assigned to different fluctuation pattern types according to the jackpot type. Therefore, different variation pattern types can be determined according to the determination result of which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is to be used, and the ratios determined for the same variation pattern type can be different.

As shown in FIGS. 35A and 35B, in this embodiment, in the case of "normal jackpot" or "probability variation jackpot", a random number (random 2') for determining the variation pattern type is used. When the value is 150 to 251 it can be seen that the variable display with at least super reach (super reach A, super reach B) is executed.

Further, regarding the super reach jackpot, a fluctuation pattern type with a pseudo-ream (a fluctuation pattern type including a fluctuation pattern of Super PA3'-3 and a super PA3'-4) and a fluctuation pattern type without a pseudo-ream (Super PB3'- 3. It may be divided into the fluctuation pattern type including the fluctuation pattern of Super PB3'-4). In this case, in both the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 90132A for normal jackpot and the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 90132B for probability variation jackpot, the variation pattern type with super reach and pseudo-ream and the super-reach and pseudo-ream are displayed. The fluctuation pattern type that does not accompany it will be assigned.

Further, in the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 90132C used when the jackpot type is "sudden probability variation jackpot", for example, the jackpot type such as special CA4'-1 and special CA4'-2 is other than "sudden probability variation jackpot". In some cases, the judgment value is assigned to the fluctuation pattern type to which the judgment value is not assigned. Therefore, when the variable display result becomes "big hit" and the big hit type becomes "sudden probability change big hit" and the sudden probability change big hit state is controlled, it is different from the case of controlling to the normal big hit or the big hit state by the probability change big hit. It can be determined according to the fluctuation pattern type.

Further, FIG. 35 (D) is an explanatory diagram showing the variation pattern type determination table 90132D for small hits. The variable pattern type determination table 90132D for small hits has a plurality of variable pattern types based on a random number (random 2') for determining the variable pattern type when it is determined that the variable display result is a small hit symbol. A table referenced to determine one of the types. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 35 (D), when it is decided to make a small hit, a case where the special CA4'-1 is decided as the fluctuation pattern type is shown. There is.

36 (A) to 36 (C) are explanatory views showing deviation pattern type determination tables 90135A to 90135C. Of these, FIG. 36 (A) shows the deviation pattern type determination table 90135A used when the game state is the normal state and the total number of reserved storages is less than 3. Further, FIG. 36B shows the deviation pattern type determination table 90135B used when the game state is the normal state and the total number of pending storages is 3 or more. Further, FIG. 36C shows the deviation pattern type determination table 90135C used when the gaming state is the probability variation state or the time saving state. The deviation pattern type determination tables 90135A to 90135C have a plurality of variation pattern types based on a random number (random 2') for determining the variation pattern type when it is determined that the variable display result is an outlier. A table referenced to determine one of the types.

In the example shown in FIG. 36, a case where different deviation pattern type determination tables 90135B to 90135C are used for the case where the game state is the probability change state or the time saving state and the case where the total number of reserved storages is 3 or more is shown. However, it may be configured to use a common deviation pattern type determination table for the case of the probability change state or the time saving state and the case where the total number of pending storages is 3 or more. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 36 (C), the case where the common probability variation / time saving variation pattern type determination table 90135C is used regardless of the total number of pending storages is shown, but the probability variation / time reduction is for loss. As the variation pattern type determination table, a plurality of deviation pattern determination tables (tables in which the ratios of determination values are different) according to the total number of pending storages may be used.

In this embodiment, when the game state is the normal state, the out-of-order variation pattern type determination table 90135A used when the total reserved storage number is less than 3, and the total reserved storage number is 3 or more. Although the case where two types of tables are used with the deviation variation pattern type determination table 90135B used in the above is shown, the method of dividing the deviation variation pattern type determination table is not limited to the one shown in this embodiment. For example, a separate outlier variation pattern type determination table may be provided for each value of the total pending storage number (that is, for 0 total pending storage number, for 1 total pending storage number, and for 2 total pending storage number). , For the total number of reserved storages of 3, for the total number of reserved storages of 4, ... The out-of-order fluctuation pattern type determination table may be used separately). Further, for example, an out-of-order variation pattern type determination table corresponding to a combination of a plurality of other values of the total reserved storage number may be used. For example, the out-of-order variation pattern type determination table for the total number of reserved storages 0 to 2, the total number of reserved storages 3, the total number of reserved storages 4, and so on may be used.

Further, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which a plurality of out-of-order fluctuation pattern type determination tables are provided according to the total number of reserved storages, but the outlier variation pattern type determination is made according to the first number of reserved storages and the second number of reserved storages. A plurality of tables may be provided. For example, when the variation display of the first special symbol is performed, the deviation variation pattern type determination table separately prepared for each value of the first reserved storage number may be used (that is, the first reserved storage number). For 0 pieces, for 1st hold storage number, for 1st hold storage number 2 pieces, for 1st hold storage number 3 pieces, for 1st hold storage number 4 pieces ... You may use each separately). Further, for example, an out-of-order variation pattern type determination table corresponding to a combination of a plurality of other values of the first reserved storage number may be used. For example, the out-of-order variation pattern type determination table for the first reserved storage number 0 to 2, the first reserved storage number 3, the first reserved storage number 4, and so on may be used. Even in this case, when the first reserved storage number or the second reserved storage number is large (for example, 3 or more), the variation pattern type including the variation pattern having a short variation time may be easily selected. .. Further, even in such a case, a common determination value may be assigned to a variation pattern type including a variation pattern accompanied by super reach as a specific variable display pattern.

The "specific production mode" is a fluctuation pattern type or fluctuation pattern in which at least the degree of expectation for a big hit is set high, such as a fluctuation pattern accompanied by super reach, and the player can have a feeling of expectation for the big hit. Is. Further, the "expectation degree (reliability) for the big hit" indicates the appearance rate (probability) at which the big hit appears when the variable display (for example, the variable display accompanied by the super reach) is executed according to the specific production mode. ing. For example, the jackpot expectation when a variable display with super reach is executed is determined as (the rate at which super reach is executed when it is determined to be a jackpot) / (when it is determined to be a jackpot and when it is lost). It is calculated by calculating the rate at which super reach is performed in both cases.

In each of the deviation pattern type determination tables 90135A to 90135B, numerical values (judgment values) to be compared with the values of random numbers (random 2') for determination of the variation pattern type are shown, and are non-reach CA2'-1 to non-reach. Judgment values corresponding to any of the fluctuation pattern types of CA2'-3, normal CA2'-4 to normal CA2'-6, and super CA2'-7 are set.

As shown in FIGS. 36 (A) and 36 (B), in this embodiment, when the game is out of alignment and the game state is the normal state, a random number (random 2') for determining the variation pattern type is used. When the value is 230 to 251 it can be seen that the variable display with at least super reach (super reach A, super reach B) is executed regardless of the total number of reserved storages.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 36 (A) and 36 (B), in this embodiment, when the game is out of alignment and the game state is the normal state, a random number (random 2') for determining the variation pattern type is used. When the value is 1 to 79, it can be seen that the fluctuation display of the normal fluctuation is executed at least without the reach (without the effect such as the pseudo-ream or the slip effect) regardless of the total number of reserved memories. With such a table configuration, in this embodiment, the determination table (variable pattern type determination table 90135A, 90135B for loss) is at least one of the variable display patterns other than the variable display pattern for reach (variable pattern with reach). Regardless of the number of rights (first reserved storage number, second reserved storage number, total reserved storage number) stored by the reserved storage means (first reserved storage buffer or second reserved storage buffer) for a part. It is configured so that a common determination value (1 to 79 in the example shown in FIGS. 36A and 36B) is assigned. As shown in this embodiment, the "variable display pattern other than the variable display pattern for reach" means that, for example, the variable display result is not accompanied by the reach, and is not accompanied by the effect such as the pseudo-ream or the sliding effect. It is a variable display pattern (variable pattern) used when it does not become a big hit.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 35, a case where a common jackpot variation pattern type determination table is used regardless of the current gaming state is shown, but is the current gaming state a probabilistic state? Depending on whether it is in the normal state, the jackpot variation pattern type determination table prepared separately may be used. Further, in this embodiment, when the total number of reserved storages is 3 or more, the variation pattern of shortening variation is determined by selecting the variation pattern type determination table for shortening shown in FIG. 36 (B). Although the case is shown in which there are cases, the total number of reserved storages (the first number of reserved storages or the second number of reserved storages may be used) when the fluctuation pattern of the shortened fluctuation can be selected according to the current gaming state. ) May be different. For example, when the gaming state is the normal state, when the total number of reserved storage is 3 (or, for example, when the number of 1st reserved storage or the 2nd reserved storage is 2), it is for shortening. The variation pattern type judgment table for loss is selected so that the variation pattern of the shortened variation may be determined, and when the game state is the probability variation state or the time saving state, the total number of reserved memories is smaller 1 or 2. Even in the case of (or, for example, even when the number of first reserved memory or the second number of reserved memory is 0 or 1 which is smaller), the variation pattern of shortening variation is selected by selecting the variation pattern type determination table for shortening. It may be decided.

37 (A) and 37 (B) are explanatory views showing the hit variation pattern determination tables 90137A to 90137B stored in the ROM 9054. The hit variation pattern determination tables 90137A to 90137B determine the variation pattern according to the determination result of the jackpot type and the variation pattern type when it is determined that the variable display result is "big hit" or "small hit". It is a table referred to for determining a fluctuation pattern to one of a plurality of types based on a random number (random number 3'). The fluctuation pattern determination tables 90137A to 90137B for each are selected as the tables to be used according to the determination result of the fluctuation pattern type. That is, the hit variation pattern determination table 90137A is selected as the table to be used according to the determination result that the variation pattern type is one of normal CA3'-1 to normal CA3'-2 and super CA3'-3, and the variation pattern is used. The hit variation pattern determination table 90137B is selected as the table to be used according to the determination result that the type is either special CA4'-1 or special CA4'-2. Each of the fluctuation pattern determination tables 90137A to 90137B is a numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the value of a random number (random 3') for determining the variation pattern according to the variation pattern type, and is a variable display result of the effect symbol. Includes data (judgment value) corresponding to any of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns corresponding to the case where is a "big hit".

In the example shown in FIG. 37 (A), as the fluctuation pattern types, the fluctuation pattern type including the fluctuation pattern with only the normal reach and the fluctuation pattern type including the fluctuation pattern with the normal reach and the pseudo-ream are included. It is shown that the normal CA3'-2 is classified into the normal CA3'-2 and the super CA3'-3, which is a fluctuation pattern type including a fluctuation pattern with super reach (which may be accompanied by pseudo-reach together with super reach). ing. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 37 (B), as the fluctuation pattern types, the special CA4'-1 which is a fluctuation pattern type including a non-reach fluctuation pattern and the special CA4 which is a fluctuation pattern type including a fluctuation pattern accompanied by reach. The case where it is classified into ´-2 is shown. In addition, in FIG. 37 (B), the variation pattern type may be divided according to the presence or absence of an effect such as a pseudo-ream or a slip effect, instead of dividing the variation pattern type according to the presence or absence of reach. In this case, for example, the special CA4'-1 includes the special PG1'-1 and the special PG2'-1 which are fluctuation patterns without a pseudo-ream or slip effect, and the special CA4'-2 is a pseudo-ream or a pseudo-ream. It may be configured to include special PG1'-2, special PG1'-3 and special PG2'-2 with a sliding effect.

FIG. 38 is an explanatory diagram showing the deviation variation pattern determination table 90138A stored in the ROM 9054. The out-of-order fluctuation pattern determination table 90138A is based on a random number (random 3') for determining the variation pattern according to the determination result of the variation pattern type when it is determined that the variable display result is "out of alignment". , A table referenced to determine the variation pattern to one of a plurality of types. The out-of-order variation pattern determination table 90138A is selected as the table to be used according to the determination result of the variation pattern type.

39 and 40 are explanatory views showing an example of the contents of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 90560. In the examples shown in FIGS. 39 and 40, the command 80XX (H) is an effect control command (variation pattern command) that specifies a variation pattern of the effect symbol that is variably displayed on the effect display device 909 in response to the variable display of the special symbol. ) (Each corresponds to the fluctuation pattern XX). That is, when each of the usable variation patterns shown in FIG. 32 is given a unique number, there is a variation pattern command corresponding to each of the variation patterns specified by the number. In addition, "(H)" indicates that it is a hexadecimal number. The effect control command for specifying the fluctuation pattern is also a command for designating the fluctuation start. Therefore, when the effect control microcomputer 90100 receives the command 80XX (H), the effect display device 909 controls to start the variable display of the effect symbol.

The commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H) are effect control commands indicating whether or not to make a big hit, whether or not to make a small hit, and the type of big hit. Since the effect control microcomputer 90100 determines the display result of the effect symbol in response to the reception of the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H), the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H) are referred to as display result designation commands.

The command 8D01 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol variation designation command) indicating that the variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started. The command 8D02 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol variation designation command) indicating that the variable display (variation) of the second special symbol is started. The first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command may be collectively referred to as a special symbol specification command (or symbol variation designation command). The variation pattern command may include information indicating whether to start the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol.

The command 8F00 (H) is an effect control command (symbol confirmation designation command) indicating that the variable display (variation) of the fourth symbol is terminated and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. Upon receiving the symbol confirmation designation command, the effect control microcomputer 90100 ends the variable display (variation) of the fourth symbol and derives and displays the display result.

The command 9000 (H) is an effect control command (initialization designation command: power-on designation command) transmitted when the power supply to the gaming machine is started. The command 9200 (H) is an effect control command (power failure recovery designation command) transmitted when the power supply to the gaming machine is resumed. When the power supply to the game machine is started, the game control microcomputer 90560 sends a power failure recovery designation command if the data is stored in the backup RAM, and initializes the game machine otherwise. Send a command.

Command 9F00 (H) is an effect control command (customer waiting demo designation command) for designating a customer waiting demonstration.

The commands A001 to A003 (H) are effect control commands (big hit start designation command: fanfare designation command) for displaying the fanfare screen, that is, for designating the start of the jackpot game. In this embodiment, a jackpot start 1 designation command, a jackpot start 2 designation command, or a small hit / sudden probability change jackpot start designation command is used depending on the type of jackpot. Specifically, in the case of "normal jackpot", the jackpot start 1 designation command (A001 (H)) is used, and in the case of "normal jackpot", the jackpot start 2 designation command (A002 (H)) is used. In the case of "sudden probability change big hit" or "small hit", the small hit / sudden probability change big hit start designation command (A003 (H)) is used. Although the game control microcomputer 90560 transmits a fanfare designation command for suddenly probabilistic jackpot start designation when it is a sudden jackpot, it may be configured not to send a fanfare designation command when it is a small hit. Good.

The command A1XX (H) is an effect control command (command for designating the opening of the large winning opening) indicating the display during the opening of the large winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. Since the value for designating the round is set in the EXT data and transmitted for the large winning opening opening designation command, a different large winning opening opening designation command is transmitted for each round. For example, when executing the first round during the jackpot game, a command (A101 (H)) for specifying round 1 is transmitted and the tenth round during the jackpot game is executed. Is transmitted a command (A10A (H)) during which the large winning opening is open to specify round 10. A2XX (H) is an effect control command (designated command after opening the large winning opening) indicating the closing of the large winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. Since the value for designating the round is set in the EXT data and transmitted for the designated command after opening the large winning opening, a different designated command after opening the large winning opening is transmitted for each round. For example, when ending the first round during the jackpot game, a designation command (A201 (H)) is transmitted after opening the jackpot to specify round 1, and when ending the tenth round during the jackpot game. Is transmitted a designated command (A30A (H)) after opening the large winning opening that designates round 10.

The command A301 (H) is an effect control command (big hit end 1 designation command: ending 1 designation command) for displaying the jackpot end screen, that is, designating the end of the jackpot game. The jackpot end 1 designation command (A301 (H)) is used when ending the jackpot game by "normal jackpot". The command A302 (H) is an effect control command (big hit end 2 designation command: ending 2 designation command) for displaying the jackpot end screen, that is, designating the end of the jackpot game. The jackpot end 2 designation command (A302 (H)) is used when ending the jackpot game by "probability variation jackpot". The command A303 (H) is an effect control command (small hit / sudden probability change big hit end designation command: ending 3 designation command) for designating the end of the small hit game or the end of the sudden probability change big hit game. The game control microcomputer 90560 is configured to send an ending designation command for suddenly probabilistic jackpot end designation when it is a sudden probability change jackpot, but not to send an ending designation command when it is a small hit. May be good.

The command B000 (H) is an effect control command (normal state background designation command) for designating the background display when the game state is the normal state. The command B001 (H) is an effect control command (time saving state background designation command) for designating the background display when the gaming state is the time saving state. The command B002 (H) is an effect control command (probability change state background designation command) for designating the background display when the game state is the probability change state.

The command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first hold storage number addition designation command) for designating that the first hold storage number has been increased by 1. The command C100 (H) is an effect control command (second hold storage number addition designation command) for designating that the second hold storage number has been increased by 1. The command C200 (H) is an effect control command (first hold storage number subtraction designation command) for designating that the first hold storage number has decreased by one. The command C300 (H) is an effect control command (second hold storage number subtraction designation command) for designating that the second hold storage number has decreased by 1.

In this embodiment, as the reserved storage information, the effect control command (first reserved storage number addition designation) indicating that the reserved storage number has increased or decreased for the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number, respectively. The case where the command and the second hold storage number addition designation command) is transmitted is shown, but the form of the hold storage information is not limited to that shown in this embodiment, and for example, the hold storage in the following modes is shown. Information may be transmitted.

(1) Only one command is transmitted as the hold storage information, and in that one command, which of the first hold memory and the second hold memory is increased is specified, and the number of hold memories of the increased one is specified. (1st hold storage number or 2nd hold storage number) may be set as EXT data and transmitted.

(2) As the hold storage information, only one command is transmitted, and in that one command, which of the first hold memory and the second hold memory is increased is specified, and the total number of hold memories is EXT data. It may be set as and sent.

(3) As the reserved storage information, it is specified which of the first starting winning opening 9013 and the second starting winning opening 9014 has started winning (which of the first reserved memory and the second reserved memory has increased). In addition to sending the effect control command (1st start winning prize designation command, 2nd start winning designation command), a hold storage number designation command for specifying the hold memory number is sent separately, and the hold memory number designation command is used. The total number of pending storages may be set as EXT data and transmitted.

(4) As the reserved memory information, it is specified which of the first start winning opening 9013 and the second starting winning opening 9014 has started winning (which of the first reserved memory and the second reserved memory has increased). In addition to sending the effect control command (1st start winning prize designation command, 2nd start winning designation command), a hold memory number designation command for specifying the hold memory number is sent separately, and the hold memory number designation command is used. The increased number of reserved storages (first reserved storage number or second reserved storage number) may be set as EXT data and transmitted.

The command C4XX (H) and the command C6XX (H) are effect control commands (winning determination result designation commands) indicating the contents of the winning determination result. Of these, the command C4XX (H) is an effect control command (symbol designation command) that indicates whether or not a big hit is made, whether or not a small hit is made, and the judgment result of the type of big hit among the judgment results at the time of winning. is there. Further, the command C6XX (H) is an effect control command indicating a judgment result (judgment result of the fluctuation pattern type) of which judgment value range the value of the random number for judgment of the fluctuation pattern type falls within the judgment result at the time of winning. (Variable category command).

In this embodiment, in the winning effect processing (see FIG. 48) described later, the game control microcomputer 90560 determines whether or not it will be a big hit, whether or not it will be a small hit, and the type of big hit at the time of starting winning. , It is determined which judgment value range the value of the random number for determining the fluctuation pattern type falls within. Then, a value for designating a big hit or a small hit or a value for designating the type of the big hit is set in the EXT data of the symbol designation command, and control is performed to transmit to the effect control microcomputer 90100. In addition, a value that specifies a range of determination values as a determination result is set in the EXT data of the variable category command, and control is performed to transmit the effect control to the microcomputer 90100. In this embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 90100 can recognize whether or not the display result is a big hit or a small hit, and the type of the big hit, based on the value set in the symbol designation command. Based on the variation category command, the variation pattern type can be recognized when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type becomes a predetermined determination value.

FIG. 41 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the symbol designation command. As shown in FIG. 41, in this embodiment, EXT data is set according to whether or not a big hit or a small hit is made, and the type of the big hit, and a symbol designation command is transmitted.

For example, in the winning effect processing described later, when it is determined that the result is "out of place", the CPU 9056 transmits a symbol designation command (symbol 1 designation command) in which "00 (H)" is set in the EXT data. Further, for example, when it is determined that the "normal jackpot" is obtained, the CPU 9056 transmits a symbol designation command (symbol 2 designation command) in which "01 (H)" is set in the EXT data. Further, for example, when it is determined that the "probability variation jackpot" is obtained, the CPU 9056 transmits a symbol designation command (symbol 3 designation command) in which "02 (H)" is set in the EXT data. Further, for example, when it is determined that a "sudden probability change jackpot" occurs, the CPU 9056 transmits a symbol designation command (symbol 4 designation command) in which "03 (H)" is set in the EXT data. Further, for example, when it is determined that the result is a "small hit", the CPU 9056 transmits a symbol designation command (symbol 5 designation command) in which "04 (H)" is set in the EXT data. The EXT data set in the symbol designation command and the EXT data set in the display result designation command may be shared. With such a configuration, the data to be read can be shared between when the symbol specification command is set and when the display result specification command is set.

42 and 43 are explanatory views showing an example of the contents of the variable category command. As shown in FIGS. 42 and 43, in this embodiment, which game state is used, which display result is the display result of the special symbol or the effect symbol, and the random number for determining the variable pattern type at the time of starting winning. A value is set in the EXT data according to whether it is determined that the value of is in the range of which determination value, and the variable category command is transmitted.

For example, when it is determined that the game state is normal and out of order at the time of starting winning, in step S90232 of the winning effect processing described later, the CPU 9056 first determines whether the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 79. Judge whether or not. When the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 79, the CPU 9056 transmits a variation category 1 command in which "00 (H)" is set in the EXT data. In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, the non-reach CA2'-1 variation pattern type is commonly assigned to the range of the determination values 1 to 79 regardless of the total number of reserved storages. Therefore, the effect control microcomputer 90100 can recognize that at least the variation pattern type is non-reach CA2'-1 based on the reception of the variation category 1 command. Next, when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 80 to 89, the CPU 9056 transmits a variation category 2 command in which "01 (H)" is set in the EXT data. Next, when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 90 to 99, the CPU 9056 transmits a variation category 3 command in which "02 (H)" is set in the EXT data. Next, when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 100 to 169, the CPU 9056 transmits a variation category 4 command in which "03 (H)" is set in the EXT data. Next, when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 170 to 199, the CPU 9056 transmits a variation category 5 command in which "04 (H)" is set in the EXT data. Next, when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 200 to 214, the CPU 9056 transmits a variation category 6 command in which "05 (H)" is set in the EXT data. Next, when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 215 to 229, the CPU 9056 transmits a variation category 7 command in which "06 (H)" is set in the EXT data. Next, the CPU 9056 transmits a variation category 8 command in which "07 (H)" is set in the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 230 to 251. In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, the fluctuation pattern type of the super CA2'-7 is commonly assigned to the range of the determination values 230 to 251 regardless of the total number of reserved storages. Therefore, the effect control microcomputer 90100 can recognize that at least the fluctuation pattern type is super CA2'-7 based on the reception of the fluctuation category 8 command.

The thresholds 79, 89, 99, 169, 199, 214 and 229 used to determine which of the above fluctuation categories belong to are specifically shown in FIGS. 36 (A) and 36 (B). It is derived by picking up the values that can be the boundaries of the range of judgment values assigned to each fluctuation pattern type in the deviation pattern type judgment table. This also applies to the subsequent variation categories 9 to 10, 21 to 29, and is assigned to each variation pattern type in the variation pattern type determination table shown in FIGS. 35 (A) to 35 (D) and FIG. 36 (C). A threshold value used for categorical determination is derived by picking up a value that can be a boundary of the range of determined determination values.

Further, for example, when it is determined that the game state is in a probabilistic state, a time saving state, and an outlier at the time of starting winning, in step S90232 of the winning effect processing described later, the CPU 9056 first sets the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type to 1. It is determined whether or not it becomes ~ 219. When the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 219 (that is, when the variation pattern type is non-reach CA2'-3), the CPU 9056 sets "08 (H)" in the EXT data. Send a variable category 9 command. Next, the CPU 9056 sets "09 (H)" in the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the fluctuation pattern type is 220 to 251 (that is, when the fluctuation pattern type is Super CA2'-7). The variable category 10 command is sent.

Even when the gaming state is the probability change state or the time saving state, the fluctuation pattern type of the super CA2'-7 may be assigned to the range of the determination values 230 to 251. By doing so, it is possible to assign a common determination value to the fluctuation pattern type of the super CA2'-7 regardless of the gaming state. Therefore, when the process of step S90232 of the process of the winning effect, which will be described later, is executed, if it is out of order, a common determination process may be performed regardless of the game state, and the program capacity can be further reduced. Further, in this case, the game state determination process in step S90226 can also be eliminated.

Further, for example, when it is determined that a "normal big hit" is obtained at the time of starting winning, in step S90232 of the winning effect processing described later, the CPU 9056 first determines whether or not the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 74. Is determined. When the value of the random number for determining the fluctuation pattern type is 1 to 74 (that is, when the fluctuation pattern type is normal CA3'-1, the CPU 9056 sets "10 (H)" in the EXT data. Send a category 21 command. Next, the CPU 9056 sets "11 (H)" in the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the fluctuation pattern type is 75 to 149 (that is, when the fluctuation pattern type is normal CA3'-2). The variable category 22 command is sent. Next, the CPU 9056 sets "12 (H)" in the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the fluctuation pattern type is 150 to 251 (that is, when the fluctuation pattern type is Super CA3'-3). The variable category 23 command is sent.

Further, for example, when it is determined that a "probability variation jackpot" is obtained at the time of starting winning, in step S90232 of the winning effect processing described later, the CPU 9056 first determines whether the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 38. Is determined. When the value of the random number for determining the fluctuation pattern type is 1 to 38 (that is, when the fluctuation pattern type is normal CA3'-1, the CPU 9056 sets "13 (H)" in the EXT data. Send category 24 commands. Next, the CPU 9056 sets "14 (H)" in the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the fluctuation pattern type is 39 to 79 (that is, when the fluctuation pattern type is normal CA3'-2). The variable category 25 command is sent. Next, the CPU 9056 sets "15 (H)" in the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the fluctuation pattern type is 80 to 251 (that is, when the fluctuation pattern type is Super CA3'-3). The variable category 26 command is sent.

Further, for example, when it is determined that a sudden change in jackpot occurs at the time of starting winning, in step S90232 of the winning effect processing described later, the CPU 9056 first determines whether or not the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 100. To judge. When the value of the random number for determining the fluctuation pattern type is 1 to 100 (that is, when the fluctuation pattern type of the special CA4'-1 is used), the CPU 9056 sets "16 (H)" in the EXT data. Send a category 27 command. Next, the CPU 9056 sets "17 (H)" in the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the fluctuation pattern type is 101 to 251 (that is, when the fluctuation pattern type of the special CA4'-2 is used). Send the variable category 28 command.

Further, for example, when it is determined that a small hit is obtained at the time of starting winning, the CPU 9056 transmits a variable category 29 command in which "18 (H)" is set in the EXT data.

It should be noted that the total number of pending memories is not always the same when the winning judgment is made at the start winning and when the variation display is actually started. Therefore, the variation indicated by the winning determination result specification command. It is possible that the pattern type does not match the variation pattern type actually used in the variation display. However, in this embodiment, at least for the fluctuation pattern types of non-reach CA2'-1, super CA2'-7, and super CA3'-3, a common determination value is assigned regardless of the total number of reserved storages. Therefore, there is no inconsistency between the winning determination result and the variation pattern type of the variation display actually executed (see FIGS. 35 and 36). Therefore, in this embodiment, the pre-reading notice effect described later is executed for the variation display determined at the time of winning when the variation pattern type of the super CA2'-7 or the super CA3'-3 is obtained. Note that the variation category commands shown in FIGS. 42 and 43 (specifically, variation categories) only when it is determined that the variation pattern types are non-reach CA2'-1, super CA2'-7, and super CA3'-3. 1 command, variable category 8 command, variable category 23 command, variable category 26 command only) may be transmitted, and the variable category command may not be transmitted in the case of a winning determination result of other variable pattern types. In addition, when it is determined at the time of winning that the non-reach CA2'-1, super CA2'-7, and super CA3'-3 are not specified, a fluctuation category command indicating that the fluctuation pattern type cannot be specified is transmitted. It may be.

In this embodiment, when a start prize is generated in the first start prize opening 9013 in the time saving state (high base state), or when the start prize is entered in the first start prize opening 9013 during the big hit game. Except when it occurs (see steps S901215A and S901216A), the prize-winning determination process is executed each time a start-up prize is generated, the symbol designation command shown in FIG. 41 is transmitted, and the variation shown in FIGS. 42 and 43. A category command is sent. Then, the effect control microcomputer 90100 executes the look-ahead advance notice effect based on the received symbol designation command and variable category command.

The effect control microcomputer 90100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 90101) mounted on the effect control board 9080 receives the above-mentioned effect control command from the game control microcomputer 90560 mounted on the main board 9031. Then, the display state of the image display device 909 is changed, the display state of the lamp is changed, and the sound number data is output to the audio output board 9070 according to the contents shown in FIGS. 39 and 40. To do.

For example, the game control microcomputer 90560 specifies a variation pattern of the effect symbol each time a start prize is given and the variable display of the special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 908a or the second special symbol display 908b. The variation pattern command and the display result specification command are transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 90100.

In this embodiment, the effect control command has a 2-byte structure, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit (bit 7) of the EXT data is always set to "0". Note that such a command form is an example, and other command forms may be used. For example, a control command composed of 1 byte or 3 bytes or more may be used.

As a method of transmitting the effect control command, the effect control command data is output from the main board 9031 to the effect control board 9080 via the relay board 9077 by one byte at a time with eight parallel signal lines of the effect control signals CD0 to CD7. In addition to the effect control command data, a method of outputting a pulse-shaped (rectangular wavy) capture signal (effect control INT signal) instructing the capture of the effect control command data is used. The 8-bit effect control command data of the effect control command is output in synchronization with the effect control INT signal. The effect control microcomputer 90100 mounted on the effect control board 9080 detects that the effect control INT signal has risen, and starts the process of capturing 1-byte data by the interrupt process.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 39 and 40, the variation pattern command and the display result designation command are variably displayed (variable) and the second special of the effect symbol corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 908a. An image display that can be used in common with the variable display (variation) of the effect symbol corresponding to the fluctuation of the second special symbol on the symbol display 908b, and that produces an effect along with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. When controlling the effect component such as the device 909, it is possible not to increase the types of commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 90560 to the effect control microcomputer 90100.

44 and 45 are flowcharts showing an example of a program of special symbol process processing (step S9026) executed by the game control microcomputer 90560 (specifically, CPU 9056) mounted on the main board 9031. As described above, in the special symbol process process, a process for controlling the first special symbol display 908a or the second special symbol display 908b and the grand prize opening is executed. In the special symbol process processing, the CPU 9056 starts the first start winning opening 9013 if the first starting opening switch 9013a for detecting that the game ball has won is turned on, that is, the first starting winning opening 9013. If a prize has been won, the first start port switch passage process is executed (steps S9031, S90312). Further, when the second start opening switch 9014a for detecting that the game ball has won the second start winning opening 9014 is turned on, the CPU 9056 has generated a start winning to the second start winning opening 9014. Then, the second start port switch passing process is executed (steps S90313 and S90314). Then, any of the processes of steps S90300 to S90310 is performed. If the first start winning opening switch 9013a or the second starting opening switch 9014a is not turned on, any of steps S90300 to S90310 is performed according to the internal state.

The processes of steps S90300 to S90310 are as follows.

Special symbol normal processing (step S90300): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 0. When the game control microcomputer 90560 is in a state where the variable display of the special symbol can be started, the storage number of the numerical data stored in the hold storage buffer (total hold storage number) is confirmed. The number of numerical data stored in the hold storage buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the total hold storage counter. Further, if the count value of the total reserved memory counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit. If you want to make a big hit, set the big hit flag. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90301 (1 in this example). The jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends.

Fluctuation pattern setting process (step S90301): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 1. In addition, the fluctuation pattern is determined, and the fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern (variable display time: the time from the start of the variable display to the derivation display (stop display) of the display result) is defined as the fluctuation time of the variable display of the special symbol. Decide to do. Further, the fluctuation pattern command according to the determined fluctuation pattern is controlled to be transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 90100, and the fluctuation time timer for measuring the fluctuation time of the special symbol is started. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90302 (2 in this example).

Display result designation command transmission process (step S90302): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 2. Control is performed to send a display result designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90100. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90303 (3 in this example).

Processing during special symbol change (step S90303): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 3. When the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern selected in the fluctuation pattern setting process elapses (the fluctuation time timer set in step S90301 times out, that is, the value of the fluctuation time timer becomes 0), the symbol is confirmed on the effect control microcomputer 90100. Controls the transmission of the specified command, and updates the internal state (special symbol process flag) to the value corresponding to step S90304 (4 in this example). The effect control microcomputer 90100 controls the effect display device 909 to stop the fourth symbol when the symbol confirmation designation command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 90560 is received.

Special symbol stop processing (step S90304): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. When the jackpot flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90305 (5 in this example). If the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90308 (8 in this example). If neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90300 (0 in this example). In this embodiment, based on the fact that the value of the special symbol process flag is 4, as will be described later, special symbol display control for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol in the special symbol display control process. The data is set in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data (see FIG. 56), and in the display control process of step S9022, the stop symbol of the special symbol is actually stopped and displayed according to the setting content of the output buffer.

Pre-processing for opening the large winning opening (step S90305): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 5. In the pre-processing for opening the large winning opening, control is performed to open the large winning opening. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening) is initialized, and the solenoid 9021 is driven to open the large winning opening. In addition, while controlling the transmission of the large winning opening opening designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90100, the execution time of the large winning opening opening processing is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set in step S90306. Update to the value corresponding to (6 in this example). The large winning opening pre-opening process is executed for each round, but when the first round is started, the large winning opening pre-opening process is also a process for starting a big hit game. Further, since the value for designating the round is set in the EXT data and transmitted for the command for specifying the opening of the large winning opening, a different command for specifying the opening for the large winning opening is transmitted for each round. For example, when executing the first round during the jackpot game, a command (A101 (H)) for specifying round 1 is transmitted and the tenth round during the jackpot game is executed. Is transmitted a command (A10A (H)) during which the large winning opening is open to specify round 10.

Processing during opening of the large winning opening (step S90306): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 6. In the process of opening the large winning opening, processing for confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the large winning opening is performed. If the closing condition of the big winning opening is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90305 (5 in this example). In addition, control is performed to send a designated command to the effect control microcomputer 90100 after the jackpot is opened, and when all rounds are completed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set to a value corresponding to step S90307 (this). In the example, update to 7).

Jackpot end processing (step S90307): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 7. Control is performed so that the effect control microcomputer 90100 performs display control for notifying the player that the jackpot game state has ended. In addition, a process of setting a flag indicating the game state (for example, a probability change flag or a time saving flag) is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90300 (0 in this example).

Small hit release preprocessing (step S90308): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 8. In the small hit opening pre-processing, control is performed to open the large winning opening. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening) is initialized, and the solenoid 9021 is driven to open the large winning opening. Further, the execution time of the processing during the opening of the large winning opening is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90309 (9 in this example). The small hit opening pre-processing is executed every time the large winning opening is opened during the small hit game, but when the first opening during the small hit game is started, the small hit opening pre-processing is performed by the small hit game. It is also the process to start.

Small hit opening process (step S90309): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 9. Performs processing to confirm the establishment of the closing conditions for the grand prize opening. If the closing condition of the big winning opening is satisfied and the number of times the big winning opening is opened still remains, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set to the value corresponding to step S90308 (8 in this example). Update. When all the releases are completed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90310 (10 in this example).

Small hit end process (step S90310): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 10. Control is performed so that the effect control microcomputer 90100 performs display control for notifying the player that the small hit game state has ended. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90300 (0 in this example).

FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the start port switch passing process in steps S90312 and S90314. Of these, FIG. 46 (A) is a flowchart showing the process of passing the first start port switch in step S90312. Further, FIG. 46B is a flowchart showing the process of passing the second start port switch in step S90314.

First, the process of passing the first start port switch will be described with reference to FIG. 46 (A). In the first start port switch passing process executed when the first start port switch 9013a is in the ON state, the CPU 9056 first determines whether or not the first reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the first (Whether or not the value of the first hold storage number counter for counting the number of hold storage numbers is 4) is confirmed (step S901211A). If the first reserved storage number has reached the upper limit, the process ends as it is.

If the first hold storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 9056 increases the value of the first hold storage number counter by 1 (step S9011212A), and at the same time, the value of the total hold storage number counter for counting the total hold storage number. Is increased by 1 (step S901213A). Next, the CPU 9056 extracts values from the random number circuit 9053 and the counter for generating software random numbers, and executes a process of storing them in the storage area in the first hold storage buffer (see FIG. 47 (B)) (see FIG. 47 (B)). Step S901214A). In the process of step S901214A, a random R'(random number for determining a jackpot) which is a hardware random number, a random number for determining a jackpot type (random 1') which is a software random number, and a random number for determining a variable pattern type (random 2') And the random number for determining the fluctuation pattern (random 3') is extracted and stored in the storage area. It should be noted that the random number for determining the fluctuation pattern (random 3') is not extracted in the first start port switch passing process (at the time of starting winning) and stored in advance in the storage area, but is extracted at the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol. You may try to do it. For example, the game control microcomputer 90560 may directly extract a value from the variation pattern determination random number counter for generating the variation pattern determination random number (random 3') in the variation pattern setting process described later. ..

FIG. 47 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of an area (holding storage buffer) for storing random numbers and the like corresponding to the holding storage. As shown in FIG. 47, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit of the number of first reserved storages (4 in this example) is secured in the first reserved storage buffer. Further, in the second hold storage buffer, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the second hold storage number is secured. In this embodiment, the first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer include a random R'(random number for jackpot determination) which is a hardware random number and a random number for jackpot type determination (random 1') which is a software random number. , The random number for determining the variation pattern type (random 2') and the random number for determining the variation pattern (random 3') are stored. The first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer are formed in the RAM 9055.

In this embodiment, a case where a random number value such as a random number for jackpot determination is stored as a hold storage in the first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer is shown, but the predetermined information to be stored as the hold storage is Not limited to random numbers. For example, it may be determined in advance whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit based on a random number for determining a big hit, and the determination result may be stored in the first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer as hold storage. ..

Next, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the time saving flag indicating that the game state is the time saving state (high base state) is set (step S901215A). If it is set, the process proceeds to step S901220A as it is. If the time saving flag is not set, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is 5 or more (step S901216A). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 5 or more (that is, if it is in the big hit game state or the small hit game state), the CPU 9056 proceeds to step S901220A as it is.

If the value of the special symbol process flag is less than 5, a prize-winning effect process is executed in which the fluctuation display result and the fluctuation pattern type when the fluctuation based on the detected start prize is subsequently executed are determined in advance at the start prize (step). S901217A). Then, the CPU 9056 controls to transmit the symbol designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90100 based on the determination result of the effect processing at the time of winning (step S901218A), and transmits the variable category command to the effect control microcomputer 90100. Control is performed (step S901219A). Further, the CPU 9056 controls to transmit the first hold storage number addition designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90100 (step S901220A).

By executing the processes of steps S901218A and S901219A, in this embodiment, the CPU 9056 always specifies a symbol every time the start prize is entered into the first start winning opening 9013 and the winning effect process of step S901217A is executed. Both the command and the variable category command are transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 90100.

Further, in this embodiment, when the processes of steps S901218A to S901220A are executed, a start winning prize is generated in the first starting winning opening 9013 and the winning effect processing of step S901217A is executed, the symbol is designated. A set of three commands, a command, a variable category command, and a first hold storage number addition designation command, is collectively transmitted within one timer interrupt.

However, if the winning effect processing of step S901217A is not executed because it is determined to be Y in step S901215A or step S901216A, the CPU 9056 controls to transmit only the first hold storage number addition designation command in step S901220A. Is performed, and the control to send the winning judgment result specification command (design specification command, variable category command) is not performed. It should be noted that when the winning effect processing in step S901217A is not executed, the winning determination result is specified by setting a value (for example, "FF (H)") indicating that the winning determination result cannot be specified as EXT data. You may send a command (design specification command, variable category command).

Further, in this embodiment, when the process of step S901215A is executed and there is a start prize to the first start winning opening 9013, only when the gaming state is the low base state, step S901217A The production process at the time of winning is executed. Further, in this embodiment, when the process of step S901216A is executed and there is a start prize in the first start winning opening 9013, step S901217A is performed only when it is not in the big hit game state or the small hit game state. The production process at the time of winning is executed. It should be noted that the transition to step S901217A may be performed only in the case of the big hit gaming state, and the transition to step S901217A may be performed in the case of the small hit gaming state to execute the winning effect processing.

Further, in this embodiment, the jackpot gaming state (specific gaming state) is controlled to open the jackpot for a predetermined number of rounds (for example, 15 rounds) after being notified that the jackpot will start. We are in a state until it is notified that the opening of the big winning opening in the final round is finished and the big hit is finished. Specifically, it is a state in which the processes from the large winning opening pre-opening process (see step S90305) to the big hit end process (see step S90307) in the special symbol process process are being executed.

Next, the process of passing the second start port switch will be described with reference to FIG. 46 (B). In the second start port switch passing process executed when the second start port switch 9014a is in the ON state, the CPU 9056 determines whether or not the second hold storage number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the second hold). It is confirmed (whether or not the value of the second hold storage number counter for counting the number of storages is 4) (step S901211B). If the second reserved storage number has reached the upper limit, the process ends as it is.

If the second hold storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 9056 increases the value of the second hold storage number counter by 1 (step S9011212B), and at the same time, the value of the total hold storage number counter for counting the total hold storage number. Is increased by 1 (step S901213B). Next, the CPU 9056 extracts values from the random number circuit 9053 and the counter for generating software random numbers, and executes a process of storing them in the storage area in the second hold storage buffer (see FIG. 47 (B)) (see FIG. 47 (B)). Step S901214B). In the process of step S901214B, a random R'(random number for determining a jackpot) which is a hardware random number, a random number for determining a jackpot type (random 1') which is a software random number, and a random number for determining a variable pattern type (random 2') And the random number for determining the fluctuation pattern (random 3') is extracted and stored in the storage area. It should be noted that the random number for determining the fluctuation pattern (random 3') is not extracted in the second start port switch passing process (at the time of starting winning) and stored in advance in the storage area, but is extracted at the start of fluctuation of the second special symbol. You may try to do it. For example, the game control microcomputer 90560 may directly extract a value from the variation pattern determination random number counter for generating the variation pattern determination random number (random 3') in the variation pattern setting process described later. ..

Next, the CPU 9056 executes the winning effect processing (step S901217B). Then, the CPU 9056 controls to transmit the symbol designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90100 based on the determination result of the effect processing at the time of winning (step S901218B), and transmits the variable category command to the effect control microcomputer 90100. Control is performed (step S901219B). Further, the CPU 9056 controls to transmit the second hold storage number addition designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90100 (step S901220B).

By executing the processes of steps S901218B and S901219B, in this embodiment, the CPU 9056 always specifies a symbol every time the start prize is entered into the second start winning opening 9014 and the winning effect process of step S901217B is executed. Both the command and the variable category command are transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 90100.

Further, in this embodiment, when the processing of steps S901218B to S901220B is executed, the starting winning prize to the second starting winning prize opening 9014 is generated and the winning effect processing of step S901217B is executed, the symbol is designated. A set of three commands, a command, a variable category command, and a second hold storage number addition designation command, is collectively transmitted within one timer interrupt.

In the second start port switch passing process, the same process as in step S901215A may be performed, and if the time is shortened, the winning effect process in step S901217B may not be executed. That is, the winning effect processing in step S901217B may be executed only in the normal state (low base state), and the symbol designation command and the variable category command may be transmitted.

Further, in the second start port switch passing process, the same process as in step S901216A may be performed, and the winning effect process in step S901217B may not be executed during the big hit game. Further, in the second start port switch passing process, the winning effect processing in step S901217B may not be executed (that is, the winning determination process may not be executed for the second special symbol). ..

FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the winning effect processing in steps S901217A and S901217B. In the winning effect processing, the CPU 9056 first compares the big hit determination random numbers (random R') extracted in steps S901214A and S901214B with the normal jackpot determination values shown in the left column of FIG. 34 (A), and they are used. Check if they match (step S90220). In this embodiment, at the timing when the variation of the special symbol and the effect symbol is started, whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit in the special symbol normal processing described later, the big hit type is determined, and the variation pattern is determined in the variation pattern setting process. However, apart from that, at the timing when the game ball starts and wins the first start winning opening 9013 and the second starting winning opening 9014, before the variable display based on the starting winning is started. By executing the effect processing at the time of winning, it is confirmed in advance whether or not a big hit or a small hit is made, and which judgment value range the value of the random number for determining the type of the big hit and the fluctuation pattern type is in. By doing so, the variation display result and the variation pattern type are predicted in advance before the variation display of the effect symbol is executed, and as will be described later, the pre-reading notice effect is executed based on the judgment result at the time of winning. To do.

If the big hit judgment random number (random R') does not match the normal big hit judgment value (N in step S90220), the CPU 9056 sets a probability change flag indicating that the game state is a probability change state (high probability state). It is confirmed whether or not it has been performed (step S90221). If the probability change flag is set, the CPU 9056 compares the jackpot determination random number (random R') extracted in steps S901214A and S901214B with the jackpot determination value at the time of probability change shown in the right column of FIG. 34 (A). Check if they match (step S90222). It should be noted that there is a possibility that a plurality of variable displays may be executed between the time when the start winning is confirmed in step S90221 and whether or not the variable display is actually started until the variable display based on the start winning is actually started. There is. Therefore, the gaming state changes between the time when the start winning is confirmed in step S90221 and the time when the variation display based on the start winning is actually started (for example, the variation start). If a probabilistic jackpot or a sudden probabilistic jackpot occurs before, it may change from the normal state to the probabilistic state.) Therefore, the gaming state determined in step S90221 at the start winning and the gaming state determined at the start of fluctuation (see step S9061 described later) do not always match. In addition, in order to prevent such a discrepancy, the one with a change in the game state in the currently stored hold memory is specified, and the judgment at the time of starting winning is made based on the changed game state. May be good.

If the jackpot determination random number (random R') does not match the jackpot determination value at the time of probability change (N in step S90222), the CPU 9056 has the jackpot determination random number (random R') extracted in steps S901214A and S901214B and FIG. 34. The small hit determination values shown in (B) and (C) are compared with each other, and it is confirmed whether or not they match (step S90223). In this case, the CPU 9056 determines the small hit determination table (first) shown in FIG. 34 (B) when there is a start prize in the first start winning opening 9013 (when the effect processing at the time of winning in step S901217A is executed). It is determined whether or not it matches the small hit determination value set in (for special symbols). Further, when there is a start winning to the second starting winning opening 9014 (when the effect processing at the time of winning in step S901217B is executed), the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. 34 (C). It is determined whether or not it matches the small hit determination value set in.

If the big hit determination random number (random R') does not match the small hit determination value (N in step S90223), the CPU 9056 uses the EXT data "00 (H)" indicating that it is "missing" as a symbol designation command. Perform the setting process (step S90224).

Next, the CPU 9056 performs a process of determining the current gaming state (step S90225). In this embodiment, in step S9022, the CPU 9056 determines whether or not the gaming state is in the probabilistic state and whether or not it is in the time saving state (specifically, whether or not the probabilistic change flag or the time saving flag is set). To judge. It should be noted that, from the time when the start winning is confirmed in step S90225 whether or not it is in the probabilistic state and whether or not it is in the time saving state, there are a plurality of times between the time when the variable display based on the start winning is actually started. Variable display may be performed. Therefore, the game state changes between the time when the start winning is confirmed in step S90225 and whether or not the time is shortened, and the time when the variation display based on the start winning is actually started. (For example, if a probabilistic jackpot or a sudden probabilistic jackpot occurs before the start of fluctuation, the normal state is changed to the probabilistic state). Therefore, the gaming state determined in step S90225 at the start winning and the gaming state determined at the start of fluctuation (see step S9061 described later) do not always match. In addition, in order to prevent such a discrepancy, the one with a change in the game state in the currently stored hold memory is specified, and the judgment at the time of starting winning is made based on the changed game state. May be good.

Then, the CPU 9056 sets each threshold value for disengagement according to the determination result in step S90225 (step S90226). In this embodiment, a threshold value determination program for determining the threshold value is incorporated in advance, and by determining whether or not the threshold value is larger than the threshold value, the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type falls within the range of any determination value. Is determined, and the value of the EXT data to be set in the variable category command shown in FIGS. 42 and 43 is determined.

For example, the CPU 9056 sets a threshold value 219 when it is determined that the gaming state is a probability change state or a time saving state. In this case, the CPU 9056 determines in step S90232 described later whether or not the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is the threshold value 219 or less, and when the threshold value is 219 or less (that is, when it is 1 to 219). Determines to set "08 (H)" as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 42). If the threshold value is not 219 or less (that is, 220 to 251), it is determined that "09 (H)" is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 42).

Further, for example, when the CPU 9056 determines that the gaming state is the normal state, the CPU 9056 sets the threshold values 79, 89, 99, 169, 199, 214 and 229 regardless of the total number of reserved storages. In this case, the CPU 9056 determines in step S90232 described later whether or not the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is the threshold value 79 or less, and when the threshold value is 79 or less (that is, 1 to 79) Determines to set "00 (H)" as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 42). Further, when the threshold value is 89 or less (that is, when it is 80 to 89), it is determined that "01 (H)" is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 42). Further, when the threshold value is 99 or less (that is, when it is 90 to 99), it is determined that "02 (H)" is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 42). Further, when the threshold value is 169 or less (that is, when it is 100 to 169), it is determined that "03 (H)" is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 42). Further, when the threshold value is 199 or less (that is, when it is 170 to 199), it is determined that "04 (H)" is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 42). Further, when the threshold value is 214 or less (that is, when it is 200 to 214), it is determined that "05 (H)" is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 42). Further, when the threshold value is 229 or less (that is, when it is 215 to 229), it is determined that "06 (H)" is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 42). Further, when the threshold value is not 229 or less (that is, when it is 230 to 251), it is determined that "07 (H)" is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 42).

In the example of the threshold value determination shown above, 79, 89, 99, 169, 199, 214 and 229 are determined in order from the smallest threshold value, so that the one determined by the threshold value in the later order is used. It will never fall below the threshold of the previous order. That is, after determining whether or not the threshold value is 79 or less, when determining whether or not the threshold value is 89 or less, the threshold value is not within the range of 1 to 79, which is equal to or less than the threshold value in the previous order, and is 80 to 89. It will be determined whether or not it is within the range of. Further, in this embodiment, the case where the threshold values are determined to be 79, 89, 99, 169, 199, 214 and 229 in ascending order is shown, but conversely, 229, 214, in order from the larger one. It may be determined as 199, 169, 99, 89 and 79. This also applies to the case where the determination using the other threshold values shown below is performed.

It should be noted that the threshold value in the normal state (low probability / low base state) may always be set without determining the gaming state in step S90225. Even with such a configuration, the range of judgment values is shared at least with respect to the fluctuation pattern type that is "out of super reach", so it is judged whether or not it is "out of super reach". be able to.

When the big hit determination random number (random R') matches the small hit determination value (Y in step S90223), the CPU 9056 designates the EXT data "04 (H)" indicating that it is a "small hit". The process of setting the command is performed (step S90227).

Next, the CPU 9056 sets a threshold value for small hits (step S90228). In this embodiment, the CPU 9056 shall set the threshold value 251 and, in step S90232 described later, determines that the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is equal to or less than the threshold value 251 (1 to 251). , It is determined that "18 (H)" is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 43). In the case of a small hit, it may be determined that the EXT data "18 (H)" is set as it is without performing the threshold value determination.

When the jackpot determination random number (random R') matches the jackpot determination value in step S90220 or step S9022, the CPU 9056 hits the jackpot based on the jackpot type determination random number (random 1') extracted in steps S901214A and S901214B. (Step S90229). In this case, the CPU 9056 determines the jackpot type as shown in FIG. 34 (D) when there is a start prize in the first start prize opening 9013 (when the effect processing at the time of winning in step S901217A is executed). (For special symbol) 90131a is used to determine whether the jackpot type is "normal jackpot", "probability variation jackpot", or "sudden probability variation jackpot". Further, when there is a start winning to the second starting winning opening 9014 (when the effect processing at the time of winning in step S901217B is executed), the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. 34 (E). Using 90131b, it is determined whether the jackpot type is "normal jackpot", "probability variation jackpot", or "sudden probability variation jackpot".

Next, the CPU 9056 performs a process of setting EXT data according to the determination result of the jackpot type in the symbol designation command (step S90230). In this case, when it is determined that the "normal jackpot" is obtained, the CPU 9056 performs a process of setting the EXT data "01 (H)" indicating that the "normal jackpot" is obtained in the symbol designation command. Further, when it is determined that the "probability variation jackpot" is obtained, the CPU 9056 performs a process of setting the EXT data "02 (H)" indicating that the "probability variation jackpot" is obtained in the symbol designation command. Further, when it is determined that the "sudden probability change big hit" is obtained, the CPU 9056 performs a process of setting the EXT data "03 (H)" indicating that the "sudden probability change big hit" is to be set in the symbol designation command.

Then, the CPU 9056 sets each threshold value for the jackpot according to the jackpot type determined in step S9022 (step S90231).

For example, the CPU 9056 sets the thresholds 74 and 149 when it determines that it is a "normal jackpot". In this case, the CPU 9056 determines in step S9022, which will be described later, whether or not the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is the threshold value 74 or less, and if the threshold value is 74 or less (that is, 1 to 74). Determines to set "10 (H)" as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 43). Further, when the threshold value is 149 or less (that is, when it is 75 to 149), it is determined that "11 (H)" is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 43). Further, when the threshold value is not 149 or less (that is, when it is 150 to 251), it is determined that "12 (H)" is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 43).

Further, for example, the CPU 9056 sets the threshold values 38 and 79 when it determines that the "probability variation jackpot" is determined. In this case, the CPU 9056 determines in step S9022, which will be described later, whether or not the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is the threshold value 38 or less, and when the threshold value is 38 or less (that is, when it is 1 to 38). Determines to set "13 (H)" as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 43). Further, when the threshold value is 79 or less (that is, when it is 39 to 79), it is determined that "14 (H)" is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 43). Further, when the threshold value is not 79 or less (that is, when it is 80 to 251), it is determined that "15 (H)" is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 43).

Further, for example, when the CPU 9056 determines that the "sudden probability change jackpot" is determined, the CPU 9056 sets the threshold value 100. In this case, the CPU 9056 determines in step S9022, which will be described later, whether or not the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is the threshold value 100 or less, and when the threshold value is 100 or less (that is, when it is 1 to 100). Determines to set "16 (H)" as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 43). Further, when the threshold value is not 100 or less (that is, when it is 101 to 251), it is determined that "17 (H)" is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 43).

Next, the CPU 9056 uses the threshold values set in steps S90226, S90228, and S90231 and the random number for determining the variable pattern type (random 2') extracted in steps S901214A and S901214B, and the value of the random number for determining the variable pattern type is determined. It is determined whether or not it is within the range of the determination value of (step S90232).

In addition, in steps S90226, S90228, and S90231, instead of setting a predetermined threshold value, a fluctuation pattern type determination table (see FIGS. 35 and 36) is set, and the fluctuation pattern type set in step S90232 is set. The determination table may be used to determine the range of values of the random number for determining the variation pattern type and which variation pattern type is used.

Then, the CPU 9056 performs a process of setting the EXT data according to the determination result in the variable category command (step S90233). Specifically, the CPU 9056 "00 (H)" to "0B (H)", "10" as shown in FIGS. 42 and 43, depending on which fluctuation pattern type is determined in step S90232. A process of setting any value of "(H)" to "18 (H)" in the EXT data of the variable category command is performed.

In this embodiment, even if it is determined that a big hit or a small hit is obtained in the winning determination, the case where the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is uniformly determined is shown. If it is determined that the hit is a big hit or a small hit, the range of the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type may not be determined. Then, a symbol designation command indicating that the winning is determined to be a big hit or a small hit may be transmitted, and a variable category command comprehensively indicating that the variable pattern type is a big hit or a small hit may be transmitted. .. Then, for example, the effect control microcomputer 90100 is not shown to be a specific variation pattern type, but is comprehensively shown to be one of the jackpot variation pattern types. Based on the receipt of the category command, the pre-reading notice effect described later may be executed.

49 and 50 are flowcharts showing a special symbol normal process (step S90300) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol normal processing, the CPU 9056 confirms the value of the total pending storage number (step S9051). Specifically, the count value of the total pending storage counter is checked. If the total number of pending storages is 0 and the customer waiting demo designation command has not yet been transmitted, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not 30 seconds have passed since the last executed variation display was completed (step). S9051A). Whether or not 30 seconds have passed since the last execution of the fluctuation display was determined is determined by, for example, setting a value corresponding to 30 seconds in a predetermined timer when Y is first determined in step S9051. It can be determined by checking whether or not the timer has timed out. If 30 seconds have passed, the CPU 9056 controls to transmit the customer waiting demo designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90100 (step S9051B), and ends the process. For example, when the CPU 9056 transmits the customer waiting demo designation command in step S9051B, the CPU 9056 sets the customer waiting demo designation command transmission flag indicating that the customer waiting demo designation command has been transmitted. Then, when the special symbol normal processing after the next timer interrupt is executed after the customer waiting demo specification command is transmitted, the customer waits again based on the fact that the customer wait demo specification command sent flag is set. You can control not to send the demo specification command. Further, in this case, the customer waiting demo designation command sent flag may be reset when the next variation display of the special symbol is started. Further, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which a customer waiting demo designation command is transmitted 30 seconds after the last executed variation display is finished to start the customer waiting demonstration display, but at 30 seconds. Not limited to this, for example, the customer waiting demonstration display may be started after 1 minute has passed.

If the total number of reserved storages is not 0, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the second number of reserved storages is 0 (step S9052). Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the second reserved storage counter is 0. If the second reserved storage number is not 0, the CPU 9056 is a special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether the special symbol process processing is being performed for the first special symbol or the special symbol process processing is being performed for the second special symbol). Is set to the data indicating "second" (step S9053). If the second reserved storage number is 0 (that is, when only the first reserved storage number is accumulated), the CPU 9066 sets the data indicating "first" in the special symbol pointer (step S9054).

In this embodiment, by executing the processes of steps S9052 to S9054, the variation display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed with respect to the variation display of the first special symbol. In other words, the second start condition for starting the variable display of the second special symbol is controlled to be satisfied in preference to the first start condition for starting the variable display of the first special symbol.

When the variation display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed as shown in this embodiment, the jackpot determination random number (random R') is used in the winning effect processing shown in FIG. 48. The value of may be executed only for comparing the value of with the jackpot determination value in the low probability state, and may not be compared with the jackpot determination value in the probability variation state (high probability state) (specifically, step S90220). It is possible to execute only the process of (1) and not perform the processes of steps S90221 and S90222). With such a configuration, when the variation display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed, between the jackpot determination result in the winning determination and the jackpot determination result at the actual start of variation. It is possible to prevent the deviation from occurring.

Next, the CPU 9056 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 9055 and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 9055 (step S9055). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 9056 has each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = 1 in the first reserved storage buffer. Is read and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 9055. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 9056 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = 1 in the second reserved storage buffer. It is stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 9055.

Then, the CPU 9056 subtracts 1 from the count value of the hold storage counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step S9056). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 9056 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first hold storage counter, and in the hold specific area and the first hold storage buffer. Shift the contents of each storage area. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the count value of the second hold storage counter is subtracted by 1, and the contents of the hold specific area and the contents of each storage area in the second hold storage buffer are shifted. To do.

That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 9056 is placed in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved storage buffer of the RAM 9055. Each stored random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n-1. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", each stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved storage buffer of the RAM 9055. The random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n-1. Further, the CPU 9056 adds up the values (values indicating "first" or "second") stored in the storage area corresponding to the total number of pending storages = m (m = 2 to 8) in the reserved specific area. Stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of reserved storage = m-1.

Therefore, the order in which each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved storage number (or each second reserved storage number) is always the first reserved storage number (or the first reserved storage number). The order of the second reserved memory) = 1, 2, 3, 4 is matched. Further, the order in which the values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the total number of reserved storages are extracted always coincides with the order of the total number of reserved storages = 1 to 8.

Then, the CPU 9056 reduces the value of the total pending storage number by 1. That is, the count value of the total pending storage counter is subtracted by 1 (step S9058). The CPU 9056 stores the value of the total pending storage counter before the count value is subtracted by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 9055.

Further, the CPU 9056 controls to transmit a background designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90100 according to the current gaming state (step S9060). In this case, the CPU 9056 controls to transmit the probability change state background designation command when the probability change flag indicating the probability change state is set. Further, the CPU 9056 controls to transmit only the time saving flag indicating that the time saving state is set, and if the probability change flag is not set, the time saving state background designation command is transmitted. Further, the CPU 9056 controls to transmit the normal state background designation command if neither the probability change flag nor the time saving flag is set.

Specifically, when the CPU 9056 transmits an effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 90100, the CPU 9056 assigns the address of the command transmission table (previously set in the ROM for each command) corresponding to the effect control command. Set to the pointer. Then, the address of the command transmission table corresponding to the effect control command is set in the pointer, and the effect control command is transmitted in the effect control command control process (step S9028). In this embodiment, when the special symbol variation is started, the background specification command, the variation pattern command, the display result specification command, and the hold storage number subtraction specification command (first hold storage number subtraction) are used for each timer interrupt. It will be transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 90100 in the order of the designated command or the second reserved storage number subtraction designated command). Specifically, when starting the variation of the special symbol, the background specification command is first transmitted, the variation pattern command is transmitted after 4 ms, the display result specification command is transmitted after 4 ms, and then 4 ms later. The hold storage number subtraction designation command (first hold storage number subtraction designation command or second hold storage number subtraction designation command) is transmitted. When the special symbol variation is started, the symbol variation specification command (first symbol variation specification command, second symbol variation specification command) is also transmitted, but the symbol variation specification command is the same timer interrupt as the variation pattern command. Is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 90100.

In the special symbol normal processing, first, the data indicating "first" indicating that the processing is executed for the first start winning opening 9013, that is, the "first" indicating that the processing is executed for the first special symbol. ", Or data indicating" second "indicating that the process is executed for the second start winning opening 9014, that is," second "indicating that the process is executed for the second special symbol. The data is set in the special symbol pointer. Then, in the subsequent processing in the special symbol process processing, the processing according to the data set in the special symbol pointer is executed. Therefore, the processing of steps S90300 to S90310 can be shared between the case where the first special symbol is targeted and the case where the second special symbol is targeted.

Next, the CPU 9056 reads a random R'(random number for jackpot determination) from the random number buffer area and executes the jackpot determination module. In this case, the CPU 9056 is for jackpot determination extracted in step S901214A of the first start port switch passage process and step S901214B of the second start port switch pass process and stored in advance in the first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer. Read the random number and make a big hit judgment. The big hit judgment module compares a predetermined big hit judgment value or small hit judgment value (see FIG. 34) with a random number for big hit judgment, and if they match, executes a process of deciding to make a big hit or a small hit. It is a program to do. That is, it is a program that executes processing of big hit determination and small hit determination.

In the jackpot determination process, when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state, the probability of becoming a jackpot is higher than when the gaming state is in the non-probability state (normal state). Specifically, the number of jackpot judgment values is probablely changed between the jackpot judgment table at the time of probability change (the table in which the numerical value on the right side of FIG. 34 (A) in ROM 9054 is set) in which a large number of jackpot judgment values are set in advance. A normal time jackpot determination table (a table in which the numerical value on the left side of FIG. 34 (A) in ROM 9054 is set) is provided, which is set to be less than the hour jackpot determination table. Then, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the gaming state is in the probabilistic state, and when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state, the CPU 9056 performs a jackpot determination process using the probabilistic jackpot determination table, and the gaming state is normal. When it is in the state, the jackpot determination process is performed using the normal jackpot determination table. That is, when the value of the big hit determination random number (random R') matches any of the big hit determination values shown in FIG. 34 (A), the CPU 9056 determines that the special symbol is a big hit. If it is decided to make a big hit (step S9061), the process proceeds to step S9071. It should be noted that deciding whether or not to make a big hit means deciding whether or not to shift to the big hit game state, but deciding whether or not to make the stop symbol on the special symbol display a big hit symbol. But also.

It should be noted that confirmation of whether or not the current gaming state is in the probabilistic state is performed depending on whether or not the probabilistic flag is set. The probability change flag is set when the game state is changed to the probability change state, and is reset when the probability change state is finished. Specifically, it is determined to be a "probability change jackpot" or a "sudden change jackpot", and is set in the process of ending the jackpot game. Then, after the big hit game is completed, it is reset when the next big hit occurs.

If the value of the big hit determination random number (random R') does not match any of the big hit determination values (N in step S9061), the CPU 9056 uses the small hit determination table (see FIGS. 34 (B) and 34 (C)). Use to perform small hit determination processing. That is, when the value of the big hit determination random number (random R') matches any of the small hit determination values shown in FIGS. 34 (B) and 34 (C), the CPU 9056 determines that the special symbol is a small hit. .. In this case, the CPU 9056 confirms the data indicated by the special symbol pointer, and when the data indicated by the special symbol pointer is "first", the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) shown in FIG. 34 (B). ) Is used to determine whether or not to make a small hit. When the data indicated by the special symbol pointer is "second", the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. 34 (C) is used to determine whether or not to make a small hit. .. Then, when it is decided to make a small hit (step S9062), the CPU 9056 sets a small hit flag indicating that it is a small hit (step S9063), and proceeds to step S9075.

If the value of the random R'does not match either the big hit determination value or the small hit determination value (N in step S9062), that is, if it is out of the range, the process proceeds to step S9075 as it is.

In step S9071, the CPU 9056 sets a jackpot flag indicating that it is a jackpot. Then, as the table used to determine the jackpot type to one of the plurality of types, the jackpot type determination table indicated by the special symbol pointer is selected (step S9072). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 9056 selects the jackpot type determination table 90131a for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 34 (D). Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 9056 selects the jackpot type determination table 90131b for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 34 (E).

Next, the CPU 9056 uses the selected jackpot type determination table to use the type (“normal jackpot”, “normal jackpot”, “normal jackpot”, which corresponds to a value that matches the value of the random number (random 1 ′) for determining the jackpot type stored in the random number buffer area. "Probability change jackpot" or "Sudden probability change jackpot") is determined as the type of jackpot (step S9073). In this case, the CPU 9056 determines the jackpot type extracted in step S901214A of the first start port switch passage process and step S901214B of the second start port switch pass process and stored in advance in the first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer. Read the random number to determine the jackpot type. Further, in this case, as shown in FIGS. 34 (D) and 34 (E), when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, it is compared with the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. Therefore, the ratio of suddenly changing jackpots is high.

Further, the CPU 9056 sets the data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 9055 (step S9074). For example, when the jackpot type is "normal jackpot", "01" is set as the data indicating the jackpot type, and when the jackpot type is "probability variation jackpot", "02" is set as the data indicating the jackpot type. When the jackpot type is "sudden probability change jackpot", "03" is set as the data indicating the jackpot type.

Next, the CPU 9056 determines the stop symbol of the special symbol (step S9075). Specifically, when neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, "-", which is an outlier symbol, is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol. When the jackpot flag is set, one of the jackpot symbols "1", "3", "7", and "9" is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol according to the determination result of the jackpot type. To do. That is, when the jackpot type is determined to be "sudden probability change jackpot", "1" is determined to be the stop symbol of the special symbol, and when it is determined to be "normal jackpot", "3" is determined to be the stop symbol of the special symbol. Then, when the "probability change jackpot" is determined, "7" is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol. When the small hit flag is set, the small hit symbol "5" is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol.

In this embodiment, the case where the jackpot type is first determined and the stop symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the determined jackpot type is determined is shown, but the method of determining the jackpot type and the stop symbol of the special symbol is this. It is not limited to the one shown in the embodiment. For example, if a table in which the stop symbol of the special symbol is associated with the jackpot type is prepared in advance and the stop symbol of the special symbol is first determined based on the random number for determining the jackpot type, the corresponding jackpot is determined based on the determination result. It may be configured so that the type is also determined.

Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern setting process (step S90301) (step S9076).

FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing a variation pattern setting process (step S90301) in the special symbol process process. In the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the jackpot flag is set (step S9091). When the jackpot flag is set, the CPU 9056 sets the jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 90132A to 90132C as a table used to determine the variation pattern type to one of a plurality of types (FIG. 35 (A)). ) To (see (C)) (step S9092). Then, the process proceeds to step S90100.

If the big hit flag is not set, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S9093). When the small hit flag is set, the CPU 9056 sets the small hit variation pattern type determination table 90132D as a table used to determine the variation pattern type to one of a plurality of types (FIG. 35 (D). ) Is selected (step S9094). Then, the process proceeds to step S90100.

If the small hit flag is not set, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the time saving flag indicating that the time saving state is set is set (step S9095). In this embodiment, the time saving flag is set when the time saving state is changed at the end of the big hit game based on the normal big hit, and the time saving state is also set at the end of the big hit game based on the probability change big hit. Since it is also transferred to, the time saving flag is set. Therefore, when it is determined as Y in step S9095, in addition to the case where the control is performed only in the time saving state after the end of the big hit game based on the normal big hit, the control is performed in the time saving state together with the probability change state after the end of the big hit game based on the probability change big hit. There are times when it has been done.

If the time saving flag is not set (N in step S9095), that is, if the gaming state is the normal state, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the total number of pending storages is 3 or more (step S9096). If the total number of pending storage is less than 3 (N in step S9096), the CPU 9056 sets the deviation pattern type determination table 90135A (N of step S9096) as a table used to determine the variation pattern type to be one of a plurality of types. (See FIG. 36 (A)) is selected (step S9097). Then, the process proceeds to step S90100.

When the total number of pending storages is 3 or more (Y in step S9096), the CPU 9056 is a table used to determine the variation pattern type to be one of a plurality of types, which is a variation pattern type determination table for loss. Select 90135B (see FIG. 36B) (step S9098). Then, the process proceeds to step S90100.

When the time saving flag is set (Y in step S9095), that is, when the gaming state is the probability variation state or the time saving state, the CPU 9056 determines the variation pattern type to be one of a plurality of types. As the table to be used, the deviation pattern type determination table 90135C (see FIG. 36C) is selected (step S9099). Then, the process proceeds to step S90100.

In this embodiment, when the processes of steps S9095 to S9099 are executed and the game state is the normal state and the total number of pending storages is 3 or more, the deviation variation shown in FIG. 36B is shown. The pattern type determination table 90135B is selected. Further, when the gaming state is the probability change state or the time saving state, the deviation pattern type determination table 90135C shown in FIG. 36C is selected. In this case, non-reach CA2'-3 may be determined as the variation pattern type in the process of step S90100 described later, and when the variation pattern type of non-reach CA2'-3 is determined, the process of step S90102. As the fluctuation pattern, the non-reach PA1'-2 of the shortened fluctuation is determined (see FIG. 38). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the game state is a probability change state or a time saving state, or when the total number of reserved storages is 3 or more, the variation display of the shortened variation may be performed. In this embodiment, a variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation used in a probability variation state or a time saving state (see FIG. 36C) and a variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation based on the number of reserved storages (FIG. FIG. Although the case where the table is different from that of 36 (B)) is shown, a common table may be used as the variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation.

In this embodiment, even when the game state is a probability change state or a time saving state, when the total pending memory number is almost 0 (for example, when it is 0, 0 or 1). May not display the variation of the shortened variation. In this case, for example, when the CPU 9056 determines Y in step S9095, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the total reserved storage number is approximately 0, and if the total reserved storage number is approximately 0, the variation pattern type for loss is lost. The determination table 90135A (see FIG. 36 (A)) may be selected.

Next, the CPU 9056 reads the random number 2'(random number for determining the variation pattern type) from the random number buffer area (first hold storage buffer or second hold storage buffer), and selects it in the process of steps S9092, S9094, S9097, S9098, or S9099. By referring to the table, the variation pattern type is determined to be one of a plurality of types (step S90100).

Next, the CPU 9056 hit variation pattern determination tables 90137A and 90137B (see FIG. 37) as tables used to determine the variation pattern to one of a plurality of types based on the determination result of the variation pattern type in step S90100. ), One of the out-of-order fluctuation pattern determination tables 90138A (see FIG. 38) is selected (step S90101). Further, the random number 3'(random number for determining the variation pattern) is read from the random number buffer area (first reserved storage buffer or the second reserved storage buffer), and the variation is changed by referring to the variation pattern determination table selected in the process of step S90101. The pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of types (step S90102). When the random number 3'(random number for determining the variation pattern) is not extracted at the timing of the start winning, the CPU 9056 is for determining the variation pattern for generating the random number for determining the variation pattern (random number 3'). A value may be extracted directly from the random number counter, and the fluctuation pattern may be determined based on the extracted random number value.

Next, the CPU 9056 controls to transmit the symbol variation designation command indicated by the special symbol pointer to the effect control microcomputer 90100 (step S90103). Specifically, the CPU 9056 controls to transmit the first symbol variation designation command when the special symbol pointer indicates "first". Further, the CPU 9056 controls to transmit the second symbol variation designation command when the special symbol pointer indicates "second". Further, the CPU 9056 controls to transmit the effect control command (variation pattern command) corresponding to the determined variation pattern to the effect control microcomputer 90100 (step S90104).

Next, the CPU 9056 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time corresponding to the selected fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation time timer formed in the RAM 9055 (step S90105). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the display result designation command transmission process (step S90302) (step S90106).

In the case where it is determined to be out of order, instead of suddenly determining the fluctuation pattern type, it may be determined whether or not to reach by a lottery process using a random number for reach determination. Then, the processes of steps S9095 to S90100 may be executed based on the determination result of whether or not to reach, and the variation pattern type may be determined. In this case, a variation pattern type determination table for non-reach (including the variation pattern types of non-reach CA2'-1 to non-reach CA2'-3 shown in FIG. 36) and a variation pattern type determination table for reach (which includes the variation pattern types for non-reach) (in this case). (Including the fluctuation pattern types of normal CA2'-4 to normal CA2'-6 and super CA2'-7 shown in FIG. 36) are prepared, and any fluctuation pattern type determination is made based on the reach determination result. A table may be selected to determine the variation pattern type.

Further, when deciding whether or not to reach by lottery processing using a random number for reach determination, the reach is determined according to the total number of reserved storages (the number of first reserved storages or the second number of reserved storages may be used). Reach determination tables having different selection ratios may be selected to determine whether or not to reach so that the reach probability decreases as the number of reserved memories increases. In this case, does the CPU 9056 match the determination value assigned to the common range of the reach determination table in, for example, determining whether or not the effect is "out of super reach" or "out of reach" in the winning effect processing? By determining whether or not it reaches, it may be determined in advance whether or not it will reach. In addition, considering that the execution rate of the advance notice effect is reduced, as shown in this embodiment, “super reach is lost” depending on the variation pattern type without performing the lottery process using the reach determination random number. It is preferable that the pre-reading notice effect is performed by preliminarily determining whether or not the result is "non-reach out".

FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the display result designation command transmission process (step S90302). In the display result designation command transmission process, the CPU 9056 transmits one of the display result 1 designation to display result 5 designation production control commands (see FIG. 39) according to the determined type of big hit, small hit, and loss. Control to do. Specifically, the CPU 9056 first confirms whether or not the jackpot flag is set (step S90110). If it is not set, the process proceeds to step S90116. When the jackpot flag is set and the jackpot type is "normal jackpot", control is performed to transmit the display result 2 designation command (steps S90111 and S90112). In addition, whether or not it is a "normal jackpot" can be specifically determined by confirming whether or not the data set in the jackpot type buffer is "01" in step S9074 of the special symbol normal processing. .. Further, the CPU 9056 controls to transmit the display result 3 designation command when the type of the jackpot is "probability variation jackpot" (steps S90113 and S90114). In addition, whether or not it is a "probability variation jackpot" can be specifically determined by confirming whether or not the data set in the jackpot type buffer is "02" in step S9074 of the special symbol normal processing. .. Then, when it is neither a "normal jackpot" nor a "probability jackpot" (that is, when it is a "sudden probability variable jackpot"), the CPU 9056 controls to transmit the display result 4 designated command (step S90115).

On the other hand, when the big hit flag is not set (N in step S90110), the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S90116). If the small hit flag is set, the CPU 9056 controls to transmit the display result 5 designation command (step S90117). When the small hit flag is not set (N in step S90116), that is, when it is off, the CPU 9056 controls to transmit the display result 1 designation command (step S90118).

Then, the CPU 9056 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol changing process (step S90303) (step S90119).

FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing a special symbol changing process (step S90303) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol change processing, the CPU 9056 first confirms whether or not the hold storage number subtraction designation command (first hold storage number subtraction designation command or second hold storage number subtraction designation command) has already been transmitted (). Step S901121). Whether or not the hold storage number subtraction designation command has already been transmitted indicates, for example, that the hold storage number subtraction designation command has been transmitted when the hold storage number subtraction designation command is transmitted in step S901122 described later. The storage number subtraction designation command transmitted flag may be set, and in step S901121, it may be confirmed whether or not the hold storage number subtraction designation command transmitted flag is set. Further, in this case, the set hold storage number subtraction specification command transmission flag should be reset by the special symbol stop processing or the jackpot end processing described later when the variable display of the special symbol is terminated or the jackpot is terminated. Just do it.

Next, if the hold storage number subtraction designation command has not been transmitted, the CPU 9056 controls to send the hold storage number subtraction designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90100 (step S901122). In this case, when a value indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 9056 controls to transmit the first hold storage number subtraction designation command. Further, when a value indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 9056 controls to transmit the second reserved storage number subtraction designation command.

Next, the CPU 9056 subtracts 1 from the fluctuation time timer (step S901125), and when the fluctuation time timer times out (step S901126), controls to send a symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90100 (step S901127). Then, the CPU 9056 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol stop process (step S90304) (step S901128). If the variable time timer has not timed out, the process ends as it is.

FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing a special symbol stop process (step S90304) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the jackpot flag is set (step S90131). When the jackpot flag is set, the CPU 9056, if set, has a probability variation flag indicating that it is in a probability variation state, a time reduction flag indicating that it is in a time reduction state, and the number of times the special symbol can be changed in the time reduction state. The time reduction counter indicating the above is reset (step S90132), and control is performed to send a jackpot start designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90100 (step S90133). Specifically, when the type of jackpot is "normal jackpot", the jackpot start 1 designation command (command A001 (H)) is transmitted. If the type of jackpot is "probability variation jackpot", the jackpot start 2 designation command (command A002 (H)) is transmitted. If the type of big hit is suddenly probable big hit, a small hit / suddenly probable big hit start designation command (command A003 (H)) is transmitted. Whether the jackpot type is "normal jackpot", "probability variation jackpot", or "sudden probability variation jackpot" is data indicating the jackpot type stored in the RAM 9055 (data stored in the jackpot type buffer). Judgment is based on.

Further, a value corresponding to the jackpot display time (time for notifying the occurrence of the jackpot, for example, in the effect display device 909) is set in the jackpot display time timer (step S90134). In addition, the number of times of opening of the large winning opening opening counter is set (for example, 15 times in the case of "normal big hit" or "probability change big hit", and 2 times in the case of "sudden change big hit") (step S90135). .. In addition, the round time per round in the jackpot game is also set. Specifically, in the case of a sudden big hit, 0.1 seconds is set as the round time, and in the case of a normal big hit or a probable big hit, 29 seconds is set as the round time. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the large winning opening pre-opening process (step S90305) (step S90136).

If the jackpot flag is not set in step S9011, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the value of the time reduction counter indicating the variable number of times of the special symbol in the time reduction state is 0 (step S90137). If the value of the time reduction counter is not 0, the CPU 9056 decrements the value of the time reduction counter by -1 (step S90138). Then, when the value of the time reduction counter after subtraction becomes 0 (step S90139), the CPU 9056 resets the time reduction flag (step S90140).

Next, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S90141). If the small hit flag is set, the CPU 9056 transmits a small hit / sudden probability change big hit start designation command (command A003 (H)) to the effect control microcomputer 90100 (step S90142). Further, a value corresponding to the small hit display time (time for notifying the occurrence of the small hit by, for example, the effect display device 909) is set in the small hit display time timer (step S90143). Further, the number of times of opening (for example, 2 times) is set in the large winning opening opening number counter (step S90144). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit start pre-processing (step S90308) (step S90145).

If the small hit flag is not set (N in step S90141), the CPU 9056 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step S90300) (step S90146).

FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing a jackpot end process (step S90307) in the special symbol process process. In the jackpot end processing, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the jackpot end display timer is set (step S90160), and if the jackpot end display timer is set, the process proceeds to step S90164. If the jackpot end display timer is not set, the jackpot flag is reset (step S90161), and control is performed to send a jackpot end designation command (step S90162). Here, if it is a "normal jackpot", a jackpot end 1 designation command (command A301 (H)) is transmitted, and if it is a "probability variation jackpot", a jackpot end 2 designation command (command A302 (H)) is transmitted. ) Is transmitted, and if it is a "sudden probability change big hit", a small hit / sudden probability change big hit end designation command (command A303 (H)) is transmitted. Then, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the jackpot end display is being performed on the image display device 909 (big hit end display time) is set in the jackpot end display timer (step S90163), and the process is terminated.

In step S90164, the value of the jackpot end display timer is subtracted by 1. Then, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step S90165). If it has not passed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (Y in step S90165), the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the jackpot game to be completed this time is based on the normal jackpot (step S90166). Whether or not the jackpot game based on the normal jackpot is terminated is specifically determined by whether or not the data set in the jackpot type buffer in step S9074 of the special symbol normal processing is "01". It can be judged by checking. If the jackpot game based on the normal jackpot is terminated (Y in step S90166), the CPU 9056 sets the time saving flag to shift the game state to the time saving state (step S90167). Further, the CPU 9056 sets a predetermined number of times (100 times in this example) in the time reduction counter (step S90168).

Unless the jackpot game based on the normal jackpot is terminated (that is, when the jackpot game based on the probability variation jackpot or the sudden probability variation jackpot is terminated), the CPU 9056 sets the probability variation flag to change the gaming state to the probability variation state. Along with the transition (step S90169), the time saving flag is set to shift the gaming state to the time saving state (step S90170).

Then, the CPU 9056 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step S90300) (step S90171).

In this embodiment, by executing the above processing, when the probability change state is controlled, the time saving state is also controlled. Therefore, the game state is the normal state (low probability / low base state). ), Time saving state (low probability / high base state), and probability variation state (high probability / high base state).

FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing an example of a program of the special symbol display control process (step S9032) executed by the game control microcomputer 90560 (specifically, CPU 9056) mounted on the main board 9031. In the special symbol display control process, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is 3 (step S903201). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 3 (that is, if the processing during special symbol change is being executed), the CPU 9056 sets the special symbol display control data for the special symbol change display for setting the special symbol display control data. A process of setting or updating the output buffer is performed (step S903202). In this case, the CPU 9056 sets or updates special symbol display control data for variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) indicated by the special symbol pointer. For example, if the fluctuation speed is 1 frame / 0.2 seconds, the value of the special symbol display control data set in the output buffer is incremented by 1 every 0.2 seconds. After that, the display control process (see step S9022) is executed, and the drive signal is output to the special symbol indicators 908a and 908b according to the contents of the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data. The variable display of the special symbol on the special symbol indicators 908a and 908b is executed.

If the value of the special symbol process flag is not 3, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 (step S903203). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 (that is, when the process shifts to the special symbol stop processing), the CPU 9056 stops and displays the stop symbol of the special symbol set in the special symbol normal processing. A process of setting the display control data in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data is performed (step S903204). In this case, the CPU 9056 sets the special symbol display control data for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) indicated by the special symbol pointer. After that, the display control process (see step S9022) is executed, and the drive signal is output to the special symbol indicators 908a and 908b according to the contents of the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data. The stop symbol of the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the special symbol indicators 908a and 908b. Since the setting data is not changed after the process of step S903204 is executed and the special symbol display control data for the stop symbol display is set, the latest special symbol display control data is set in the display control process of step S9022. Based on this, the latest stop symbol will continue to be stopped and displayed until the next variable display is started. Further, if the value of the special symbol process flag is either 2 or 3 in step S903201 (that is, if it is either the display result designation command transmission process or the special symbol change processing), the special symbol change display is used. The special symbol display control data may be updated. In this case, in order to prevent a discrepancy between the fluctuation time recognized by the game control microcomputer 90560 and the fluctuation time recognized by the effect control microcomputer 90100, the display result designation command transmission process also fluctuates. It may be configured to subtract 1 from the time timer.

In this embodiment, the case where the special symbol display control data is set in the output buffer according to the value of the special symbol process flag is shown, but in the special symbol process processing, the start flag is set at the start of the change of the special symbol. At the same time, the end flag may be set at the end of the change of the special symbol. Then, in the special symbol display control process (step S9032), the CPU 9056 starts updating the value of the special symbol display control data based on the start flag being set, and is based on the fact that the end flag is set. It is also possible to set special symbol display control data for stopping and displaying the stop symbol.

Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the effect control microcomputer 90100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 90101) as the effect control means mounted on the effect control board 9080. When the power is turned on, the effect control CPU 90101 starts executing the main process. In the main process, first, the initialization process for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing the timer for determining the activation interval (for example, 4 ms) of the effect control is performed (step S90701). .. After that, the effect control CPU 90101 shifts to the loop process for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (step S90702). When the timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 90101 sets the timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set in the main process, the effect control CPU 90101 clears the flag (step S90703) and executes the following effect control process.

In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 90101 first analyzes the received effect control command and sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (command analysis process: step S90704).

Next, the effect control CPU 90101 performs the effect control process process (step S90705). In the effect control process process, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from each process according to the control state, and the display control of the effect display device 909 is executed.

Next, the effect control CPU 90101 performs the fourth symbol process process (step S90706). In the fourth symbol process process, the process corresponding to the current control state (fourth symbol process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state in the fourth symbol display areas 909c and 909d of the effect display device 909. The display control of the fourth symbol is executed.

Next, a random number update process for updating the count value of the counter for generating a random number such as a random number for determining a jackpot symbol is executed (step S90707). After that, the process proceeds to step S90702.

FIG. 58 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a command reception buffer for storing an effect control command received from the game control microcomputer 90560 of the main board 9031. In this example, a ring buffer type command reception buffer capable of storing six 2-byte production control commands is used. Therefore, the command reception buffer is composed of a 12-byte area of reception command buffers 1 to 12. Then, a command reception number counter is used to indicate in which area the received command is stored. The command reception number counter takes a value from 0 to 11. It does not necessarily have to be in the ring buffer format.

The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 90560 is received by the interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal, and is stored in the buffer area formed in the RAM. In the command analysis process, which command (see FIGS. 39 and 40) is the effect control command stored in the buffer area is analyzed. The interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal is executed in preference to the timer interrupt process executed every 4 ms.

59 to 61 are flowcharts showing a specific example of the command analysis process (step S90704). The effect control command received from the main board 9031 is stored in the received command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 90101 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 90101 first confirms whether or not the received command is stored in the command reception buffer (step S90611). Whether or not it is stored is determined by comparing the value of the command reception count counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 90101 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step S90612). After reading, the value of the read pointer is set to +2 (step S90613). The reason for +2 is that it reads 2 bytes (1 command) at a time.

If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (step S90614), the effect control CPU 90101 stores the received variation pattern command in the variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM (step S90615). Then, the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S90616).

If the received effect control command is a display result specification command (step S90617), the effect control CPU 90101 forms the received display result specification command (display result 1 designation command to display result 6 designation command) in the RAM. It is stored in the display result specification command storage area (step S90618).

If the received effect control command is a symbol confirmation designation command (step S90619), the effect control CPU 90101 sets the confirmation command reception flag (step S90620).

If the received effect control command is a jackpot start designation command (commands A001 to A002 (H)) (step S90621), the effect control CPU 90101 sets the jackpot start designation command reception flag (step S90622). In this case, for example, if the jackpot start 1 designation command is received, the jackpot start 1 designation command reception flag is set, and if the jackpot start 2 designation command is received, the jackpot start 2 designation command reception flag is set. set.

If the received effect control command is a small hit / sudden probability change big hit start designation command (command A003 (H)) (step S90623), the effect control CPU 90101 sets the small hit / sudden probability change big hit start designation command reception flag. (Step S90624).

If the received effect control command is a jackpot end designation command (commands A301 to A302 (H)) (step S90625), the effect control CPU 90101 sets the jackpot end designation command reception flag (step S90626). In this case, for example, if the jackpot end 1 designated command is received, the jackpot end 1 designated command reception flag is set, and if the jackpot end 2 designated command is received, the jackpot end 2 designated command reception flag is set. set.

If the received effect control command is a small hit / sudden probability change big hit end specification command (command A303 (H)) (step S90627), the effect control CPU 90101 sets the small hit / sudden probability change big hit end specification command reception flag. (Step S90628).

If the received effect control command is any of the symbol designation commands (step S90651), the effect control CPU 90101 temporarily stores the received symbol designation command in the symbol designation command storage area formed in the RAM (step). S90652).

If the received effect control command is one of the variable category commands (step S90653), the effect control CPU 90101 temporarily stores the received variable category command in the variable category command storage area formed in the RAM (step). S90654).

If the received effect control command is the first hold storage number addition designation command (step S90655), the effect control CPU 90101 is the first hold storage number stored in the first hold storage number storage area formed in the RAM. The value is added by 1 (step S90656). Further, the effect control CPU 90101 uses the symbol designation command temporarily stored in the symbol designation command, the variable category command temporarily stored in the variable category command storage area, and the received first hold storage number addition designation command. , It is stored in the first vacant storage area of the first start winning command storage area formed in the RAM (step S90657).

If the received effect control command is the second hold storage number addition designation command (step S90658), the effect control CPU 90101 is the second hold storage number stored in the second hold storage number storage area formed in the RAM. The value is added by 1 (step S90659). Further, the effect control CPU 90101 uses the symbol designation command temporarily stored in the symbol designation command, the variable category command temporarily stored in the variable category command storage area, and the received second hold storage number addition designation command. , The second start winning command storage area formed in the RAM is stored in the vacant first storage area (step S90660).

FIG. 62 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the start winning command storage area and the active display storage area. Of these, FIG. 62 (A) shows a specific example of the command storage area at the time of the first start winning, and FIG. 62 (B) shows a specific example of the command storage area at the time of the second start winning, FIG. 62 (C). Shows a specific example of the active display storage area. As shown in FIG. 62 (A), an area (storage areas 1 to 4) corresponding to the maximum value of the first reserved storage number (4 in this example) is secured in the command storage area at the time of the first start winning. There is. Further, in the command storage area at the time of winning the second start, an area (storage areas 1 to 4) corresponding to the maximum value (4 in this example) of the second reserved storage number is secured. In this embodiment, as shown in steps S901218A to S901220A of the first start port switch passage process and steps S901218B to S901220B of the second start port switch passage process of FIG. 46, the first start winning opening 9013 or the second start When there is a start prize to the winning opening 9014, the symbol designation command, the variable category command, and the hold storage number addition designation command (the first hold storage number addition designation command or the second hold storage number addition designation command) are included in one timer interrupt. Three commands (addition designation command) are transmitted as a set. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 62, the symbol designation command, the variable category command, and the hold storage number addition designation are specified in the storage areas 1 to 4 of the first start winning command storage area and the second start winning command storage area. A storage area is secured so that commands can be stored in association with each other.

In this embodiment, the command is transmitted in the order of the symbol designation command, the variable category command, and the hold storage number addition designation command within one timer interrupt, so that the effect control CPU 90101 specifies the symbol in the command analysis process. When a command and variable category command are received, they are temporarily stored in the symbol specification command storage area and variable category command storage area, respectively. Then, when the hold storage number addition designation command is received, it is found that if the first hold storage number addition designation command is received, the first hold storage number addition designation command is increased by 1, and the second hold storage number addition designation command is obtained. If is received, it is known that the second hold storage is increased by 1, so if the first hold storage number addition designation command is received, the temporarily stored symbol designation command and the variable category command are combined with the first. 1 Hold storage number addition specification command is stored in the command storage area at the time of the first start winning, and if the second hold storage number addition specification command is received, the second hold storage is stored together with the temporarily stored symbol specification command and variable category command. The number addition designation command is stored in the command storage area at the time of the second start winning (Note that in FIG. 62, the command is stored in all the storage areas 1 to 4 of the command storage area at the time of the first start winning, and the second An example is shown in which the command is stored only in the storage area 1 of the storage areas 1 to 4 of the command storage area at the time of starting winning.)

It should be noted that each command stored in the start winning command storage area shown in FIG. 62 is sequentially described in steps S90664 and S90668 at the timing of starting the variable display of the effect symbol each time the variable display of the effect symbol is started. Will be deleted. In this case, in this embodiment, since the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed, first, the stored contents of the storage area 1 of the second start winning command storage area shown in FIG. 62 (B) are deleted. .. Next, if the second reserved storage is not newly generated, only the first reserved storage is stored. Therefore, the first one shown in FIG. 62 (A) is at the timing when the variable display of the effect symbol is started next. It is deleted from the one stored in the first storage area 1 of the start winning command storage area, and the contents of the first start winning command storage area are shifted. For example, when a new variation display of the effect symbol is started in the stored state shown in FIG. 62 (A), each command stored in the storage area 1 is deleted, and each command stored in the storage area 2 is deleted. The commands are shifted to the storage area 1, each command stored in the storage area 3 is shifted to the storage area 2, and each command stored in the storage area 4 is shifted to the storage area 3.

Further, in this embodiment, when the symbol designation command, the variable category command, and the hold storage number addition designation command received when the start winning is generated are comprehensively expressed, they are also referred to as the start winning command. In addition, among these commands at the time of starting winning, the hold storage number addition designation command, which is a command for designating information that can recognize that the first hold storage number or the second hold storage number has increased, is comprehensively expressed. In some cases, it is also called hold storage information. In addition, a symbol designation command, which is a command indicating whether or not a big hit or a small hit is determined by the winning effect processing (see FIG. 48) at the time of starting winning, a judgment result of the big hit type, and a judgment result of the fluctuation pattern type, and When the variable category command is comprehensively expressed, it is also called a winning judgment result specification command or judgment result information.

In addition, information regarding the display mode of the specific display (hold display, active display) is stored in the first start winning command storage area, the second start winning command storage area, and the active display storage area. Specifically, the "display mode pattern", the "change timing", and the "operation frequency" are stored.

The "display mode pattern" is a change pattern of the display mode of the specific display, and any one of Pt1'to Pt4' is stored. Pt1'is a display mode pattern that does not change from white, Pt2'is a display mode pattern that changes from white to blue, and Pt3'is a display mode pattern that changes from white to blue and then changes to red. Yes, Pt4'is a display mode pattern that changes from white to red. The number of changes in the display mode is not limited to once or twice, and a display mode pattern in which the display mode can be changed three or more times may be provided. Further, a display mode pattern starting from a display mode other than white (for example, a display mode pattern in which the display is started in blue or red) may be provided.

The "change timing" is a timing at which the display mode of the specific display changes, and is stored when the display mode is a display mode pattern (display mode pattern other than Pt1') in which the display mode changes. Specifically, "active" indicating that the timing is displayed as the active display, "first" indicating that the timing is displayed as the first hold display, and the second Either the "second" indicating the timing displayed as the hold display of the third item or the "third item" indicating the timing displayed as the third hold display is stored. To.

The "operation frequency" is the frequency at which the display position (advance position, evacuation position) of the hold display is switched, and either "high frequency" with high switching frequency or "low frequency" with low switching frequency is used. Stored.

If the received effect control command is the first hold storage number subtraction designation command (step S90661), the effect control CPU 90101 subtracts 1 from the value of the first hold storage number stored in the first hold storage number storage area (step S90661). Step S90662). Next, the effect control CPU 90101 determines whether or not the high base state flag indicating that the high base state is set is set (step S90663A), and if it is set, the process proceeds to step S90664. If it is not set, the first hold display and the active display are updated (step S90663B). Specifically, the active display on the active display unit 9018d is erased, and the first hold display is shifted one by one (for example, the first hold display on the hold storage display unit 9018c is shifted to the active display unit 9018d. , When the second to fourth first hold displays of the hold storage display unit 9018c are lit and displayed, the first hold display displayed second is shifted to the first display area. Then, the first hold display displayed in the third position is shifted to the second display area, and the first hold display displayed in the fourth position is shifted to the third display area).

Next, the effect control CPU 90101 updates the active storage area (step S90663C). Specifically, information on the display mode pattern, change timing, and operation frequency stored in the first storage area of the first start winning command storage area is stored in the active storage area.

Next, the effect control CPU 90101 receives the start winning command (symbol designation command, variable category command, and first reserved storage number addition designation) stored in the first storage area of the first start winning command storage area. The command) and the information regarding the display mode of the specific display (display mode pattern, change timing, and operation frequency) are deleted, and the content of the command storage area at the time of the first start winning is shifted (step S90664).

If the received effect control command is the second hold storage number subtraction designation command (step S90665), the effect control CPU 90101 subtracts 1 from the value of the second hold storage number stored in the second hold storage number storage area (step S90665). Step S90666). Next, the effect control CPU 90101 determines whether or not the high base state flag is set (step S90667A), and if it is not set, the process proceeds to step S90668. If it is set, the second hold display is updated (step S90667B). Specifically, the active display on the active display unit 9018d is erased, and the second hold display is shifted one by one (for example, the first second hold display on the hold storage display unit 9018c is shifted to the active display unit 9018d. , When the second to fourth second hold displays of the hold storage display unit 9018c are lit and displayed, the second hold display displayed in the second is shifted to the first display area. Then, the second hold display displayed in the third position is shifted to the second display area, and the second hold display displayed in the fourth position is shifted to the third display area).

Next, the effect control CPU 90101 updates the active storage area (step S90667C). Specifically, information on the display mode pattern, change timing, and operation frequency stored in the first storage area of the second start winning command storage area is stored in the active storage area.

Next, the effect control CPU 90101 receives the start winning command (symbol designation command, variable category command, and first reserved storage number addition designation) stored in the first storage area of the second start winning command storage area. The command) and the information regarding the display mode of the specific display (display mode pattern, change timing, and operation frequency) are deleted, and the contents of the command storage area at the time of winning the second start are shifted (step S90668).

If the received effect control command is a normal state background specification command (step S90669), the effect control CPU 90101 sets the background screen of the effect display device 909 as a background screen according to the normal state (for example, a background screen having a blue background color). ) (Step S90670). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state (low probability / low base state), the background screen corresponding to the normal state is displayed, so that the effect mode according to the normal state (hereinafter referred to as “the effect mode”) is displayed. It is controlled to the normal production mode). If the effect control CPU 90101 is set, the high base state flag is reset (steps S90671A, S90671B), and the hold display displayed on the hold storage display unit 9018c is switched from the second hold display to the first hold display. (Step S90671C).

If the received effect control command is a time saving state background specification command (step S90672), the effect control CPU 90101 sets the background screen in the effect display device 909 as a background screen according to the time saving state (for example, a background screen having a green background color). ) (Step S90673). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the gaming state is the time saving state (low probability / high base state), the background screen corresponding to the time saving state is displayed, so that the effect mode corresponding to the time saving state (hereinafter, hereinafter, It is controlled to the time saving effect mode). Further, the effect control CPU 90101 sets the time saving state flag if it is not set (steps S90674A, S90674B), and switches the hold display to be displayed on the hold storage display unit 9018c from the first hold display to the second hold display (step). S90674C).

If the received effect control command is a probability change state background specification command (step S90676), the effect control CPU 90101 sets the background screen of the effect display device 909 as a background screen according to the probability change state (for example, a background screen having a red background color). ) (Step S90677). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the gaming state is the probabilistic state (high probability / high base state), the background screen corresponding to the probabilistic state is displayed, so that the effect mode corresponding to the probabilistic state (hereinafter, hereinafter, It is controlled to the probabilistic effect mode). Further, the effect control CPU 90101 shifts to step S90674A.

If the received effect control command is another command, the effect control CPU 90101 sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (step S90679). For example, if the received effect control command is a customer waiting demo designation command, the customer waiting demo designation command reception flag indicating that the customer waiting demo designation command has been received is set. Then, the process proceeds to step S90611.

FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the effect control process process (step S90705) in the main process shown in FIG. 57. In the effect control process process, the effect control CPU 90101 first executes a hold display control process that controls the display mode of the hold display (step S90800A). Hereinafter, the effect of changing the display mode of the hold display may be referred to as a "look-ahead notice effect".

Next, the effect control CPU 90101 performs any of steps S90800 to S90807 according to the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following processes are executed. In the effect control process process, the display state of the effect display device 909 is controlled to realize the variable display of the effect symbol, but the control related to the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the fluctuation of the first special symbol is also the second. Control related to the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the fluctuation of the special symbol is also executed in one effect control process process. It should be noted that even if the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the fluctuation of the first special symbol and the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the fluctuation of the second special symbol are configured to be executed by different effect control process processes. Good. Further, in this case, it may be determined which special symbol variation display is executed depending on which effect control process process is executing the variation display of the effect symbol.

Fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S90800): It is confirmed whether or not the variation pattern command is received from the game control microcomputer 90560. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the fluctuation pattern command reception flag set in the command analysis process is set. If the variation pattern command is received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation start process (step S98001).

Effect symbol variation start process (step S98001): Control is performed so that the effect symbol variation is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process (step S90802).

Processing during effect symbol fluctuation (step S90802): Controls the switching timing of each fluctuation state (fluctuation speed) constituting the fluctuation pattern, and monitors the end of the fluctuation time. Then, when the fluctuation time ends, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation stop process (step S90803).

Effect symbol fluctuation stop process (step S90803): Control is performed to stop the variation of the effect symbol and derive and display the display result (stop symbol). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S90804) or the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S90800).

Big hit display process (step S90804): After the end of the fluctuation time, the effect display device 909 is controlled to display a screen for notifying the occurrence of the big hit. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the processing during the round (step S90805).

Processing during the round (step S90805): Display control during the round is performed. Then, when the round end condition is satisfied, if the final round is not completed, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the round post-processing (step S90806). If the final round is completed, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the jackpot end process (step S90807).

Round post-processing (step S90806): Display control between rounds is performed. Then, when the round start condition is satisfied, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the processing during the round (step S90805).

Big hit end effect processing (step S90807): The effect display device 909 performs display control to notify the player that the big hit game state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S90800).

FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the hold display control process. In the hold display control process, the effect control CPU 90101 confirms whether or not a new start prize has been generated and a new start prize command has been received (step S903901). Specifically, if a new command is stored in the first start winning command storage area or the second start winning command storage area shown in FIG. 62, a new start prize is generated and a new start prize is generated. It can be determined that the command has been received. If no new start winning command has been received, the hold display control process ends as it is.

If a new start winning command has been received, it is determined whether the high base state flag is set (step S903902), and if it is not set (low base state), a new hold is made. It is determined whether or not the memory is the first reserved memory (step S903903). Specifically, when the storage area for storing the new start winning command is the first start winning command storage area, it is determined that the new hold storage is the first hold storage. If it is the second hold storage, the hold display control process is terminated as it is.

If it is the first hold storage, it is determined whether or not all the display mode patterns of the first hold display are Pt1'(step S903904). Specifically, when a display mode pattern other than Pt1'is stored in the storage area at the time of winning the first start shown in FIG. 62 (A), all the display mode patterns of the first hold display are Pt1'. If no display mode pattern other than Pt1'is stored in the storage area at the time of winning the first start, it is determined that all the display mode patterns of the first hold display are Pt1'. When the first hold display of the display mode pattern other than Pt1'is present, the display mode pattern of the new first hold display is determined to Pt1'(step S903905), while the first hold of the display mode pattern other than Pt1' is determined. If there is no display, a display mode pattern determination lottery for determining a display mode pattern of the new first reserved display is performed (step S903906). Specifically, the display mode pattern determination lottery is performed using the display mode pattern determination lottery table shown in FIG. 65.

FIG. 65 is an explanatory diagram showing a display mode pattern determination lottery table. In the display mode pattern determination lottery table shown in FIG. 65, the display mode pattern (Pt1'~ Although the determination value corresponding to Pt4') is assigned, in the example shown in FIG. 65, the ratio of the assigned determination value is shown for simplification of the explanation. The effect control CPU 90101 extracts, for example, a random number for the display mode pattern determination lottery, and determines a determination item to which a determination value matching the extracted random number is assigned.

FIG. 65 (A) is a first display mode pattern determination lottery table used when the number of reserved memories is 1, and FIG. 65 (B) is a first display mode used when the number of reserved memories is 2 or more. It is a display mode pattern determination lottery table. Here, the "holding memory number" is the first holding storage number when the newly generated holding storage is the first holding storage (that is, when the display mode pattern determination lottery in step S903906 is executed). That is, when the newly generated reserved memory is the second reserved memory (that is, when the display mode pattern determination lottery in step S903924 is executed), it is the second reserved memory number.

First, the first display mode pattern determination lottery table shown in FIG. 65 (A) will be described. For example, when the judgment result at the time of winning is a probability variation jackpot or a normal jackpot (when the symbol designation command is C401 (H) or C402 (H)), Pt1'is 20% and Pt2' is 30%. Then, Pt4'is determined at a rate of 50%.

For example, when the judgment result at the time of winning is a sudden change big hit or a small hit (when the symbol designation command is C403 (H) or C404 (H)), Pt1'is 25% and Pt2' is 35%. By percentage, Pt4'is determined at a percentage of 40%.

For example, when the judgment result at the time of winning is out of super reach (when the symbol designation command is C400 (H) and the variable category command is C607 (H) or C609 (H)), the ratio of Pt1'is 50%. Then, Pt2'is determined at a ratio of 30%, and Pt4'is determined at a ratio of 20%.

For example, when the judgment result at the time of winning is other, Pt1'is determined at a ratio of 90% and Pt2'is determined at a ratio of 10%.

As described above, in the present embodiment, since the display mode of the specific display can be changed only once for each change, the number of changes is 2 when the number of reserved memories is 1. Pt3'. Is not selected. If the display mode of the specific display can be changed a plurality of times during one change, Pt3'may be selectable even when the number of reserved storages is 1.

Next, the second display mode pattern determination lottery table shown in FIG. 65 (B) will be described. For example, when the judgment result at the time of winning is a probability variation jackpot or a normal jackpot (when the symbol designation command is C401 (H) or C402 (H)), Pt1'is 10% and Pt2' is 20%. Then, Pt3'is determined at a ratio of 30%, and Pt4'is determined at a ratio of 40%.

For example, when the judgment result at the time of winning is a sudden change big hit or a small hit (when the symbol designation command is C403 (H) or C404 (H)), Pt1'is 15% and Pt2' is 20%. In terms of ratio, Pt3'is determined at a ratio of 30%, and Pt4'is determined at a ratio of 35%.

For example, when the judgment result at the time of winning is out of super reach (when the symbol designation command is C400 (H) and the variable category command is C607 (H) or C609 (H)), the ratio of Pt1'is 40%. Then, Pt2'is determined at a ratio of 30%, Pt3'is determined at a ratio of 20%, and Pt4'is determined at a ratio of 10%.

For example, when the judgment result at the time of winning is other, Pt1'is determined at a ratio of 90% and Pt2'is determined at a ratio of 10%.

As a result, the degree of expectation for each display mode pattern is Pt1'<Pt2'<Pt3'<Pt4'. Further, the degree of expectation indicated by the display mode of the hold display is white <blue <red. It should be noted that a display mode pattern that can be selected only when a big hit or a specific big hit may be provided may be provided. Further, a display mode (for example, rainbow) that can be changed only in the display mode pattern may be provided.

In the present embodiment, the display mode pattern is determined at the same ratio depending on whether the winning determination result is a probability variation jackpot or a normal jackpot, but the display mode pattern is determined at different ratios. It may be decided. Similarly, the display mode pattern may be determined at different ratios depending on whether the winning determination result is a sudden change big hit or a small hit.

Further, the ratio of determining the display mode pattern may be different depending on the finer conditions. For example, the display mode pattern may be determined at different ratios based on the type of reach effect indicated by the variable category command, the presence or absence of pseudo-ream, the number of pseudo-ream, and the like.

After step S903905 or step S903906, when the display mode pattern other than Pt1'is determined, the effect control CPU 90101 executes a change timing determination lottery for determining the change timing of the display mode of the specific display (. N, S903908 in step S903907). Specifically, the change timing determination lottery is performed using the change timing determination lottery table shown in FIG.

FIG. 66 is an explanatory diagram showing a change timing determination lottery table. In the change timing determination lottery table shown in FIG. 66, depending on the winning judgment result (probability change big hit or normal big hit, sudden probability change big hit (sudden big hit) or small hit, super reach loss, etc.) and the number of reserved memories (1 to 4). The judgment values corresponding to the change timings (active, first, second, third) are assigned, but in the example shown in FIG. 66, the assigned judgment values are assigned for the sake of simplification of the explanation. The proportion of is shown. The effect control CPU 90101 extracts, for example, a random number for the change timing determination lottery, and determines a determination item to which a determination value matching the extracted random number is assigned.

Here, the "holding memory number" refers to the first holding storage number when the newly generated holding storage is the first holding storage (that is, when the change timing determination lottery in step S903908 is executed). That is, when the newly generated reserved memory is the second reserved memory (that is, when the change timing determination lottery in step S903926 is executed), it is the second reserved memory number.

FIG. 66 (A) is a first change timing determination lottery table used when the number of changes is 1 (that is, when the display mode pattern is Pt2'or Pt4'), and FIG. 66B is shown in FIG. This is a second change timing determination lottery table used when the number of changes is 2 (that is, when the display mode pattern is Pt3').

First, the first change timing determination lottery table shown in FIG. 66A will be described. For example, when the number of reserved memories is "4" and the judgment result at the time of winning is a probability variation jackpot or a normal jackpot (when the symbol designation command is C401 (H) or C402 (H)), the "third" is At a rate of 40%, the "second" is determined at a rate of 30%, the "first" is determined at a rate of 40%, and the "active" is determined at a rate of 10%.

For example, when the number of reserved memories is "4" and the judgment result at the time of winning is a sudden change big hit or small hit (when the symbol designation command is C403 (H) or C404 (H)), "third". Is determined at a rate of 37%, "second" at a rate of 33%, "first" at a rate of 17%, and "active" at a rate of 13%.

For example, when the number of pending memories is "4" and the winning determination result is out of super reach (the symbol designation command is C400 (H), and the variable category command is C607 (H) or C609 (H). (Case), "3rd" is determined at a rate of 13%, "2nd" at a rate of 17%, "1st" at a rate of 33%, and "Active" at a rate of 37%. To.

For example, when the number of reserved memories is "4" and the judgment result at the time of winning is other, the "third" is 10%, the "second" is 20%, and the "first". Is determined at a rate of 30%, and "active" is determined at a rate of 40%.

Further, for example, when the number of reserved memories is "3" and the judgment result at the time of winning is a probability variation jackpot or a normal jackpot (when the symbol designation command is C401 (H) or C402 (H)), "the second one". Is determined at a rate of 50%, "first" is determined at a rate of 30%, and "active" is determined at a rate of 20%.

For example, when the number of reserved memories is "3" and the judgment result at the time of winning is a sudden change big hit or small hit (when the symbol designation command is C403 (H) or C404 (H)), "second". Is determined at a rate of 40%, "first" at a rate of 35%, and "active" at a rate of 25%.

For example, when the number of reserved memories is "3" and the winning determination result is out of super reach (the symbol designation command is C400 (H), and the variable category command is C607 (H) or C609 (H). Case), the "second" is determined at a rate of 25%, the "first" at a rate of 35%, and the "active" at a rate of 40%.

For example, when the number of reserved memories is "3" and the judgment result at the time of winning is other, the "second" is 20%, the "first" is 30%, and the "active" is. Determined at a rate of 50%.

Further, for example, when the number of reserved memories is "2" and the judgment result at the time of winning is a probability variation jackpot or a normal jackpot (when the symbol designation command is C401 (H) or C402 (H)), "1st item". Is determined at a rate of 70%, and "active" is determined at a rate of 30%.

For example, when the number of reserved memories is "2" and the judgment result at the time of winning is a sudden change big hit or small hit (when the symbol designation command is C403 (H) or C404 (H)), "first". Is determined at a rate of 60% and "active" is determined at a rate of 40%.

For example, when the number of reserved memories is "2" and the winning determination result is out of super reach (the symbol designation command is C400 (H), and the variable category command is C607 (H) or C609 (H). Case), "first" is determined at a rate of 40%, and "active" is determined at a rate of 60%.

For example, when the number of reserved memories is "2" and the winning determination result is other, the "first" is determined at a rate of 30% and the "active" is determined at a rate of 70%.

Further, for example, when the number of reserved memories is "1", "active" is determined at a rate of 100%.

Next, the second change timing determination lottery table shown in FIG. 66B will be described. For example, when the number of reserved memories is "4" and the winning judgment result is a probability variation jackpot or a normal jackpot (when the symbol designation command is C401 (H) or C402 (H)), "third" and The combination of "2nd" is 30%, the combination of "3rd" and "1st" is 25%, and the combination of "3rd" and "active" is 20%. So, the combination of "2nd" and "1st" is 13%, and the combination of "2nd" and "active" is 7%, and the combination of "1st" and "active" is The combination is determined at a rate of 5%.

For example, when the number of pending memories is "4" and the judgment result at the time of winning is a sudden change big hit or small hit (when the symbol designation command is C403 (H) or C404 (H)), "third". And the combination of "2nd" is 20%, the combination of "3rd" and "1st" is 25%, and the combination of "3rd" and "Active" is 25%. In terms of percentage, the combination of "2nd" and "1st" is 15%, and the combination of "2nd" and "active" is 10%, "1st" and "active". The combination of is determined at a rate of 5%.

For example, when the number of pending storage is "4" and the winning determination result is out of super reach (the symbol designation command is C400 (H), and the variable category command is C607 (H) or C609 (H). Case), the combination of "third" and "second" is 5%, the combination of "third" and "first" is 10%, "third" and " The "active" combination is 15%, the "second" and "first" combinations are 25%, and the "second" and "active" combinations are 25%. The combination of "first" and "active" is determined at a rate of 20%.

For example, when the number of reserved memories is "4" and the judgment result at the time of winning is other, the combination of "third" and "second" is 5%, and "third" and "1". The "third" combination is 7%, the "third" and "active" combinations are 13%, and the "second" and "first" combinations are 20%. The combination of "second" and "active" is determined at a rate of 25%, and the combination of "first" and "active" is determined at a rate of 30%.

Further, for example, when the number of reserved memories is "3" and the judgment result at the time of winning is a probability variation jackpot or a normal jackpot (when the symbol designation command is C401 (H) or C402 (H)), "the second one". The combination of "1st" and "1st" is 50%, the combination of "2nd" and "active" is 30%, and the combination of "1st" and "active" is 20%. Will be decided.

For example, when the number of reserved memories is "3" and the judgment result at the time of winning is a sudden change big hit or small hit (when the symbol designation command is C403 (H) or C404 (H)), "second". And the combination of "1st" is 40%, the combination of "2nd" and "active" is 35%, and the combination of "1st" and "active" is 25%. ,It is determined.

For example, when the number of pending memories is "3" and the winning determination result is out of super reach (the symbol designation command is C400 (H), and the variable category command is C607 (H) or C609 (H). (Case), "2nd" and "1st" combinations are 25%, "2nd" and "active" combinations are 35%, "1st" and "active" The combination of is determined at a rate of 40%.

For example, when the number of reserved memories is "3" and the judgment result at the time of winning is other, the combination of "second" and "first" is 20%, and "second" and "active". The combination of "" is determined at a rate of 30%, and the combination of "first" and "active" is determined at a rate of 50%.

Further, for example, when the number of reserved memories is "2", the combination of "first" and "active" is determined at a rate of 100%.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the reliability of the jackpot is higher as the display mode changes at an earlier timing after the start of the hold display, but the reliability is not limited to this, and for example, on the contrary. The reliability of the jackpot may be low as the display mode changes at an earlier timing after the hold display is started.

In the present embodiment, the change timing is determined using the change timing determination table shown in FIG. 66, but the change timing is determined at a different ratio based on which display mode is changed. You may do it. For example, when the color changes to red, a later timing (for example, “active”) may be determined as the change timing at a higher rate than when the color changes to blue.

In the present embodiment, the change timing is determined at the same ratio depending on whether the winning determination result is a probability variation jackpot or a normal jackpot, but the change timing is determined at different proportions. It may be that. Similarly, the change timing may be determined at different ratios depending on whether the winning determination result is a sudden change big hit or a small hit.

Further, the ratio of determining the change timing may differ depending on the finer conditions. For example, the change timing may be determined at different ratios based on the type of reach effect indicated by the variable category command, the presence or absence of pseudo-reams, the number of pseudo-reams, and the like.

After the execution of Y in step S903907 or the execution of step S903908, the effect control CPU 90101 stores the determination result (display mode pattern and change timing) in the command storage area at the time of the first start winning (step S903909), and sets the operation frequency to low frequency. Store (step S903910). Then, a new first hold display is started in white (step S903911).

When the high base state flag is set in step S903902, it is determined whether or not the new hold storage is the second hold storage (step S903921). Specifically, when the storage area for storing the new start winning command is the second start winning command storage area, it is determined that the new hold storage is the second hold storage. If it is the first hold storage, the hold display control process is terminated as it is.

If it is the second hold storage, it is determined whether or not all the display mode patterns of the second hold display are Pt1'(step S903922). Specifically, when a display mode pattern other than Pt1'is stored in the storage area at the time of winning the second start shown in FIG. 62 (B), all the display mode patterns of the second hold display are Pt1'. If no display mode pattern other than Pt1'is stored in the storage area at the time of winning the second start, it is determined that all the display mode patterns of the second hold display are Pt1'. When there is a second hold display of the display mode pattern other than Pt1', the display mode pattern of the new second hold display is determined to Pt1'(step S903923), while the second hold of the display mode pattern other than Pt1' If there is no display, a display mode pattern determination lottery for determining a display mode pattern of a new second reserved display is performed (step S903924). Specifically, the display mode pattern determination lottery is performed using the display mode pattern determination lottery table shown in FIG. 65.

After step S903923 or step S903924, when the display mode pattern other than Pt1'is determined, the effect control CPU 90101 executes a change timing determination lottery for determining the change timing (N, S903926 in step S903925). ). Specifically, the change timing determination lottery is performed using the change timing determination lottery table shown in FIG.

After the execution of Y in step S903925 or the execution of step S903926, the effect control CPU 90101 stores the determination result (display mode pattern and change timing) in the second start winning command storage area (step S903927), and sets the operation frequency to a low frequency. Store (step S903928). Then, a new second hold display is started in white (step S903929).

FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S90800) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 63. In the variation pattern command reception waiting process, the effect control CPU 90101 confirms whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S90811). If the variation pattern command reception flag is set, the variation pattern command reception flag is reset (step S90812). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation start process (step S98001) (step S90813). As described above, in this embodiment, the display result designation command is transmitted even when the power failure is restored (see step S9044). However, as shown in FIG. 67, in this embodiment, in the normal state, the display result designation command is transmitted. , The effect symbol variation start processing is started based on the reception of the variation pattern command, and the variation display of the effect symbol is started. Therefore, the effect symbol variation only by receiving the display result specification command without receiving the variation pattern command. The display does not start.

FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation start process (step S98001) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 63. In the effect symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 90101 first reads the variation pattern command from the variation pattern command storage area (step S908001). Next, the effect control CPU 90101 displays the effect symbol display result (stop) according to the variation pattern command read in step S908001 and the data stored in the display result specification command storage area (that is, the received display result specification command). The symbol) is determined (step S908002). That is, by executing the process of step S908002 by the effect control CPU 90101, the display result of the variable display of the identification information (stop of the effect symbol) according to the variable display pattern (variable pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determining means. A display result determining means for determining a symbol) is realized. When the pseudo-ream is specified by the variation pattern command, the effect control CPU 90101 has a chance pattern symbol (for example, "223" or "445") as a temporary stop symbol of the pseudo-ream in step S908002. , A combination of a jackpot symbol that does not reach but one symbol is out of alignment) is also determined. Further, the effect control CPU 90101 stores the data indicating the stopped symbol of the determined effect symbol in the effect symbol display result storage area. In step S908002, the effect control CPU 90101 may determine whether or not it is a big hit based on the received variation pattern command, and determine the stop symbol of the effect symbol based only on the variation pattern command. ..

FIG. 69 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a stop symbol of the effect symbol in the effect display device 909. In the example shown in FIG. 69, when the received display result designation command indicates "normal jackpot" (when the received display result designation command is the display result 2 designation command), the effect control CPU 90101 is stopped. As the symbols, the combination of the effect symbols in which the three symbols are the same even-numbered symbols is determined. Further, when the received display result specification command indicates "probability variation jackpot" (when the received display result specification command is the display result 3 designation command), the effect control CPU 90101 has 3 symbols as stop symbols. Determine the combination of the production symbols that are the same odd-numbered symbols.

If the received display result specification command indicates "sudden probability change big hit" or "small hit" (when the received display result specification command is a display result 4 designation command or a display result 5 designation command), The effect control CPU 90101 determines a combination of effect symbols such as "135" as the stop symbol. Then, in the case of "off" (when the received display result designation command is the display result 1 designation command), the combination of the effect symbols other than the above is determined. However, when accompanied by a reach effect, the combination of the effect symbols in which the two left and right symbols are aligned is determined. Further, the combination of the three symbols derived and displayed on the effect display device 909 is the "stop symbol" of the effect symbol.

For example, the effect control CPU 90101 extracts a random number for determining the stop symbol, and uses the stop symbol determination table in which the data indicating the combination of the effect symbols and the numerical value are associated with each other to generate the stop symbol of the effect symbol. decide. That is, the stop symbol is determined by selecting the data indicating the combination of the effect symbols corresponding to the numerical value corresponding to the extracted random number.

As for the production symbols, the stop symbol (a combination of symbols in which the left, middle, and right are all the same symbol) reminiscent of a jackpot is called a jackpot symbol. Further, in this embodiment, in the case of a probabilistic jackpot, the odd symbols are stopped and displayed with the odd symbols aligned on the left, middle, and right, so that the odd symbols are reminiscent of the probabilistic jackpot. A symbol that reminds us of such a probabilistic jackpot is called a probabilistic symbol. On the other hand, in this embodiment, when a normal big hit occurs, the left, middle, and right are stopped and displayed with even-numbered symbols aligned, so that the even-numbered symbols do not become a probabilistic big hit (usually a big hit). .. A symbol that reminds us that it does not become a probabilistic jackpot is called a non-probable variation symbol. In addition, a stop symbol that reminds us of a miss is called a missed symbol.

Next, the effect control CPU 90101 executes a notice effect (notice effect excluding the look-ahead advance notice effect, for example, step-up advance notice effect, character advance notice effect, and dialogue advance notice effect) on the effect display device 909 during the variable display of the effect symbol. The advance notice effect setting process for determining whether or not to use the notice effect and setting the effect mode for the advance notice effect is executed (step S908003).

Then, the effect control CPU 90101 executes an operation frequency determination process for determining the operation frequency of the specific display (hold display, active display) (step S908003A).

Next, the effect control CPU 90101 selects a variation pattern, the advance notice effect when the advance notice effect is executed, and a process table according to the change effect when the advance notice effect is executed (step S908004). Then, the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (step S908005).

FIG. 70 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of the process table. The process table is a table in which process data to be referred to when the effect control CPU 90101 executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the effect control CPU 90101 controls the effect device (effect component) such as the effect display device 909 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table is composed of a collection of a plurality of combinations of process timer setting values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data. The display control execution data includes data and the like indicating each variation mode constituting the variation mode during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the effect symbol. Specifically, the data related to the change of the display screen of the effect display device 909 is described. Further, in the process timer set value, the fluctuation time in the mode of the fluctuation is set. The effect control CPU 90101 refers to the process table and controls to display the effect symbol in the variation mode set in the display control execution data only for the time set in the process timer set value.

The process table shown in FIG. 70 is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 9080. In addition, the process table is prepared according to each fluctuation pattern. If the effect control CPU 90101 is determined to execute the advance notice effect, the process table corresponding to the advance notice effect is selected in step S908004.

In the process table used when executing the effect control for the fluctuation pattern accompanied by the reach effect, the left symbol is stopped and displayed when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the fluctuation, and the right symbol is stopped when the predetermined time elapses. Process data indicating that it is to be displayed is set. In addition, instead of setting the symbol to be stopped and displayed in the process table, the image for displaying the symbol is synthesized and generated according to the determined stop symbol, the pseudo-ream, and the temporary stop symbol in the sliding effect. You may.

Further, the effect control CPU 90101 serves as an effect device (effect display device 909 as an effect component, as an effect component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). Control of various lamps and the speaker 9027) as an effect component is executed (step S908006). For example, the effect display device 909 outputs a command to the VDP 90109 in order to display an image corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Further, in order to control the lighting / extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp driver board 9035. Further, in order to output the sound from the speaker 9027, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound output board 9070.

In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 90101 controls the variation pattern command so that the effect pattern is variably displayed according to the variation pattern corresponding to one-to-one. However, the effect control CPU 90101 controls the variation pattern command. The fluctuation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns corresponding to.

Next, the effect control CPU 90101 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern command in the fluctuation time timer (step S908007).

Then, the effect control CPU 90101 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process (step S90802) (step S90808).

FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing an operation frequency determination process. In the operation frequency determination process, the effect control CPU 90101 performs a process (steps S90450 to S904506) for determining whether or not the change effect is executed in the fluctuation to be started, the type of the change effect when the change effect is executed, and the specific display of the execution target. After the execution, the processes (steps S904507 to S904511) for determining the operation frequency of each specific display are executed.

First, the effect control CPU 90101 determines whether or not the red specific display is displayed (step S904500), and if it is displayed, proceeds to step S904507. As described above, in the present embodiment, since the display mode changes only for a single specific display, when the red specific display (specific display of the most reliable display mode) is already displayed, the display mode changes. Since no further change in the display mode can be expected even if the change effect is executed, the configuration is such that the change effect cannot be executed. It should be noted that the change effect may be executed even when a further change in the display mode cannot be expected, and the most reliable gaming machine is a gaming machine capable of changing the display mode of a plurality of specific displays. It may be assumed that the change effect can be executed even when the specific display of the high display mode is displayed.

When the red specific display is not displayed, the effect control CPU 90101 executes a change effect execution lottery for determining whether or not to execute the change effect in the variation to be started (step S904501). Specifically, the change effect execution lottery is performed using the change effect execution lottery table shown in FIG. 72 (A).

FIG. 72 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a change effect execution lottery table. In the change effect execution lottery table shown in FIG. 72 (A), whether or not the change effect is executed and the type of change effect when the change effect is executed according to the presence or absence of the change schedule of the specific display in the starting fluctuation (change schedule in the fluctuation). Judgment values corresponding to (first change effect, second change effect) are assigned, but in the example shown in FIG. 72 (A), the ratio of the assigned determination values is shown for the sake of simplification of the explanation. Has been done. The effect control CPU 90101 extracts, for example, a random number for the change effect execution lottery, and determines a determination item to which a determination value matching the extracted random number is assigned.

Regarding whether or not there is a change schedule of the specific display in the start fluctuation, the start prize command storage area shown in FIG. 62 (if the start change is a change based on the first hold memory, the first start prize command is displayed. When the storage area and the fluctuation to be started are fluctuations based on the second hold storage, the determination is made based on the second start winning command storage area). At this point, the start winning command storage area has not been updated based on the start of the fluctuation (steps S90664 and S90668), so the information regarding the fluctuation to be started is one of the start winning command storage areas. It is stored in the storage area of the eye. Therefore, whether "active" is stored as the change timing in the first storage area, "first" is stored as the change timing in the second storage area, or the change in the third storage area. When the "second item" is stored as the timing or the "third item" is stored as the change timing in the fourth storage area, it is determined that there is a change schedule.

For example, when there is a change schedule, it is determined at a rate of 70% to execute the first change effect and at a rate of 30% to execute the second change effect. When there is no change schedule, it is decided that the first change effect is executed at a rate of 3%, the second change effect is executed at a rate of 7%, and the change effect is not executed at a rate of 90%. To.

In this way, whenever there is a change schedule, one of the change effects is executed. That is, the display mode can be changed only when the change effect is executed.

Further, in this way, when there is a change schedule, the first change effect is executed at a higher rate than the second change effect, and when there is no change schedule, the second change effect is the first change effect. It is configured to run at a higher rate than. As a result, the display mode of the specific effect is changed at a higher rate when the first change effect is executed than when the second change effect is executed. Therefore, it suggests whether or not there is a change in the display mode of the specific display depending on the type of change effect.

In the present embodiment, the first change effect and the second change effect are provided as the types of the change effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a change effect that changes the display mode of the specific display may be provided at the time of execution.

Further, in the present embodiment, the type of change effect is determined and then the operation frequency is determined, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the operation frequency of the specific display is determined before the type of the change effect, and the type of the change effect is determined based on the operation frequency (for example, if the frequency is low, the second change effect is likely to be selected). May be good.

After step S904501, the effect control CPU 90101 determines whether or not to execute the change effect (step S904502), and if not, proceeds to step S904507. When executing the change effect, it is determined whether or not there is a change schedule (step S904503), and when there is no change schedule (that is, when the change effect is executed but the display mode does not change), a specific blue display is displayed. Is displayed (step S904503A), and if it is not displayed, an execution target determination lottery for determining a specific display of the execution target of the change effect is executed (step S904503B). Specifically, the execution target determination lottery is performed using the execution target determination lottery table shown in FIG. 72 (B).

FIG. 72B is an explanatory diagram showing an execution target determination lottery table. In the execution target determination lottery table shown in FIG. 72 (B), the execution target of the change effect according to the number of reserved memories (active display, first hold display, second hold display, third hold display). However, in the example shown in FIG. 72 (B), the ratio of the assigned determination values is shown for the sake of brevity. The effect control CPU 90101 extracts, for example, a random number for the execution target determination lottery, and determines a determination item to which a determination value matching the extracted random number is assigned.

Here, the "holding memory number" is the first holding storage number when the starting fluctuation is a fluctuation based on the first holding storage, and the "holding storage number" is a fluctuation based on the second holding storage. It is the second reserved memory number. At this stage, the subtraction of the number of reserved storages (steps S90662 and S90666) based on the start of fluctuation is not performed.

For example, when the number of pending storages is "4", the active display is targeted for execution at a rate of 40%, and the first pending display is targeted for execution at a rate of 20%. It is determined at a rate of 20% that the hold display of the above is to be executed, and at a rate of 20% that the third hold display is to be executed.

For example, when the number of pending storages is "3", the active display is targeted for execution at a rate of 60%, and the first pending display is targeted for execution at a rate of 20%. It is decided at a rate of 20% that the hold display of is to be executed.

For example, when the number of reserved storages is "2", it is determined at a rate of 80% that the active display is the execution target and at a rate of 20% that the first hold display is the execution target.

For example, when the number of reserved storages is "1", it is determined at a rate of 100% that the active display is to be executed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the active display is easily set as the execution target. As a result, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for fluctuations during execution.

In the present embodiment, only the already displayed hold display can be determined as the execution target of the change effect, but here, the execution target of the change effect (so-called Gase effect) in which the display mode does not change is used. In order to determine, the pending display that is not displayed may be the execution target. For example, when the number of reserved memories is "3" (that is, when only the active display, the first hold display, and the second hold display are displayed when the change effect is executed). However, the third hold display can be determined as the execution target of the change effect, and when the third hold display is determined as the execution target, the change effect is displayed in the display area of the third hold display. It may be performed (in the case of the first change effect, the hammer swings idle, and in the case of the second change effect, the arrow passes by).

When the blue specific display is displayed in S904503A, the blue specific display is determined as the execution target of the change effect (step S904504). As a result, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the display mode of the specific display whose display mode has already changed to blue will be further changed. Even when the specific display whose display mode has already changed to blue is displayed, the change effect (the display mode does not change) for another specific display (white specific display) to be executed. (So-called Gase production)) may be executed. However, even though the specific display that has already turned blue is displayed, it is possible that the player will be stressed if the Gase effect that targets other specific displays is frequently executed. Be done. Therefore, even if the configuration is such that a specific display different from the specific display that has already changed to blue can be executed, a change effect that targets the specific display that has already changed to blue can be executed. It is desirable to do it at a high rate.

Further, in step S904503, when there is a change schedule, the specific display (active display, hold display) that is scheduled to change is determined as the execution target of the change effect (step S904505). As described above, at this point in time, since the start winning command storage area (steps S90664 and S90668) has not been updated based on the start of fluctuation, the specific display corresponding to the storage area 1 has changed. If it is a plan, select "active", if the specific display corresponding to the storage area 2 is scheduled to change, select "first", and if the specific display corresponding to the storage area 3 is scheduled to change, select "second". If the specific display corresponding to the storage area 4 is scheduled to be changed, the "third item" is determined as the execution target of the change effect.

After executing any of steps S904503B, S904504, and S904505, the effect control CPU 90101 sets the type of change effect to be executed and the specific display of the execution target (step S904506). The process table corresponding to the change effect of the contents set here is selected in step S908004, and the change effect is executed by executing step S908006 and step S908105 described later.

Next, the effect control CPU 90101 has a hold specific value K for specifying the number of hold displays (that is, if K = 1, the first hold display, and if K = 2, two hold displays. Set "1" to the eye hold display, the third hold display if K = 3, and the fourth hold display if K = 4 (step S904507), and set the operation frequency of each specific display. Execute an operation frequency determination lottery for determination. Specifically, the operation frequency determination lottery is performed using the operation frequency determination lottery table shown in FIG. 72 (C).

FIG. 72 (C) is an explanatory diagram showing an operation frequency determination lottery table. In the operation frequency determination lottery table shown in FIG. 72 (C), whether or not the display mode of the specific display is scheduled to change (scheduled change of the Kth hold display) and change effect (change effect to the Kth hold display). Judgment values corresponding to the operation frequency (high frequency, low frequency) are assigned according to the above, but in the example shown in FIG. 72 (C), in order to simplify the explanation, the ratio of the assigned judgment values is It is shown. The effect control CPU 90101 extracts, for example, a random number for the operation frequency determination lottery, and determines a determination item to which a determination value matching the extracted random number is assigned.

Whether or not the display mode of the specific display is scheduled to be changed is determined with reference to the start winning command storage area shown in FIG. 62. Specifically, if the specified number of pending K = 1, "active" is stored as the fluctuation timing in the first storage area, or if the specific number of reserved K = 2, the fluctuation timing in the second storage area Whether the "first" is stored as, or if the specified number of pending K = 3, the "second" is stored as the fluctuation timing in the third storage area, or the specified number of pending K = 4 For example, when the "third" is stored as the fluctuation timing in the fourth storage area, it is determined that there is a change schedule.

Further, the "change effect" is determined based on the type of change effect set in step S904506 and the execution target. For example, if the specific number of holds K = 1 and the active display is set as the execution target, and if the specific number of holds K = 2 and the first display of hold is set as the execution target, the specific number of holds K If = 3, the second hold display is set as the execution target, and if the specified number of holds K = 4, the third hold display is set as the execution target, and the set type It is determined that the change effect is executed.

For example, when there is a change schedule and the first change effect is executed, the low frequency is determined at a rate of 20% and the high frequency is determined at a rate of 80%. When there is a change schedule and the second change effect is executed, the low frequency is determined at a rate of 30% and the high frequency is determined at a rate of 70%.

Further, for example, when there is no change schedule and the first change effect is executed, the low frequency is determined at a rate of 40% and the high frequency is determined at a rate of 60%. When there is no change schedule and the second change effect is executed, the low frequency is determined at a rate of 45% and the high frequency is determined at a rate of 55%. When there is no change schedule and the change effect is not executed, the low frequency is determined at a rate of 90% and the high frequency is determined at a rate of 10%.

As described above, the high frequency is more likely to be determined than the low frequency as the operation mode of the specific display that is the execution target of the change effect. Therefore, the specific display having a high frequency of operation is more likely to be the target of execution of the change effect than the specific display having a low frequency.

In addition, the specific display with a change schedule is configured to be more likely to determine the high frequency as the operation frequency than the specific display without a change schedule. Therefore, the presence or absence of a change is suggested by the operation frequency.

In the present embodiment, the operation frequency is set to high frequency and low frequency, but a definite operation frequency that can be selected only when the change effect is executed may be provided. By performing the fixed operation frequency, the player is notified that the change effect is executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the specific display having a change schedule is selected as the operation frequency at a higher rate than the specific display without a change schedule. Not limited. For example, when a specific display with a change schedule is displayed, a higher frequency is selected as the operation frequency (that is, a change) as compared with the case where the specific display with a change schedule is not displayed. Even if it is a specific display without a schedule, if a specific display having a change schedule is displayed as another specific display, a high frequency is likely to be selected as the operation frequency). Further, the higher the frequency is selected, the higher the specific display is displayed at a position closer to the specific display having a change schedule.

Next, the effect control CPU 90101 stores the operation mode of the Kth hold display (step S904509). For example, if K = 1, it is in the first storage area, if K = 2, it is in the second storage area, if K = 3, it is in the third storage area, and if K = 4, it is in the third storage area. In the fourth storage area, "high frequency" or "low frequency" is stored as the operation mode. Then, the specified number of pending K and the number of reserved storages (if the fluctuation to be executed is a fluctuation based on the first reserved storage, the number of first reserved storages, and if the fluctuation to be executed is a fluctuation based on the second reserved storage, the number of second reserved storages ) Are the same value (step S904510), and if they are not the same value, 1 is added to the pending specific number K (step S904511), and the process proceeds to step S904508 again. In this way, the operation frequency for all the stored memory is determined one by one. The operation frequency determination process is terminated when the specific number K on hold and the number of stored hold are equal.

In step S904508, instead of or in addition to the operation frequency, an operation mode other than the operation frequency may be determined. For example, it may be determined whether the mole to be displayed as a specific display is in a pop-out mode or a rotating mode.

FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol changing process (step S90802) in the effect control process process. In the process during effect symbol change, the value of the process timer is subtracted by 1 (step S908101), and the value of the fluctuation time timer is subtracted by 1 (step S908102). When the process timer times out (step S908103), the process data is switched. That is, the next set process timer setting value in the process table is set in the process timer (step S908104). Further, the control state for the effect device is changed based on the display control execution data, the lamp control execution data, and the sound number data set next (step S908105).

After that, the effect control CPU 90101 determines whether or not the display position fixing flag indicating that the display position of the specific display is fixed is set (step S904700A), and if it is set, the process proceeds to step S904707. .. The display position fixing flag is a flag set during the execution of the first change effect, that is, the process of steps S904701 to S904706 (process for changing the display position of the specific display) during the execution of the first change effect. ) Is not executed.

In the present embodiment, the switching of the display position of all the specific displays is restricted during the execution of the first change effect, but at least the display position of the specific display which is the execution target of the first change effect is restricted. As long as the switching is restricted, the switching of the display position of another specific display may not be restricted.

When the display position fixing flag is not set in step S904700A, the effect control CPU 90101 determines whether or not the display position change timing is set in advance (step S904700B). In the present embodiment, the display position change timing is set to an even number of seconds after the start of the fluctuation, that is, the display position can be changed every 2 seconds. The display position change timing may be determined by lottery or may be determined for each fluctuation pattern.

In the case of the display position change timing (Y in step S904700B), the specific display specific number R for specifying the number of the specific display (that is, if R = 1, the first specific display (that is, active)). Display), if R = 2, the second specific display (that is, the first hold display), if R = 3, the third specific display (that is, the second hold display), R If = 4, 1 is set in the 4th specific display (that is, the 3rd hold display) (step S904701), and whether or not to switch the display position of the specific display specified by the specific display specific number R. A display position switching lottery for determining whether or not is executed (step S904702). Specifically, the display position switching lottery is performed using the display position switching lottery table shown in FIG. 74.

FIG. 74 is an explanatory diagram showing a display position switching lottery table. In the display position switching lottery table shown in FIG. 74, determination values corresponding to the presence / absence of switching of the display position are assigned according to the operation frequency, but in the example shown in FIG. 74, they are assigned for the sake of simplification of explanation. The ratio of the determined judgment values is shown. The effect control CPU 90101 extracts, for example, a random number for the display position switching lottery, and determines a determination item to which a determination value matching the extracted random number is assigned.

For example, when the operation frequency is high, it is determined at a rate of 70% that the display position is switched and at a rate of 30% that the display position is not switched. Further, for example, when the operation frequency is low, it is determined at a rate of 20% that the display position is switched and at a rate of 80% that the display position is not switched.

When it is decided to switch the display position (Y in step S904703), if the display position of the Rth specific display is the evacuation position, it is switched to the advance position, and if it is the advance position, it is switched to the evacuation position (step). S904704). Then, the value of the specific display specific number R is the number of reserved storages (the first number of reserved storages if the fluctuation to be executed is a fluctuation based on the first reserved storage, and the second if the fluctuation to be executed is a fluctuation based on the second reserved storage. It is determined whether or not the value is the same as the value obtained by adding 1 to the reserved storage number) (step S904705), and if the value is not the same, 1 is added to the specific display specific number R and the process proceeds to step S904702 again. In this way, it is determined one by one whether or not to switch the display position of all the specific displays. If the values are the same, the process proceeds to step S904707.

In step S904707, if the effect control CPU 90101 is the execution timing of the first change effect (Y in step S904707), the display position fixing flag is set (step S904707A), and the display mode of the specific display of the execution target of the change effect is displayed. Determines whether or not is expected to change (step S904708). If it is scheduled to change, the display position of the specific display to be executed is switched to the advance position (step S904709). If it is not scheduled to change, the display position of the specific display to be executed is switched to the evacuation position (step S904710). As a result, when the first change effect is executed, the display mode changes if the display position of the specific display of the execution target of the first change effect is the advance position, and the display mode does not change if the display position is the evacuation position. It has become.

In step S904711, if the effect control CPU 90101 is the end timing of the change effect (Y in step S904711), the display position fixing flag is reset if it is set (step S904711A), and the specific display of the execution target of the change effect is displayed. It is determined whether or not the display mode of the above is scheduled to change (step S904712), and if it is scheduled to change, the display mode of the specific display of the execution target is changed (step S904713). In step S904713, the specific display is set to a display mode according to the type of change effect (for example, when the first change effect is executed, the display mode is switched from the expressionless display mode to the display mode in which the eyes are opened and sweat is applied. On the other hand, when the second change effect is executed, the display mode is switched from the expressionless display mode to the display mode in which tears are shed), and then the display mode changes to blue or red. When the color is changed to blue or red, the display mode is switched to the expressionless display mode again.

Then, if the fluctuation time timer has timed out (step S908111), the effect control CPU 90101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect symbol fluctuation stop process (step S90803) (step S908112).

FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol fluctuation stop process (step S90803) in the effect control process process. In the effect symbol fluctuation stop process, first, the effect control CPU 90101 confirms whether or not the stop symbol display flag indicating that the stop symbol of the effect symbol is displayed is set (step S908301). If the stop symbol display flag is set, the process proceeds to step S908305. In this embodiment, when the jackpot symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the effect symbol, the stop symbol display flag is set in step S908304. Then, the stop symbol display flag is reset when the fanfare effect is executed. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag is set means that the jackpot symbol has been stopped and displayed, but the fanfare effect has not yet been executed. Therefore, the process of displaying the stop symbol of the effect symbol in step S908302 is executed. Without doing so, the process proceeds to step S908305.

When the stop symbol display flag is not set, the effect control CPU 90101 controls to stop and display the determined stop symbol (missing symbol, jackpot symbol) (step S908302).

After that, the effect control CPU 90101 clears the operation frequency storage area in the start winning command storage area and the active display storage area (step S905301). As described above, in the present embodiment, the operation frequency is updated for each fluctuation.

Further, when the effect control CPU 90101 does not display either the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol in the process of step S908302 (that is, when the out-of-order symbol is displayed) (N in step S908303), the effect control CPU 90101 Goes to step S908311.

When the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the process of step S908302 (Y in step S908303), the effect control CPU 90101 sets the stop symbol display flag (step S908304) and receives the big hit start designation command. It is confirmed whether or not the jackpot start designation command reception flag indicating that the jackpot start / sudden probability change jackpot start designation command reception flag is set or the small hit / sudden probability change jackpot start designation command reception flag indicating that the jackpot / sudden probability change jackpot start designation command is received is set (step S908305). .. When the jackpot start designation command reception flag or the small hit / sudden probability change jackpot start designation command reception flag is set, the effect control CPU 90101 resets the stop symbol display flag (step S908306) and responds to the fanfare effect. Select the process table (step S908307). If the big hit start designation command reception flag or the small hit / sudden probability change big hit start designation command reception flag is set, the effect control CPU 90101 resets the set flag.

Then, the effect control CPU 90101 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (step S908308), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number). According to the data 1 and the movable member control data 1), the effect device (effect display device 909 as the effect component, various lamps as the effect component, the speaker 9027 as the effect component, and the movable member 9078 as the effect component and the effect The control of the blade accessories 9079a and 9079b) is executed (step S908309).

Then, the effect control CPU 90101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S90804) (step S908310).

When it is determined that neither the big hit nor the small hit is performed (N in step S908303), the effect control CPU 90101 resets a predetermined flag (step S908311). For example, the effect control CPU 90101 resets the first symbol variation designation command reception flag and the second symbol variation designation command reception flag. The effect control CPU 90101 may reset the command reception flag immediately after being referred to in the effect control process process or the fourth symbol process process (for example, as shown in step S90811 in FIG. 67, the variation pattern. The variation pattern command reception flag may be reset as soon as the command reception flag is confirmed). However, for example, since the symbol variation designation command is referred to in both the effect control process process and the fourth symbol process process, as shown in this embodiment, the effect symbol variation stop process and the like are performed at the end of the variation. It is desirable to reset in the jackpot end effect process at the end of the jackpot. Then, the effect control CPU 90101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S90800) (step S908312).

76 and 77 are explanatory views showing a display example of the effect display device 909 when the change effect is executed. For example, FIGS. 76 (A1) to 76 (A3) show a display example when the first change effect for the hold display whose display position is the advance position is executed. For example, as shown in FIG. 76 (A1), an active display 9051 and three hold displays 9052 to 9054 are displayed as specific displays, and the display modes of all the specific displays are white. Further, as for the display position of each specific display, only the first hold display 9052 is the advance position, and the other specific displays (active display 9051, hold display 9053, 9054) are evacuation positions. Next, as shown in FIG. 76 (A2), the first change effect for the first hold display 9052 whose display position is the advance position is executed. At this time, the first hold display 9052 hit with the hammer X switches to a display mode in which the eyes are opened and sweat is sweated. Then, as shown in FIG. 76 (A3), the display mode of the first hold display 9052 on which the first change effect is executed changes from white to blue.

Further, for example, FIGS. 76 (B1) to 76 (B3) show a display example when the first change effect for the hold display whose display position is the evacuation position is executed. For example, as shown in FIG. 76 (B1), an active display 9051 and three hold displays 9052 to 9054 are displayed as specific displays, and the display modes of all the specific displays are white. Further, the display position of each specific display is the evacuation position. Next, as shown in FIG. 76 (B2), the first change effect for the first hold display 9052 whose display position is the retracted position is executed. At this time, the hammer X in the first change effect does not hit the first hold display 9052. Then, as shown in FIG. 76 (B3), the display mode of the first hold display 9052 on which the first change effect is executed does not change.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the rate at which the display mode of the specific display changes differs depending on the display position of the specific display that is the execution target of the first change effect (100% change if it is the advance position, and the evacuation position). If so, it does not change 100%).

Further, for example, FIGS. 77 (A1) to 77 (A3) show a display example when the second change effect for the hold display whose display position is the advance position is executed. For example, as shown in FIG. 77 (A1), an active display 9051 and three hold displays 9052 to 9054 are displayed as specific displays, and the display modes of all the specific displays are white. Further, as for the display position of each specific display, only the first hold display 9052 is the advance position, and the other specific displays (active display 9051, hold display 9053, 9054) are evacuation positions. Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (A2), the second change effect for the first hold display 9052 whose display position is the advance position is executed. At this time, the first hold display 9052 hit by the arrow Y is switched to a display mode in which tears are shed (a display mode different from that when hit with the hammer X in the first change effect). Then, as shown in FIG. 77 (A3), the display mode of the first hold display 9052 on which the second change effect is executed changes from white to blue.

Further, for example, FIGS. 77 (B1) to 77 (B3) show a display example when the second change effect for the hold display whose display position is the evacuation position is executed. For example, as shown in FIG. 77 (B1), an active display and three hold displays 9052 to 9054 are displayed as the specific display 9051, and the display modes of all the specific displays are white. Further, the display position of each specific display is the evacuation position. Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (B2), the second change effect for the first hold display 9052 whose display position is the retracted position is executed. At this time, the first hold display 9052 hit by the arrow Y is switched to a display mode in which tears are shed (a display mode different from that when hit with the hammer X in the first change effect). Then, as shown in FIG. 77 (B3), the display mode of the first hold display 9052 on which the second change effect is executed changes from white to blue.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the second change effect is executed, the display mode can be changed regardless of whether the display position of the specific display is the advance position or the retracted position. It has become. Even when the second change effect is executed, a pattern in which the shot arrow Y does not hit the specific display is provided as a pattern in which the display mode of the specific display of the execution target does not change.

As described above, according to this embodiment, a gaming machine capable of performing variable display, in which an operation is involved (in this example, a mode in which the display position is switched to an advance position or a retract position). A specific display corresponding to a variable display (in this example, an active display corresponding to a fluctuation during execution, still in a display mode in which the expressionless display mode is switched to a display mode in which the eyes are opened to sweat or a display mode in which tears are shed). It is possible to display a hold display corresponding to a fluctuation that has not been started, and a display mode of a specific display (display color (white, blue, red in this example). The shape, pattern, position, range, etc. to be displayed. The active display is displayed by performing steps S90663B and S90667B in the effect control microcomputer 90100, and the hold display is displayed by performing steps S903911 and S903929. Then, the display mode of the specific display is changed by performing step S904713) and the change suggestion effect suggesting a change in the display mode of the specific display (in this example, the change effect (first change effect, second change effect). )) Is a change suggestion effect execution means (in this example, in the effect control microcomputer 90100, the change effect is set in step S904506, the process table corresponding to the change effect is selected in step S90804, and step S908006 A part for executing a change effect by performing S908105) is provided.

Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, the specific display means operates the specific display operation mode (in this example, the display position (advance position, retract position)) when the change suggestion effect is executed. The display mode of the specific display can be changed at a different rate depending on the frequency (high frequency, low frequency) and other operation modes such as the display direction (for example, downward and rightward) (in this example). By executing steps S904707 to S904709, the effect control microcomputer 90100 displays the specific display at a rate of 100% when the display position of the specific display to be executed of the first change effect is the advance position. While changing the mode, when the display position of the specific display, which is the execution target of the first change effect, is the evacuation position, the display mode of the specific display is not changed (the display mode of the specific display is changed at a rate of 0%). Let)) As a result, the player can pay attention to the operation mode of the specific display.

In the present embodiment, it is a gaming machine capable of displaying both active display and hold display, and both of them can be displayed in a mode accompanied by an operation, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be possible to display only one of the active display and the hold display in a mode involving an operation. Further, for example, it may be possible to display only one of the active display and the hold display.

In addition, although it was decided that the operation mode and display mode of the active display and the hold display are common, the operation mode and the display mode are not limited to this, and the active display and the hold display can be displayed in different operation modes and display modes. May be.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display mode pattern and the change timing are determined at the start winning, and the presence / absence of the change effect and the operation frequency are determined at the start of the fluctuation, but the determination timing is not limited to this. Absent. For example, the display mode pattern may not be determined at the start winning, but whether or not the display mode is changed during the fluctuation may be determined at each start of the fluctuation (that is, the change timing may also be determined at the start of the fluctuation). Alternatively, the presence or absence of a change effect and the operation frequency may be determined at the time of starting winning.

Further, in the present embodiment, a maximum of four hold displays can be displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if both the first hold display and the second hold display can be displayed, a maximum of eight hold displays may be displayed.

Further, in the present embodiment, a change effect suggesting a change in the display mode of a single specific display is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and changes in the display mode of a plurality of specific displays are collectively performed. It may be possible to execute the change effect suggested by the above. For example, two arrows may be shot toward different specific displays to perform a change effect suggesting that the display mode of the specific display hit by the arrows changes.

In the present embodiment, whether the display position of the specific display is the advance position or the retracted position only when a part of the change suggestion effects (first change effect) is executed among the plurality of types of change suggestion effects. It was decided that the display mode of the specific display would change at a different rate depending on the rate, but when executing all types of change suggestion effects, the display position of the specific display will change at a different rate depending on whether it is the advance position or the evacuation position. The display mode of the specific display may be changed.

Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, the change suggestion effect execution means are the first change suggestion effect (in this example, the first change effect) and the second change suggestion effect (in this example, the second change suggestion effect). It is possible to execute any of a plurality of types of change suggestion effects including (change effect) (in this example, the effect control microcomputer 90100 performs any of the steps S90804, S90806, and S908105. The specific display means can display the specific display according to different operation modes depending on whether the executed change suggestion effect is the first change suggestion effect or the second change suggestion effect. (In this example, the effect control microcomputer 90100 switches from the expressionless display mode to the display mode in which the eyes are opened and sweats when the first change effect is executed by performing step S904713, and the specific display is performed. On the other hand, when the second change effect is executed, the display mode is switched from the expressionless display mode to the display mode in which tears are shed, and a specific display is displayed. The operation frequency changes depending on which change suggestion effect is executed. It may be a matter of fact.) As a result, the player can pay attention to the operation mode of the specific display.

In the present embodiment, the display mode of the specific display after the change effect is executed differs depending on the executed change effect, but before or during the change effect is executed. The display mode of the specific display may differ depending on the change effect to be executed. For example, when a change effect in which an apple falls from the sky is executed, the display mode of the specific display may be switched to the mode in which the mouth is opened before the apple is displayed, or after the apple is displayed. The display mode of the specific display may be switched by opening the mouth before the apple reaches the specific display.

Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, the specific display means displays the operation mode of the specific display before the change suggestion effect is executed (in this example, the operation frequency (high frequency, low frequency). The display mode of the specific display can be changed at different rates depending on the position (advanced position, retracted position) and other operation modes such as the display direction (for example, downward and rightward) (in this example, the display mode of the specific display can be changed). When the effect control microcomputer 90100 executes step S904508 using the operation frequency determination lottery table shown in FIG. 72 (C), the operation frequency of the specific display to be executed of the change effect is high. The rate of change in the display mode differs depending on whether the frequency is low.) As a result, the player can pay attention to the operation mode of the specific display.

Further, in the present embodiment, the specific display means displays the specific display in a mode accompanied by an operation regardless of whether or not the display mode is changed (in this example, the display position (advancement) for any of the specific displays. The change suggestion effect execution means can execute the change suggestion effect at a different ratio depending on the operation mode of the specific display (in this example, the effect control microcomputer 90100 is displayed). By executing step S904508 using the operation frequency determination lottery table shown in FIG. 72 (C), when the operation frequency is high, the change effect (first change effect) is compared with the case where the operation frequency is low. , The second change effect) is easy to execute). As a result, the player can pay attention to the operation mode of the specific display.

Further, in the present embodiment, the specific display means can display the specific display by switching between the specific operation mode (advanced position in this example) and the non-specific operation mode (retracted position in this example). In the example, the effect control microcomputer 90100 can execute steps S904704, S904709, and S904710), and when the operation mode of the specific display when the change suggestion effect is executed is the specific operation mode, the specific display is displayed. The display mode can be changed (in this example, the effect control microcomputer 90100 executes steps S904707 to S904713 when the display position of the specific display to be executed of the first change effect is the advance position. The display mode of the specific display can be changed). As a result, the player can pay attention to the operation mode of the specific display.

Further, in the present embodiment, the change suggestion effect execution means includes a first change suggestion effect (in this example, the first change effect) and a second change suggestion effect (in this example, the second change effect). Any of the types of change suggestion effects can be executed (in this example, the effect control microcomputer 90100 executes any of the change suggestion effects by performing steps S90804, S90806, and S908105). , The specific display means can switch between a specific operation mode (advance position in this example) and a non-specific operation mode (retract position in this example) to display a specific display (in this example, a micro for effect control). The computer 90100 can execute steps S904704, S904709, and S904710), and when the first change suggestion effect is executed, the display mode of the specific display can be changed when the operation mode of the specific display is the specific operation mode. (In this example, the effect control microcomputer 90100 displays the specific display when the display position of the specific display, which is the execution target of the first change effect, is the advance position by executing steps S904707 to S904713. On the other hand, when the second change suggestion effect is executed, the display mode of the specific display can be changed regardless of the operation mode of the specific display (in this example, the effect control microcomputer 90100 is capable of changing the mode). By executing steps S90471 to S904713, the display mode of the specific display, which is the execution target of the second change effect, can be changed regardless of whether the display position of the specific display is the advance position or the retracted position. ) It was decided. As a result, the effect of the effect can be improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, it can be suggested that the control is performed in an advantageous state depending on the display mode of the specific display (in this example, the effect control microcomputer 90100 is the display shown in FIG. 65 in steps S903906 and S903924. By determining the display mode pattern using the mode pattern determination lottery table, the display mode of the specific display changes depending on the display mode (suggests the reliability for the jackpot (white <blue <red)) and the operation mode of the specific display. It is possible to suggest whether or not (in this example, the effect control microcomputer 90100 determines the operation frequency by using the operation frequency determination lottery table shown in FIG. 72 (C) in step S904508. It was decided that the reliability (indicating low frequency <high frequency) that the display mode of the specific display changes depending on the above. As a result, the effect of the effect can be improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, a specific display that suggests whether or not the display mode changes depending on the operation mode (specific display on the suggesting side) and a specific display that suggests whether or not the display mode changes (suggestion). It was decided that the specific display on the side to be used) is the same as the specific display, but it is not limited to this, and even if the specific display on the suggesting side and the specific display on the suggested side are different from each other. Good. For example, it may be suggested that the display mode of the specific display B displayed adjacent to the specific display A changes depending on whether or not the operation frequency of the specific display A is high.

In the present embodiment, two types of change suggestion effects are provided, but only one type of change suggestion effects may be provided, or three or more types of change suggestion effects may be provided. May be provided.

Further, in the present embodiment, the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol may be executed according to the starting winning order in which the game balls are won in the first starting winning opening 9013 and the second starting winning opening 9014. ..

Further, in this embodiment, the pending change pattern and the change timing are determined by different lottery, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a plurality of data including information on the pending change pattern and the change timing (that is, data in which the display mode changes at which timing is predetermined) are provided, and the pending change corresponding to any of the data is provided. It may be decided by lottery whether to do it.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display of the hold display is performed at a timing before the start of the next change in which the hold display is started (for example, during the change being executed when the hold display is started). The mode is configured to be immutable, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display mode of the hold display can be changed at a timing before the next change in which the hold display is started is started. May be good. For example, the display mode of the hold display may be changeable during the fluctuation that is being executed when the hold display is started.

Further, in the present embodiment, the operation frequency of the hold display is always low from the start of the display of the hold display to the start of the next fluctuation, but it is not limited to this. It may be that the frequency is always high, or either the high frequency or the low frequency may be selected by lottery at the time of starting winning. In that case, it is desirable that the display mode of the hold display can be changed at a timing before the next change in which the hold display is started is started.

Further, in the present embodiment, the operation frequency of the specific display displayed at the start of the fluctuation is determined, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the operation frequency of all the specific displays (one active display and four hold displays) that can be displayed may always be determined regardless of the number of hold storages actually stored. For example, in consideration of a case where a start prize is generated during a fluctuation in which two hold memories are stored and a third or fourth hold display is displayed, the third or 4 is preliminarily displayed at the start of the change. It is also possible to determine the operation frequency of all displayable specific displays including the second hold display (determine all the operation frequencies of one active display and four hold displays at the start of each fluctuation). Good.

Further, in the present embodiment, it is determined that a start winning command storage area for storing information on the hold display and an active display storage area for storing information on the active display are provided, respectively. , Information on the hold display and information on the active display may be stored in a common storage area. In that case, in steps S904501, S904503B, S904508, and S904702, the processing is performed with reference to the common storage area.

Further, in the present embodiment, it is decided whether or not to switch the display position by a lottery based on the operation frequency, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a fixed operation pattern (a pattern in which the display position is switched at which timing is patterned) is provided for each operation frequency, and the display position may be switched based on the operation pattern. .. For example, as an operation pattern for high frequency, an operation pattern is provided in which display is repeated for 2 seconds at the evacuation position and then displayed for 3 seconds at the advance position, and as an operation pattern for low frequency, it is displayed for 5 seconds at the evacuation position. An operation pattern may be provided in which the display is repeated for 8 seconds at the advance position after the display.

When determining whether or not to execute the change effect, if a specific display whose display mode has already changed is displayed, the execution rate of the change effect may be increased. For example, when the blue specific display is already displayed, the execution rate of the change effect may be increased. As a result, the player can be expected to further change the display mode of the specific display whose display mode has already changed. In a gaming machine whose display mode can be changed in a plurality of stages, if there is a specific display that has already changed to the final stage display mode, even if a change effect targeting the specific display is executed. Since it is not possible to give a sense of expectation to the player, the execution of the change effect targeting the specific display may be restricted.

Further, in the present embodiment, the operation frequency of each specific display is determined, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation frequency of a plurality of specific displays may be determined collectively. For example, a combination of operation frequencies (high frequency, low frequency) in each specific hold may be selected.

In addition, in this embodiment, the display position of the specific display is forcibly switched according to the presence or absence of the change of the specific display which is the execution target of the first change effect (if it changes, it is switched to the advance position and changed). If not, the position is switched to the evacuation position. Refer to steps S904707 to S904710.) However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display position of the specific display of the execution target is the advance position by chance when the first change effect is executed. (For example, when the display position is switched to the advance position in step S904704), the display mode of the specific display may be changed. Specifically, the final display mode (which display mode will be changed) is determined at the time of starting prize (at that time, the change timing is not determined), and the specific display that has not yet changed to the final display mode is set. On the other hand, when the first change effect can be executed and the timing at which the first change effect is executed coincides with the timing at which the display mode of the specific display is controlled to the advance position, the display mode of the specific display is matched. May be changed.

In that case, even if the variation corresponding to the specific display is started (that is, when the active display is displayed as the specific display), if the final display mode has not changed, the display mode of the active display May be forcibly changed to the final display mode. Specifically, the first change effect may be executed and the display position of the active display may be forcibly switched to the advance position to change the final display mode, or the display position may be forcibly changed regardless of the display position. By executing a change effect (which may be a second change effect or another change effect) that specifically changes the display mode, the final display mode may be changed.

Further, the specific display may be displayed so that the movement method differs depending on the display mode. For example, when the specific display is white, it may be displayed by rotating, when it is blue, it may be displayed as jumping, and when it is red, it may be displayed as running around.

In the present embodiment, the reliability of changing to red by determining the display mode pattern according to the selection ratio shown in FIG. 65 is white <blue. For example, the ratio of big hits and small hits is extremely lower than the ratio of outliers, and in general, the number of reserved memories at the time of winning is 2 or more more than 1. Focusing on the case where the winning determination result in the second display mode pattern determination lottery table of B) is out of SP reach or other, Pt4 for the case where Pt1'to Pt4' (display mode pattern including white) is selected. The ratio of selecting'(display mode pattern changing from white to red) and Pt3'(display mode changing from blue to red) with respect to the case where Pt2'and Pt3'(display mode pattern including blue) are selected. The rate at which pattern) is selected is higher. As a result, blue is more likely to change to red than white.

In addition, a change suggestion effect that suggests a change in the display mode of the changed specific display whose display mode has already been changed, and a display of another specific display that is different from the changed specific display while the changed specific display is displayed. The change suggestion effect suggesting a change in the mode may be feasible in a mode in which at least a part is common. Specifically, it will be described with reference to the following modification 1. The description of the same parts as those in the above-described embodiment will be omitted.

In the first modification, the effect control microcomputer 90100 can change the display mode of a plurality of specific displays. Specifically, the processing of steps S903904, S903905, S903922, and S903923 in FIG. 64 in the above-described embodiment (that is, a new hold memory is stored in a state where the specific display of the display mode pattern in which the display mode changes is already displayed. When it occurs, the display mode of a plurality of specific displays can be changed by not executing the process (processing in which the display mode pattern of the new hold display is Pt1').

FIG. 78 is an explanatory diagram showing a display example of the effect display device 9 when the second change effect is executed in the modified example 1. For example, as shown in FIG. 78 (1), the active display 9051 and the three hold displays 9052 to 9054 are displayed as specific displays, and the display mode of the first hold display 9052 is blue, and the other display modes are blue. The display mode of the specific display (active display 9051, hold display 9053, 9054) is white. Further, the display position of each specific display is the evacuation position. At this time, as shown in FIG. 78 (1), the common second change effect (effect in which the arrow Y is emitted) is executed regardless of which specific display is targeted for execution.

When the first hold display 9052 whose display mode has already changed to blue is to be executed, the arrow Y hits the first hold display 9052 as shown in FIGS. 78 (2) and 78 (3). Then, the display mode changes from blue to red.

When a specific display (specifically, the second hold display 9053) different from the first hold display 9052 whose display mode has already changed to blue is to be executed, FIGS. 78 (4), ( As shown in 5), the arrow Y hits the second hold display 9053, and the display mode changes from white to blue.

As described above, in the modified example 1, the change suggestion effect executing means has already changed the display mode of the changed specific display (for example, the first hold shown in FIGS. 78 (1) to (2)). The change suggestion effect (for example, the second change effect shown in FIGS. 78 (1) and (2)) suggesting a change in the display mode of the display 9052) and the changed specific display in the state where the changed specific display is displayed. A change suggestion effect (for example, FIG. 78 (1), (for example)) suggesting a change in the display mode of another specific display (for example, the second reserved display 9053 shown in FIGS. 78 (1) and (4)) different from the above. 4), the second change effect shown in (5) can be executed in a mode in which at least a part is common (for example, a mode in which the arrow Y flies as shown in FIG. 78 (1)). And said. As a result, the content of the production can be given unexpectedness, and the effect of the production can be improved.

In this modification 1, the specific display that suggests a change in the change suggestion effect that is executed in a mode that is at least partially common to the change suggestion effect that suggests a change in the display mode of the changed specific display has been changed. Although it is decided that the display is on hold adjacent to the specific display, it is not limited to this. For example, it may be a hold display or an active display that are not adjacent to each other.

Further, in this modification 1, the case where a single changed specific display is displayed has been described, but the same process is executed even when a plurality of changed specific displays are displayed. May be good.

Further, in this modification 1, the example of the second change effect has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the first suggesting a change in the display mode of the changed specific display whose display mode has already been changed. The change effect and the first change effect that suggests a change in the display mode of another specific display different from the changed specific display in the state where the changed specific display is displayed are at least partially common. It may be executed (for example, after displaying the hammer in a common mode of moving left and right, it stops at the upper part of the specific display of the execution target).

Further, the specific display means includes at least a normal mode, a first specific mode having a higher expectation than the normal mode, and a second specific mode suggesting the content of the effect, for the specific display corresponding to the variable display. It is possible to display in the display mode of, and it is possible to execute the effect of the content suggested by the specific display of the second specific mode. After displaying the specific display in the second specific mode, the specific display of the second specific mode is displayed. The display mode of the specific display may be changed from the second specific mode to the first specific mode when the effect of the content suggested by the above is executed. Specifically, it will be described with reference to the following modification 2. The description of the same parts as those in the above-described embodiment will be omitted.

In the second modification, as the display mode of the hold display displayed on the hold storage display unit 18c, a normal display mode indicating the reliability of a big hit (probability change / normal / sudden probability change big hit) or a small hit, and a predetermined effect There is an effect suggestion display mode that suggests the execution of.

The normal display mode includes "white" displayed in white, "red" displayed in red, and "gold" displayed in gold, and includes a jackpot (probability change / normal / sudden probability change jackpot) and The reliability of being a small hit is gold> red> white.

In the effect suggestion display mode, the first special suggestion mode that suggests that the special zone effect is to be announced by displaying the characters "special" and the special zone effect by displaying the characters "special?" The second special suggestion mode that suggests that it is the subject of the advance notice, the pseudo-ream suggestion mode that suggests that the pseudo-ream is executed by displaying the character "NEXT", and the character "SP" are displayed. The SP suggestion mode suggesting that the character develops into super reach is included. The first special suggestion mode is a display mode that can be selected only when it is the notice target of the special zone effect, while the second special suggestion mode is selected regardless of whether or not it is the notice target of the special zone effect. It is a display mode to obtain. Further, the pseudo-ream suggestion mode is a display mode that can be selected only when the pseudo-ream is executed, and the SP suggestion mode is a display mode that can be selected only when developing into super reach.

The special zone effect is an effect of displaying a special background different from the normal background by one fluctuation or a plurality of continuous fluctuations. In addition, the special zone effect has a higher reliability for big hits (probability change / normal / sudden probability change big hit) and small hits as the number of executions increases. Hereinafter, starting the execution of the special zone effect may be referred to as "entering the special zone".

Immediately before entering the special zone, a successful entry effect is executed. The rush success effect is an effect that indicates that it is confirmed to enter the special zone after suggesting that it will enter the special zone (for example, an effect that displays "success!" After displaying "special zone chance!" ). Further, when the player does not enter the special zone, a rush failure effect that gives the player a sense of expectation by suggesting that the player enters the special zone may be executed. For example, after suggesting that you will enter the special zone as in the case of the successful entry effect, an effect that indicates that you will not enter the special zone (for example, "Failure ..." is displayed after displaying "Special zone chance!" Production) can be executed as a rush failure production. Hereinafter, the rush success effect and the rush failure effect may be collectively referred to as "rush notice effect".

The rush notice effect is an effect that is performed for 3 seconds from the start of the fluctuation. Then, when entering the special zone, the special zone effect is started 3 seconds after the start of the fluctuation (at the end of the successful entry effect). If the fluctuation time of the fluctuation for executing the rush notice effect is shorter than 3 seconds, the rush notice effect is forcibly terminated 1 second before the fluctuation stops. At that time, when entering the special zone, the successful entry effect is forcibly ended and the special zone effect is started.

In this modification 2, the display mode of displaying the hold display and the active display is determined when the corresponding hold memory occurs (at the time of starting winning). Specifically, when a start-up prize is generated, first, a change mode (holding change pattern and change timing) of the normal display mode is determined, and then it is determined whether or not to display in the effect suggestion display mode. If it is decided not to display in the effect suggestion display mode, the hold display is started in the normal display mode from the timing at the time of the start winning. In addition, when it is decided to display in the effect suggestion display mode, the display of the hold display is started in the effect suggestion display mode from the timing at the time of the start winning, and the effect of the suggestion content is executed (for example,). 5 seconds after starting the special zone production, 5 seconds after re-variating in the pseudo-ream, 5 seconds after starting super reach), or when it is decided not to execute (for example, rush failure) When the effect is executed), it usually changes to the suggestion display mode.

FIG. 79 is an explanatory diagram showing a display example in the case of displaying the hold display in the second special suggestion mode in the modified example 2. First, (1) while the active display 9051 and the two hold displays 9052 and 9053 are displayed, (2) a new hold memory is generated and the hold display 9054 corresponding to the hold memory is second. It is displayed in a special suggestion mode (“special?”). At this time, it is decided to execute the special zone effect in which the reserved memory is the target of advance notice. Further, at this time, it is assumed that the pending change pattern that changes from "white" to "red" and further changes to "gold" is determined, and the first and second change timings are determined.

Then, (3) the fluctuation ends at the deviation, and (4) the next fluctuation starts. At this time, the active display 9051 corresponding to the new fluctuation is displayed, and the hold display shifts. Then, the rush notice effect is executed (image P is displayed). When 3 seconds have passed since then, (5) it is notified that the entry was successful (image P is switched and displayed), and the special zone is entered (image Q is displayed). At a timing 5 seconds after that, the display mode of the hold display 9053 displayed in (6) the second special suggestion mode changes to "red".

After that, although not shown, the fluctuation ends at the deviation and the next fluctuation starts. At this time, the active display corresponding to the new fluctuation is displayed, and the hold display is shifted. Then, the display mode of the hold display displayed in "red" changes to "gold".

As described above, in the second modification, the specific display means displays the specific display (hold display, active display in this example) corresponding to the variable display in at least a normal mode (“white” in this example). ), The first specific mode (“red” in this example), which has a higher expectation than the normal mode, and the second specific mode (in this example, the first special suggestion mode) that suggests the content of the effect. , Second special suggestion mode, pseudo-continuous suggestion mode, SP suggestion mode)) can be displayed in any of the display modes (in this example, “white” or “red” as shown in FIG. 79. (The hold display can be displayed in the second special suggestion mode), and the effect execution means capable of executing the effect of the content suggested by the specific display in the second specific mode (in this example, FIGS. 79 (5), ( As shown in 6), the special zone effect suggested in the second special suggestion mode can be executed), and the specific display means displays the specific display in the second specific mode and then the second specific display means. The display mode of the specific display can be changed from the second specific mode to the first specific mode when the effect of the content suggested by the specific display of the mode is executed (in this example, as shown in FIG. 79). Five seconds after the special zone effect is started, the hold display 9053 displayed in the second special suggestion mode can be changed to "red"). This makes it possible to increase expectations for a specific aspect.

In this modified example 2, it was decided that a single display mode (“white”, “red”) was provided as the “normal mode” and the “first specific mode”, respectively, but the “normal mode” and the “normal mode” A plurality of display modes may be provided as at least one of the "first specific modes". Further, although it was decided that a plurality of display modes (first special suggestion mode, second special suggestion mode, pseudo-continuous suggestion mode, SP suggestion mode) are provided as the "second specific mode", the "second specific mode" is provided. A single display mode may be provided.

In addition, the effects suggested by the "specific display of the second specific mode" are not limited to those described above, and are step-up notice effects that gradually develop, character notice effects in which characters appear, and dialogue effects that display lines. , A button effect that prompts the player to operate the operation button 90120, an action effect that changes the display mode of the hold display or the active display, and the like.

Further, in this modification 2, the display mode suggesting the effect by characters (“special”, “special?”, “NEXT”, “SP”) is set as the “second specific mode”, but the character, button, or pattern is used. May suggest the content of the production.

Further, in this modification 2, 5 seconds after the start of the special zone effect, the pseudo continuous effect, or the super reach effect, "after displaying the specific display in the second specific mode, the specific display of the second specific mode is displayed. When the production of the content suggested by is executed ", but it is not limited to this. For example, it may be the time when the effect of the content suggested by the specific display of the second specific aspect is executed, or the timing before and after the time.

Further, in this modification 2, each effect is started "when the specific display is displayed in the second specific mode and then the effect of the content suggested by the specific display in the second specific mode is executed". It was decided to unify after 5 seconds, but it is not limited to this. For example, different timings are set in advance for each effect of the suggestion content (for example, 3 seconds after the start of the pseudo-ream if the effect of the suggestion content is pseudo-ream, and if the effect of the suggestion content is super reach, the super reach starts. (4 seconds after), or one of the timings may be determined by lottery from a plurality of timings. When deciding by lottery, the lottery ratio may differ depending on whether or not it is a big hit. Thereby, a feeling of expectation can be given by the timing when the display mode of the hold display or the active display changes from the second specific mode to the first specific mode.

Further, in this modification 2, the pending change pattern and the change timing are determined by different lottery, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a plurality of data including information on the pending change pattern and the change timing (that is, data in which the display mode changes at which timing is predetermined) are provided, and the pending change corresponding to any of the data is provided. It may be decided by lottery whether to do it.

Further, the timing of changing the display mode of the hold display or the active display may not be predetermined. For example, whether or not to change the display mode of the hold display or the active display each time the fluctuation is started. May be decided by lottery. Further, the display mode after the change may not be determined in advance, and for example, which display mode may be changed at the change timing may be determined by lottery.

Further, in this modification 2, as the display mode of the hold display or the active display, the normal display mode and the effect suggestion display mode are determined by different lottery, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a plurality of change patterns of the display mode including the normal display mode and the effect suggestion display mode may be provided, and it may be determined which change pattern is used to change the display mode.

Further, in this modification 2, when the hold display or the active display is displayed in the effect suggestion display mode, it is not displayed in the normal display mode, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if the hold display or the active display in the normal display mode is displayed as an image having a lower display priority than the hold display or the active display in the effect suggestion display mode, the hold display or the effect suggestion display mode is displayed. Even during the display of the active display, the same display as in the second modification can be performed without interrupting the display control of the normal display mode (change control of the display mode at the change timing).

Further, in the second modification, the effect executing means may not execute the effect of the content suggested by the specific display of the second specific mode even if the specific display is displayed in the second specific mode (for example). , The hold display or active display can be displayed in the second special suggestion mode even when the special zone effect is not executed. That is, when the hold display or active display is displayed in the second special suggestion mode. , The special zone effect which is the suggestion content may not be executed.), The specific display means may be applied to the second specific mode even when the effect of the content suggested by the specific display of the second specific mode is not executed. The display mode of the specific display displayed in the above mode can be changed to the first specific mode (for example, the special zone effect is not executed even though the hold display or the active display is displayed in the second special suggestion mode. Occasionally, it may be changed to "red", which is the first specific aspect). As a result, it is possible to maintain the expectation when the effect of the content suggested by the specific display of the second specific aspect is not executed.

Further, in the second modification, the specific display means can display the specific display in the first specific mode, which has a higher expectation than the second specific mode (for example, a big hit or a small hit than the second special suggestion mode). The hold display or the active display can be displayed in "red", which has a high degree of reliability for hitting.) Thereby, the expectation for the first specific aspect can be increased.

Further, in the second modification, the specific display means can display the specific display in the first specific mode, which has a higher expectation than the effect of the content suggested by the specific display in the second specific mode (for example,. The hold display or the active display can be displayed in "red", which is more reliable than the special zone effect for being a big hit or a small hit). Thereby, the expectation for the first specific aspect can be increased.

Further, in the second modification, the specific display means can further change the display mode of the specific display changed from the second specific mode to the first specific mode (for example, the display mode of the hold display or the active display is produced. It may change from the suggestion display mode to "red" and further to "gold"). As a result, it is possible to increase the expectation for the display mode of the specific display after the change to the first specific mode.

Further, in the second modification, the specific display means is a plurality of types of second specific modes having different suggestion contents (in this example, the first special suggestion mode, the second special suggestion mode, the pseudo-continuous suggestion mode, and the SP suggestion mode). The specific display can be displayed in, and the display mode of the specific display is changed from the second specific mode to the first specific mode at a different rate depending on the type of the second specific mode (for example, "red" is included. When the pending change pattern (other than P01) is displayed, the ratio of which effect suggestion display mode is displayed is different. Therefore, it is changed to "red" at a different ratio depending on the type of the effect suggestion display mode. It may be.) As a result, it is possible to pay attention to the display mode of the specific display.

In this modification 2, when the hold display or the active display is displayed in the pseudo-ream suggestion mode, the pseudo-ream effect is always executed according to the corresponding fluctuation, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pseudo-ream is not limited to this. When the hold display or the active display is displayed in the suggestion mode, there may be a case where the pseudo continuous effect is executed and a case where the pseudo continuous effect is not executed. Similarly, when the hold display or the active display is displayed in the SP suggestion mode, there may be a case where the super reach effect is executed and a case where the super reach effect is not executed.

It should be noted that this modification 2 has a configuration in which it is possible to recognize (look ahead) that the fluctuation is accompanied by one or two pseudo-reams based on the fluctuation category command received at the time of starting winning, so once. Alternatively, the pseudo-ream suggestion mode can be executed with the fluctuation accompanied by two pseudo-reams as the advance notice target, but the pseudo-ream suggestion mode may be executed even with the fluctuation with three pseudo-reams as the notice target. ..

Further, the change mode in the pending change pattern includes not only the normal display mode but also the effect suggestion display mode, and the change mode to the normal display mode and the effect suggestion display mode can be collectively determined. Good. For example, a pending change pattern that changes from "white" to the first special suggestion display mode, a pending change pattern that changes from the second special suggestion display mode to "red", or a change from "white" to a pseudo-continuous suggestion mode. Furthermore, a plurality of pending change patterns such as a pending change pattern that changes to "red" and a pending change pattern that changes from "white" to the SP suggestion display mode are provided, and which of the pending change patterns should be selected is selected. It may be that.

Further, the pending change pattern may be determined using a common pending change pattern determination table regardless of the winning determination result, or a plurality of pending change pattern determination tables are provided and received. The pending change pattern may be determined using the pending change pattern determination table according to the variable category command.

Further, although the description is omitted in this modification 2, it is determined at the time of starting winning that the fluctuation is accompanied by a pseudo-ream including a plurality of re-variations, and it is decided to display the hold display in the pseudo-ream suggestion mode. In this case, it may be possible to determine at which re-variation timing the pseudo-continuous suggestion mode changes to the normal display mode (for example, “red” or “gold”). For example, when it is decided to change the display mode at the first re-variation timing, the execution of the pseudo-ream including the first re-variation is suggested by the pseudo-ream suggestion mode, while the second re-variation. When it is decided to change the display mode at the fluctuation timing, the execution of the pseudo-ream including the two re-variations is suggested by the pseudo-ream suggestion mode. That is, when it is confirmed at the time of starting winning that the fluctuation is accompanied by a pseudo-revolution including a plurality of re-variations, and it is decided to display the hold display in the pseudo-ream suggestion mode, the pseudo-revariance including one re-variation is included. It may be possible to determine whether the execution of the ream is the suggestion target or the execution of the pseudo-ream including the two revariations is the suggestion target.

Further, a plurality of display modes are provided as the pseudo-ream suggestion mode, and the number of re-variations may be suggested depending on which type of pseudo-ream suggestion mode is used to display the hold display. For example, in the case where the pseudo-ream suggestion modes A to C are provided and the pseudo-ream performs one re-variation, it is easy to display the hold display in the pseudo-ream suggestion mode A, and the re-variation is performed twice. In the case of a pseudo-ream, it is easy to display the hold display in the pseudo-ream suggestion mode B, and in the case of a pseudo-ream that performs three revariations, it is easy to display the hold display in the pseudo-ream suggestion mode C. May be good.

Further, in this modification 2, the special zone effect is started 3 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, but the start timing (rush timing) of the special zone effect is not limited to this. For example, the special zone effect may be started at the timing when the fluctuation is started or at a predetermined timing during the execution of the predetermined effect (for example, the super reach effect). Further, if the fluctuation is accompanied by a pseudo-ream, the special zone effect may be started at the first re-variation timing or the second re-variation timing. In addition, a lottery may be used to determine at which of the plurality of timings the special zone effect is to be started.

Further, it may be a gaming machine that can be executed by combining any control among the controls in the gaming machines shown in the above-described embodiment, the first modification and the second modification.

Further, the specific display of the second specific mode is accompanied by an operation, and the content suggested by the specific display of the second specific mode is different depending on the operation mode of the specific display of the second specific mode when the change suggestion effect is executed. (For example, the execution ratio of the special zone effect suggested in the second special suggestion mode differs depending on the display position of the specific display of the second special suggestion mode when the change effect is executed). May be. As a result, the player can be made to pay attention to the operation mode of the specific display of the second specific mode.

Further, the specific display of the second specific mode is accompanied by an operation, and the content suggested by the specific display of the second specific mode is different depending on the operation mode of the specific display of the second specific mode before the change suggestion effect is executed. (For example, the execution ratio of the special zone effect suggested in the second special suggestion mode differs depending on the operation frequency of the specific display of the second special suggestion mode before the change effect is executed). May be. As a result, the player can be made to pay attention to the operation mode of the specific display of the second specific mode.

Further, in the above embodiment, in order to notify the effect control microcomputer 90100 of the variation time and the variation pattern indicating the variation mode such as the type of reach effect and the presence / absence of the pseudo-ream, when the variation is started, 1 Although an example of transmitting one variation pattern command is shown, the variation pattern may be notified to the effect control microcomputer 90100 by two or more commands. Specifically, when notifying by two commands, the game control microcomputer 90560 uses the first command to indicate the presence / absence of a pseudo-ream, the presence / absence of a sliding effect, etc. A command indicating the fluctuation time and fluctuation mode before the second stop is sent, and the second command indicates the type of reach, the presence or absence of a re-lottery effect, etc. after reaching the reach (if it does not reach the so-called first). 2 After the stop, a command indicating the fluctuation time and the fluctuation mode may be transmitted. In this case, the effect control microcomputer 90100 may perform the effect control in the variation display based on the variation time derived from the combination of the two commands. The game control microcomputer 90560 notifies the fluctuation time by each of the two commands, and the effect control microcomputer 90100 selects the specific fluctuation mode to be executed at each timing. You may do it. When sending two commands, the two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt, and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the first command is sent (for example, the next timer interrupt). In), the second command may be sent. The variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the order of transmission can be changed as appropriate. By notifying the fluctuation pattern by two or more commands in this way, it is possible to reduce the amount of data that must be stored as the fluctuation pattern command.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, "different ratios" are not limited to those having different ratios due to a relationship such as A: B = 70%: 30% or A: B = 30%: 70%. It is a concept that includes those having different ratios due to the relationship such as A: B = 100%: 0% (that is, one having 100% allocation and the other having 0% allocation).

Further, in the above embodiment, for example, a case where a plurality of types of special symbols and effect symbols of "1" to "9" are variably displayed and a display result is derived and displayed is shown. I can't be limited. For example, the variably displayed symbol and the derived symbol do not necessarily have to be the same, and a symbol different from the variably displayed symbol may be derived and displayed. Further, it is not always necessary to variably display a plurality of types of symbols, and the variable display may be executed using only one type of symbol. In this case, for example, the variable display may be executed by alternately turning on and blinking the one type of symbol display. Even in this case, one type of symbol used for the variable display may be derived and displayed at the end, or a symbol different from the one type of symbol may be derived and displayed at the end. It may be a thing.

Regarding the above-described embodiment, the gaming machine (so-called first-class gaming machine) that shifts to the jackpot gaming state based on the variable display result of the special symbol or the effect symbol has been described, but the variable provided in the gaming area has been described. A gaming machine (so-called second-class gaming machine) that shifts to a jackpot gaming state based on a gaming ball winning (V winning) in a specific winning opening (V winning opening) in the winning ball device (so-called accessory). , May be applied to a gaming machine in which the first type and the second type are combined.

Further, in the present embodiment, it is possible to shift to the probabilistic state based on the jackpot type of the jackpot that has occurred, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a specific area through which a game ball can pass is provided in the big winning opening, and when the game ball passes through the specific area during a big hit, the game shifts to a probabilistic state, while the game ball passes through the specific area during the big hit. It may be such that it shifts to the normal state when it does not pass. In that case, by changing the ease of passing the game ball to the specific area depending on the jackpot type, a substantial probability variation jackpot and a non-probability variation jackpot may be realized. For example, the ease of passing the game ball to a specific area may be changed by changing the opening time of the big winning opening depending on the big hit type. Specifically, the big hit type with a long opening time of the big winning opening is set as a big hit (substantially probable variable big hit) in which the game ball easily passes to a specific area, and the big hit type with a short opening time of the big winning opening is played in a specific area. It may be a big hit (substantially non-probable variable big hit) that the ball does not easily pass through.

Further, in the above embodiment, the game control microcomputer 90560 side determines whether or not a big hit is obtained and the winning judgment (look-ahead judgment) of the variation pattern type, and a command (symbol designation command) indicating the winning judgment result. , Variable category command) is transmitted, and the pre-reading advance notice effect is executed on the side of the effect control microcomputer 90100 based on the command indicating the winning determination result. , The effect control microcomputer 90100 may be configured to perform a winning determination (look-ahead determination). In this case, for example, the game control microcomputer 90560 transmits a command for specifying only the values of the jackpot determination random number (random R') and the variation pattern type determination random number (random 2') extracted when the start winning is generated. In this case, the effect control microcomputer 90100 may be configured to perform a winning determination (look-ahead determination) based on the value of a random number specified by those commands.

Further, in the above embodiment, the effect control board 9080, the audio output board 9070, and the lamp driver board 9035 are provided as the board on which the circuit for controlling the effect device is mounted. However, the circuit for controlling the effect device is provided. It may be mounted on one substrate. Further, a first effect control board (display control board) on which a circuit for controlling the effect display device 909 and the like is mounted, and a circuit for controlling other effect devices (lamp, LED, speaker 9027, etc.) are mounted. Two boards may be provided with the effect control board of 2.

Further, in the above embodiment, the game control microcomputer 90560 directly transmits a command to the effect control microcomputer 90100, but the game control microcomputer 90560 is another substrate (for example, FIG. 29). The sound / lamp board having the functions of the circuits mounted on the audio output board 9070, the lamp driver board 9035, etc., or the sound output board 9070 and the functions of the circuits mounted on the lamp driver board 9035). A control command may be transmitted so as to be transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 90100 on the effect control board 80 via another substrate. In that case, the command may simply pass through another board, or a control means such as a microcomputer is mounted on the audio output board 9070, the lamp driver board 9035, and the sound / lamp board, and the control means receives the command. Controls related to voice control and lamp control are executed according to the operation, and the received command is changed to a simplified command as it is or, for example, a simplified command is used to control the effect display device 9 for the effect control microcomputer 90100. It may be sent to. Even in that case, the effect control microcomputer 90100 performs display control in response to the effect control command directly received from the game control microcomputer 90560 in the above embodiment, and similarly, the sound output board 9070 and the lamp driver. Display control can be performed according to a command received from the board 9035 or the sound / lamp board.

In the above-mentioned (1) as a means for solving the problem, as an example of the change suggestion effect, the first change effect (display effect in which the hammer is swung down toward the target specific display) and the second change effect. The effect (display effect in which an arrow flies toward the specific display to be targeted), that is, the effect by image display is illustrated, but as a change suggestion effect, instead of the effect by image display or in addition to the effect by image display. Therefore, the effect may be performed by the movement of the movable means (movable body such as a movable accessory). Even if a change suggestion effect is performed by the operation of the movable means, the player can be made to pay attention to the operation mode of the specific display. In particular, if a change suggestion effect is performed by the operation of the movable means in addition to the effect by the image display, the player can be further focused on the operation mode of the specific display.
Further, when the change suggestion effect is performed by the operation of the movable means, the effect auxiliary display may be performed in relation to the operation of the movable means. By doing so, the execution patterns of the production auxiliary display can be further diversified, and it is possible to prevent the game from being enjoyed.
In addition, the display mode of the specific display is changed at a different rate depending on the operation mode of the specific display when the change suggestion effect is executed. In addition, the operation of the specific display when the change suggestion effect is executed. It may be controlled to an advantageous state at a different ratio depending on the embodiment. That is, if the operation mode of the specific display when the change suggestion effect is executed is a special operation mode, the display mode of the specific display can be easily changed and controlled to an advantageous state as compared with other operation modes. On the contrary, it is difficult to change the display mode of the specific display as compared with other operation modes, but when the display mode of the specific display changes, as compared with the case where the display mode of the specific display changes due to other operation modes. It may be made easier to be controlled in an advantageous state. By doing so, the player can pay more attention to the operation mode of the specific display. Further, if the operation mode of the specific display when the change suggestion effect is executed is a special operation mode, it may be determined that the operation mode is controlled to an advantageous state. By doing so, the player can be further focused on the operation mode of the specific display.

Further, in the above embodiment, a pachinko machine is taken as an example of the gaming machine, but in the present invention, a predetermined number of bets are set by inserting medals, and a plurality of types are used according to the operation of the operation lever by the player. When the symbol is rotated and the symbol is stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by the player, if the combination of the stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols, it is applied to the slot machine in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player. It is also possible.

Further, in the above embodiment, an example is obtained in which a gaming medium is used as a gaming machine, but the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to a gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as a prize, and is not limited to a gaming ball. It can also be applied to an enclosed gaming machine that encloses a game medium such as the above and gives a score when the conditions for giving a prize are satisfied.

Further, in the above embodiment, there are probabilistic jackpots and normal jackpots as jackpot types, and a gaming machine that is controlled to a probabilistic state after the jackpot game is completed is shown based on the fact that the jackpot type is determined to be probabilistic jackpots. , Not limited to such gaming machines. For example, a special variable winning ball device having a predetermined probability variation region inside (a probability variation region may be provided in only one special variable winning ball device, or a plurality of special variable winning balls provided. A probability variation area may be provided in a part of the device), and the probability variation is determined based on the game ball passing through the probability variation area in the special variable winning ball device during the jackpot game. It is also possible to apply the configuration shown in the above embodiment to a gaming machine that is controlled to be in a probabilistic state after completion.

The present invention is suitably applied to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine in which a player can play a predetermined game.

1 ... Pachinko game machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Game machine frame 4A, 4B ... Special symbol display device 5 ... Image display device 6A ... Ordinary winning ball device 6B ... Ordinary variable winning ball device 7 ... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R… Speaker 9… Game effect lamp 11… Main board 12… Production control board 13… Voice control board 14… Lamp control board 15… Relay board 20… Ordinary symbol display 21… Gate switch 22A, 22B… Starting port switch 23… Count switch 31A ... Stick controller 31B ... Push button 100 ... Game control microcomputers 101, 121 ... ROM
102, 122 ... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124 ... Random number circuit 120 ... CPU for effect control
123 ... Display control unit 125 ... I / O
901 ... Pachinko game machine 908a ... 1st special symbol display 908b ... 2nd special symbol display 909 ... Production display device 9013 ... 1st start winning opening 9014 ... 2nd starting winning opening 9018c ... Hold storage display 9018d ... Active display Part 9020 ... Special variable winning ball device 9031 ... Game control board (main board)
9056 ... CPU
90560 ... Game control microcomputer 9080 ... Production control board 90100 ... Production control microcomputer 90101 ... Production control CPU
90109 ... VDP

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of variable display
A specific display means capable of displaying a plurality of specific displays corresponding to the variable display in a mode accompanied by an operation and changing the display mode of the specific display,
A change suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a change suggestion effect suggesting a change in the display mode of the specific display is provided.
The specific display means can change the display mode of the specific display at a different rate depending on the operation mode of the specific display when the change suggestion effect is executed.
A change determining means for determining whether or not there is a change in the display mode of the specific display,
Further provided with an operation mode selection means for selecting an operation mode of a specific display,
The specific display means displays the specific display in the operation mode selected by the operation mode selection means.
The operation mode selection means
As the operation mode of the specific display, either a first operation mode or a second operation mode in which the display position is changed more frequently than the first operation mode can be selected.
When selecting the operation mode of one particular display, in different specific display from the specific display of the one, non mites display mode is determined to vary the display mode by the change determining means is changed When the unchanged specific display is included, the second operation mode is selected as the operation mode of the one specific display at a higher rate than when the unchanged specific display is not included.
The change suggestion effect executing means is a gaming machine characterized in that the change suggestion effect can be executed at a different ratio depending on the operation mode of the specific display.

Images